OWNER’S

MANUAL
Cod. 271054
English

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert
CAUTION the user to the presence of uninsulated “dan-
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
gerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
DO NOT OPEN
that may be of sufficient magnitude to consti-
tute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF The exclamation point within an equilateral tri-
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER angle is intended to alert the user to the pres-
(OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ence of important operating and maintenance
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. (servicing) instructions in the literature accom-
panying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
1. Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product.
2. Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not
expose to rain.
3. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be
used with the components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to
follow the assembly instructions found at the back of the manual.
4. This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable
of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a
high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
you should consult an audiologist.
5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where
one could walk on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind.
6. This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
7. This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that
produce heat.
8. This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or
as marked on the product.
9. This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety
feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
10. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of
time.
11. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
12. This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
c) the product has been exposed to rain; or
d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or
e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14. Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the
product or as optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any
optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured before use.
15. Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology
(S.W.P.) that may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the
owner’s manual for additional information.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents
USER GUIDE
• 1 Quick Guide
Introduction i
Power up 1. 1
Adjusting the general volume 1. 2
The initial status (default) 1. 2
Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles 1. 3
Listen to the Demo Songs 1. 5
Multimedia 1. 6
Selecting instrument Sounds 1. 8
Selecting the Performances 1. 11
Play the Programmable Pads 1. 12
Play with Effects or bypass them 1. 12
Play with headphones 1. 13
Play with the pedals 1. 13
Play with the wheels 1. 14
Reverb control 1. 15
Equalization 1. 15
Transpose the instrument (Semitones) 1. 16
Transposing tracks by octaves 1. 17
Preload 1. 18
Record a Song - Quick Rec Recording 1. 20
• 2 Front & Rear Panel
Front Panel 2. 3
Rear Panel (Connections) 2. 9
• 3 Basic concepts
Connections 3. 7
The Display 3. 10
Data Entry 3. 18
User Configurations 3. 23
• 4 Sounds and Performances
Selecting single Sounds 4. 2
Selecting Performances 4. 4
Select Sounds, Performances or Styles using Display Hold 4. 5
How to Program Performances 4. 6
How to Store Performances 4. 16
Restoring the original Performance settings 4. 22
• 5 Styles
Selecting Styles 5. 1
The accompaniment tracks 5. 5
The Style controls 5. 6
The chord recognition modes (Arrange Mode) 5. 9
Dynamic Arrange 5. 13
Autobacking 5. 13
Tempo 5. 19
Restoring the Style-Performances 5. 20

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Contents i
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 6 Disk & Hard disk
The general «Disk» procedure 6. 5
Load Operations 6. 8
Save operations 6. 21
General disk handling information 6. 35
• 7 Songs & MIDI files
What is a Song 7. 1
What is a MIDI File 7. 1
Selecting Songs 7. 4
Song Playback/Jukebox 7. 5
«Play view» parameters 7. 7
Play view Soft buttons 7. 9
Jukebox Soft buttons 7. 11
To display score, chords and lyrics (Score button) 7. 11
Rapid Song recording (QuickRec) 7. 17
Restoring the Songs memory 7. 22
• 8 MIDI
Playing WK4 with a master keyboard 8. 4
WK4 used as a controlling device 8. 7
Programming Songs on an external sequencer 8. 8
• 9 Digital Signal Processor
Selecting the effect types 9. 2
Bypassing the effects 9. 4
Regulating the Send levels 9. 5
REFERENCE GUIDE
• 10 Selection/Help
Selecting Performances 10. 1
Selecting Styles 10. 2
Selecting Sounds 10. 3
Selecting Songs 10. 6
Selecting Song-Performances 10. 7
Display Hold 10. 8
Effects Off 10. 8
Help 10. 9
• 11 Recording a Song
The Quick Rec method 11. 2
The Record method 11. 3
The «Record View» page in detail 11. 6
• 12 User Style recording
Recording 12. 2
The «Record View» page in detail 12. 5
• 13 Edit overview
How to navigate through the Edit pages 13. 1
The Edit Pages 13. 2
Memorizing modifications to a Performance 13. 4
• 14 Edit Effects
Effects type 14. 1
Send Level 14. 2
General Eff 1 balance 14. 2

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ii Contents
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Effects programming 14. 3
Effect 1 - Reverb table 14. 5
Effect 2 - Modulation table 14. 6
• 15 Edit MIDI
MIDI Channels 15. 1
Configuration 15. 2
MIDI Filters 15. 3
General settings 15. 3
Common Channel/Arrangement 15. 6
MIDI Dump 15. 7
Local Off 15. 9
MIDI Lock 15. 9
• 16 Edit Mixer
Volume 16. 1
Pan 16. 1
Random pan 16. 2
Audio Out 16. 2
Equalizer 16. 3
• 17 Edit Controllers/Pads
Wheels 17. 1
Pedals Programming 17. 2
Pads & Ped/Pads Lock 17. 3
The Switch Pedal Functions 17. 4
The Continuous Pedal Functions 17. 5
• 18 Edit Tracks/Splits
Transpose 18. 1
Master Transpose enable/disable 18. 1
Detune 18. 2
Random Pitch 18. 2
Mode/Priority 18. 3
Velocity curve 18. 3
Velocity Range 18. 4
Harmony 18. 4
Delay 18. 6
Key Range 18. 6
Create Track 18. 7
Copy Track 18. 7
Erase Track 18. 8
• 19 Edit PerfSound/Sound Patch
Edit Perf Sound 19. 2
Edit Sound Patch 19. 5
• 20 Option 20. 1
Option 20. 1
• 21 Edit General
General controls 21. 2
Tuning/Scale 21. 2
Pedalboard/Computer 21. 4
Date & Time 21. 5
Display controls 21. 6
Mic/Line Input 21. 6

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Contents iii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Battery & Release 21. 9
System Info 21. 9
Restore 21. 9
• 22 Edit Song
The main Menu Options 22. 2
Erase 22. 3
Move 22. 5
Copy 22. 6
Quantize 22. 8
Insert measures 22. 10
Delete measures 22. 11
Velocity 22. 12
Transpose 22. 13
Microscope 22. 14
Master Track 22. 17
Score & Edit Score 22. 20
• 23 Edit Style
Erase 23. 3
Move 23. 5
Copy 23. 6
Quantize 23. 8
Insert Measures 23. 10
Delete measures 23. 11
Velocity 23. 12
Transpose 23. 13
Microscope 23. 14
Mask 23. 17
• 24 Preload
Playback all the Songs or MIDI Files on disk 24. 1
Create a Preload list 24. 2
The Preload functions 24. 3
• 25 Edit Disk & Hard Disk
Erase 25. 2
Copy 25. 4
Move 25. 6
Utility 25. 8
Additional functions 25. 12
APPENDIX
Tables (Sounds, Drumkits, Styles, Performances, Effects,) A. 1-21
MIDI Implementation chart A. 22
MIDI Controllers A. 24
Glossary A. 25
Index (alphabetical) A. 29

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

iv Contents
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 User
Guide
• Introduction
• 1 Guick Guide
• 2 Layouts
• 3 Basic concepts
• 4 Sounds & Performances
• 5 Styles
• 6 Disk & Hard Disk
• 7 Songs & MIDI Files
• 8 MIDI
• 9 Effects

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

1. The WK4 should contain the following items from the factory:
a) Instrument;
b) 3 Floppy disks (1 Operating System (OS) -Disk, 2 Demo disks);
c) Owner’s manual.

2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance center, always pro-
vide the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate).

Generalmusic on Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline
all liability for eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or
reproduced in part or in whole without prior written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the
right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications it considers necessary to any of its products without prior
notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons resulting from improper use of the
instrument.

Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check
with an authorized Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center.

Copyright Generalmusic © 1997. All rights reserved.

Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (Apple, IBM, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS,
Windows) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and
Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

User Guide
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thanks for purchasing Generalmusic’s WK4 World Keyboard! Your World Key-
board is packed with high quality sounds and auto accompaniments, advanced professional features
and a simple user interface with a graphic display allowing total control of all the performance and
programming activities.

MULTIMEDIA FACILITIES
The WK4 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the instru-
ment. With the optional A/V board, a guitar player can connect to the audio inputs of the WK4 and play
the chords which appear on a monitor connected to the instrument’s video outputs, and mix his sounds
with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!). At the same time a group of singers
can follow the lyrics projected on a television (or other video projection device) by the WK4 video
interface.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL

The Owner’s Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.

How to use the manual

Do not use it as a paperweight: read it. If you understand how WK4 operates, you can save a lot of time.
You are encouraged to experiment with alternative operating methods: the WK4 is sufficiently flexible to
permit several approaches to obtain the same results. This User Guide offers information on three
different levels of complexity: as numbered pictures or images, as brief instructions and as detailed
instructions. You can limit yourself to following the images only, or by reading the bold black type, or by
referring to the normal text containing detailed instructions.

2nd level - procedure in 1

1. Insert the disk in the disk drive.
concise form The first step in loading songs from a
3rd level - detailed disk is to insert a disk containing com-
patible songs into the disk drive of the
instructions WK. This instrument is compatible with 1st. level - numbered
WX Series songs, Standard MIDI Files
and of course, WK Series songs.
images

The second part of the manual contains the Reference Guides which describe the instrument’s func-
tions in detail without discussing procedures. Experienced users can limit themselves to the reference
chapters.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Introduction i
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SPECIFICATIONS by a Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning
off the instrument. Sample-RAM allows to load
• Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities
new samples (Waves) on which RAM Sounds
Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbric-
can be based.
ity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32
parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to • Volatile Sample RAM (optional)
a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of
assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to additional Sample-RAM via standard 30 pin
the auto-accompaniment section. computer SIMMs obtainable from most com-
puter outlets.
• Sound generation
Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modi- • Digital Effects Processor
fied by programmable digital filters (DCF, Dig- Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in
itally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs
singularly or in pairs up to a maximum of 3 and modulations). A flexible matrix allows dif-
Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a max- ferent effects to be assigned to every track.
imum of 6 Waves per voice. • Sequencer
• ROM-Sounds The 32 track sequencer has a Microscope
ROM (permanent memory) contains 8 mega- function (microscopic edit) and Score facility
bytes of samples, which are the source of over (to display Score, chords and Lyrics). The
600 ROM-Sounds. QuickRec recording method allows the rapid
recording of a Song by using existing Styles.
• RAM-Sounds
The standard System-RAM allows you to store
You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based
up to 250.000 events distributed through 16
on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds
Songs.
can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third par-
ties, or can be created by the user with the • Jukebox & Preload
optional sound editor program. Sounds can The Jukebox function allows you to chain the
be loaded from WK4 or WX/SX Series disks. Songs in memory and play them one after the
other with a single command. The Preload
• Performance-Sounds
function allows you to create a list of disk-
The “Edit Perf Sound” and “Edit Sound Patch”
based Songs or MIDI file and play them all by
functions permits quick modification of Sounds
means of a single command, without first load-
and Drumkits to produce “Performance-
ing all data in memory.
Sounds”. The modifications are stored in Per-
formance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or Per- • Automatic accompaniment
formances to load the correct sounds. Styles provide automatic musical accompani-
ments, consisting of 8 tracks. Every Style has
• System-RAM
4 Variations. Up to 32 disk based Styles (User
System-RAM is the microprocessor memory
programmable) can be loaded and automati-
zone, also used to store Songs, programma-
cally stored in the battery backed system mem-
ble Styles, Performances and RAM-Sounds af-
ory.
ter powering up the instrument. It is backed
by a rechargeable battery. The amount of • Disk drive
available memory to store the data is approx. Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in
1.9 megabytes (1.6 Mb as standard System- WK4 expanded format (1.6 megabyte) or stand-
RAM boosted to 1.9 Mb by a DRAM included ard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte). The Atari ST/
with the instrument). Falcon format (720 Kb) can be used for MIDI
file exchanges. WK4 is able to initialize disks
• Backed S-RAM (optional)
for every format. It is possible to load RAM-
WK4 can be fitted with an optional 2 mega-
Sounds, Styles, and Songs from WK4, WX2,
bytes of RAM for samples (Waves), backed
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ii Introduction
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SX2 floppy disks. If a Sample-RAM is installed, LINE IN inputs. The optional Generalmusic
it is also possible to load new samples from disk Audio/Video board sends the input signals to
(as RAM Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility per- the WK4 internal Digital Effects processor.
mits MIDI file exchange with other instruments • Advanced MIDI operation
and computers. WK4 has two independent MIDI circuits (A and
• Hard disk (optional) B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with MIDI-
It is possible to install a 2.5” IDE or E-IDE in- merge and MIDI-thru functions.
ternal hard disk (max. 500 megabytes). The • Direct connection with a computer
installation requires the Generalmusic HD in- The Computer jack permits the connection of
stallation kit. computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to
The hard disk operating functions include an WK4 via a single serial cable.
integral test and a data restoring procedure,
to recover damaged data. Compared to a flop-
py disk, the hard disk has faster access speeds
and provides for improved data protection.
The installation kit is available from authorized
Generalmusic stores and should be installed
by a qualified service technician. A compati-
ble IDE hard drive can be purchased from most
computer outlets.
• Multitasking operating mode
The Multitasking operating system allows you
to execute several operations simultaneous-
ly, such as modifying sounds while a song is
playing, loading a song during song play, for-
matting a disk while playing.
• Up-dateable operating system (OS)
Since the operating system resides in a flash-
ROM, it is possible to load updates from flop-
py disk. Operating system updates can add
new functions to the instrument.
• Score view
The display can show the score, the lyrics and
chord symbols of a song.
It is also possible to connect WK4 to a video
system (monitor, domestic TV, closed circuit
video) by means of the optional Generalmusic
Audio/Video board to display score and lyrics
on a television. Lyrics can be projected onto
a television or other video devices during a
performance to allow others to sing with the
player.
• Audio inputs
With the optional A/V board, it is possible to
connect a microphone, another instrument, a
mixer or hi-fi outputs to the WK4 audio MIC/

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Introduction iii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES
Observe these important preliminary notes before using your instrument

AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near mag-
nets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.

MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather
slowly the first time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of
the internal data and tests on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard
disk access operations. You may also find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a
precuationary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any factory-loaded files. The protection is re-
moved in the Disk Utlity page.

UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the
instrument. The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained
in the instrument’s Flash ROM.
To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk:
(1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the
message «Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort» appears, press
ENTER to start the OS update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the mes-
sage «Loading successful (Enter to continue)» is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this proc-
ess, proceed with the power-up reset that follows below to insure proper operation.

RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instrument’s memory has been damaged,
either by being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instru-
ment may not operate properly. The remedy is a power-up reset:
(1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2)
when the message «!!WARNIING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to
CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort>» appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.

1 2 !!WARNIING!! Dial on Power-Up

Requests MEMORY CLEAR !!
POWER
TEMPO / DATA < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort
ON ENTER

OFF

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

iv Introduction
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 BEFORE STARTING - CONSERVING DATA IN RAM

The rechargeable battery

The WK4 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery is
recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!).
When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is con-
served for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instru-
ment is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for
at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.
To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least
once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK4 will keep the battery charged.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM ~ -Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the
Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at
power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after
powering up the instrument again
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: It is possible to load RAM ~-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

What remains in memory and what is cancelled

Stored after turning off Not stored after turning off

Performances
Modified Style-Performances
User Styles (User buttons)
Songs
Setup (general settings)
RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
RAM -Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM) RAM -Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)
Samples in Backed S-RAM Samples in Volatile S-RAM

The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE
settings.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Introduction v
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RAM reset
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can reset the backed RAM.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter the “Edit General” menu.

2. Press F4 to select the “Restore all” command. The following dialogue window is displayed.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is
confirmed, the instrument can be played after few seconds.

Battery discharged message

If the instrument has been left turned off for a long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge.
When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data.
If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following message:

The message cancels automatically after 2/3 seconds. After the message cancels, be sure to save all
of your edited work to disk until after the battery has sufficiently charged. Leave the instrument on for a
few hours to recharge the battery (one day charge for each hour of recharging-maximum of 15 days
charge).
If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off for a long period of time, be sure to save all user-
programmed data to disk to safeguard your data against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

vi Introduction
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 1 Quick Guide
POWER UP
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel
is in the “OFF” position before connecting the
power cord.
1
2. Insert the instrument’s power cord into a suit-
able grounded wall outlet.

2
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If you want to use external amplification,

connect the stereo audio outputs (Left, Right) to
your amp. system (mixer, powered speakers, etc.)
using audio cables with standard 1/4” jacks. Use
RCA jacks to connect to domestic stereo units. For
mono reproduction, connect to either the Left or
POWER
Right jack.
3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ON

OFF

3. Press the power switch to turn on WK4.

After a few seconds the instrument sets to
the default situation.
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with
CONTRAST
the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the
left of the display. Different viewing angles
may require an adjustment of the display con-
trast. The display reaches its maximum
brightness a few minutes after turning on.
At this point, WK4 is ready to play.

Automatic loading at power up

It is possible to load a Block of data automati-
cally from disk at power up. Change the name
of the Block to load in AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capi-
tal letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk
containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted
in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK

loading procedure replaces all the data conserved
in System RAM.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE INITIAL STATUS (DEFAULT) status bar
Tempo Locator
After turning on, WK4 sets to Style/Performance Style chord
mode with the Grand Piano Performance ready Style name Performance namezone
to play across the full keyboard. This Perform-
ance corresponds to the first slot in bank 1 of the
Performance Groups section. WK4 defaults to
this mode every time you turn on the instrument.
The status bar shows the name of the current
Style and Performance, the tempo, the locator
and the current Accompaniment Chord selection.
The menu shows the track status options (Full
Keyboard [selected], Upper & Lower, Multi) and
the soft button to select the Split Point.
Let’s go through some of the basic operations Sound
that you can carry out after powering up. name

ADJUSTING THE GENERAL VOLUME

Adjust the general volume with the M. VOLUME
slider.
If you are using headphones, a comfortable level
is around half way of the slider’s travel distance.
M.VOL MIC/LINE
If you are using external amplification, better re-
sults are obtained by adjusting the volume with MAX

mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering

the volume of the instrument.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If the Audio/Video interface is not MIN

installed, the Master Volume slider does not affect

the signal fed into the MIC/LINE IN inputs.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - Playing at high volumes levels

could be harmful to your hearing and could
damage the amplifier and speakers .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•2 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PLAY WITH AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
STYLES
WK4 has 96 auto accompaniment Styles with four
Variations four Intros, four Fills and four Endings
for each Style. You can also load up to 32 disk
based user-programmable Styles of your choice
into the 4 PROG banks available. 1 SINGLE
TCH. PLAY

1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY.

The ARRANGE ON/OFF and ARRANGE
MEMORY buttons will activate if not already
on. ARRANGE ARRANGE LOWER ARRANGE
ON / OFF MEMORY MEMORY MODE

When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the

sounds memorized in the Style Performance
are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a
Style changes the sounds of the accompani-
ment tracks as well as those assigned to the
keyboard sections. Also recalled are settings 2 STYLE GROUP

relating to the keyboard mode and chord rec- 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

ognition mode for the current Style. JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat,

16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
3. Select a Style.
Use the soft buttons near the Style name in 3
the DISPLAY (SWING in this example).
A

4. Press the START/STOP button to start the accom- B

paniment. C

You’ll hear the drum track playing. F

4 INTRO KEY START ENDING

START / STOP

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Play a chord (at least three notes) below the
Chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
5
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment
pattern is triggered.
In default conditions, the keyboard’s chord
recognition mode is set to “Fingered 1”. You
can change the chord recognition mode to
“One finer”, “Fingered 2” or “Free 1 & 2”, by
entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See 6/7
the ARRANGE MODE function in the Styles
chapter 5.

6. Play a different chord.

Note how the accompaniment pattern is
transposed.

7. Start to play a melody with the right hand. 8

INTRO KEY START ENDING

The combination of sounds that play and the

current keyboard mode will depend on the
Style selected.

8. Stop the Style with Start/Stop or Ending. OR

START / STOP

Styles are discussed in detail in the relative

chapter afterwards.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•4 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Demo
Listen to the Demo Songs
1 DEMO PRELOAD DISK
You can listen to the automatic playback of your H. D.
WK4 to get an idea of what the instrument is ca- _ 0 +
pable of doing.

1. Press DEMO to open the Demo window.

The left part contains four Songs and the right
part contains three Style medleys and the
«ALL DEMO» command. 2
2. Select a demo song with the corresponding Func- A

tion button.
B

The selected demo playback starts and E

shows up in negative highlight. When the F

end is reached, the demo stops. H

3. Select the «ALL DEMO» command to chain all

seven demos. Song demos Style demos

Playback starts automatically from the first

song shown in the top left hand corner. 3
Demos not yet played are shown in negative
highlight while those played return positive. F1

While a demo plays, all the buttons on the F2

F3

control panel (except DEMO, the Function F4

buttons and ESCAPE) and the keyboard are F5

F6

disabled. F7

F8

4. To stop a demo song without closing the DEMO

display, press the corresponding Function but-
ton.
To stop the Demo Song and close the DEMO dis-
play, press ESCAPE. 4 A
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

E
D
OR
F ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Multimedia

WK4 can display Lyrics when playing WK4 & PS

Series Disks. There are a wide variety of disks 1/2 SONG

that display lyrics when played. No other key-

board brings vision to your music like the
Generalmusic WK4 Series does!

1. Press the SONG BUTTON.

A

You will see up to sixteen Song choices in D

the display (autoload the four song demo disk E

provided with the instrument if necessary). G

2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding

Soft button.
3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback. 3/4 PLAY

4. Press the SCORE button and the score will ap-

pear.
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE SCORE

CONTROLS.

5 F6
F5

F7

F8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•6 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6. Use the DIRECTIONAL ARROWS to highlight the
desired viewing choices (All, Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
Chord).
Press the ENTER button to view the results.

7. Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main ENTER TEMPO / DATA

Song Playback page.

ESCAPE

7 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE SCORE

OR

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING INSTRUMENT SOUNDS
WK4 has over 600 instrument Sounds, including
orchestral, percussion and contemporary musi-
cal instruments. You can customize any sound
to your tastes with the built in sound edit capa-
bilities.

1. Press the STYLE/REALTIME button. 1 STYLE

REAL TIME

The display returns to the Style/RealTime

mode, a real time play situation with instru-
ment sounds ready to play.
Pressing Style/RealTime returns you to the
last selected Performance of the Perform-
ance Groups.
You may use the “Style/RealTime” button as
a ‘return to start’ button whenever you wish
to have one or more sounds active across all
76 keys.
2 SOUND GROUP

2. Press a SOUND GROUPS button and select a PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB BRASS

Sound. REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC. SFX

Select a Sound by pressing the Soft button

near the Sound name in the display (Piano3
in this example). A

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound. C

The Sound plays across the full keyboard. E

< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•8 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.
This time, after pressing a SOUND GROUPS
4
button, select the Bank containing the desired
sound using the (Page/Bank) buttons.
Each Sound Group button consists of up to A

16 Sound Banks, each containing up to 8 B

Sounds. D

5. Press the F3/F4 Soft button to select the UPP./ F

LOW keyboard mode press a key below note B3.

G

No sound will play. The keyboard is divided

at note B3 and the Sound assigned to the
Lower 1 section is mute. The Sound assigned
to Upper 1 plays from C4 to G7.
5
6. Select the Sound assigned to Lower 1 (Slow
Strings in this example) by pressing the corre- F1

sponding Soft button TWICE and press a key be- F2

F3

low B3. F4

F5

Pressing F3/F4 once selects the Sound, F6

F7

pressing the same button again activates the F8

sound for play. You’ll hear a different Sound

with respect to that assigned to Upper 1.

SPLIT Keyboard
< --- no sound ----- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >

6
A

SPLIT Keyboard
< ---- Lower 1 ------ > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7. Repeat step 6, this time selecting Upper 2 and
play a key above note B3. 7
A

You’ll hear two sounds for each single note B

played. C

Activating Upper 2 introduces a second E

Sound (String) layered with the first. G

8. Press the LOWER 2 soft button twice to select the

corresponding Sound and play a key below note
B3.
You’ll hear a second sound layered with the SPLIT Keyboard
Lower 1 sound. < ---- Lower 1 ------ > < ------- Upp 1 + Upp 2 --------- >

If you play with both hands, you’ll hear two

sounds on the right hand and two on the left.
8
9. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard. A

The Sound currently shown highlighted (in C

this example Nylon Guitar assigned to Lower E

2) is isolated from the other sounds which F

are all muted. G

The Sound plays across the full keyboard.

• Press the SOLO button again to return to normal

operation.
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Low 1+Low 2 --- > < ------- Upp 1 + Upp 2 --------- >

9
SOLO

< ----------------- Lower 2 (full keyboard) ----------------- >

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•10 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING THE PERFORMANCES
WK4 has 64 user programmable Performance
locations, organized into eight different banks.
These Performances feature single and layered
sounds, custom effect settings, split keyboard
combinations and more. You can create your own
Performances or load new ones from disk.

1. Press the Bank 1 button in the PERFORMANCE

GROUPS section.
The display shows 8 Performances to choose 1
from, each with a different name. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2. Select the Performance called “StGuitar”.

Use the Soft button nearest to the name of
the Performance to select it (StGuitar in this
example).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2

Note: If you do not select a Performance within
the first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the F1

previous situation with no changes. F2

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F3

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.

F4

F5

F6

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional se- F7

lections. F8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS
The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad
2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of
adding extra sounds to your playing. You can
program each pad to produce an instrumental
sound, a percussive sound or sample. The pro-
grammable Pads can also be assigned to the
rotor slow/fast switching function.

• Strike the Pads freely.

PAD 1 PAD 2 PAD 3 PAD 4

While you play, add additional sounds from

the pads in real time.
The configuration of the Programmable Pads
can be stored in the Programmable Perform-
ances.

PLAY WITH EFFECTS OR BYPASS THEM

You can temporarily modify the way in which a
Performance is processed by the on-board ef-
fect processor by changing the On/Off setting of
the Effects Bypass button.
When the LED is off, the current Performance is
processed by the effects; when on, the effects
are bypassed.

Bypass 1 EFFECTS
BYPASS

EFFECTS
BYPASS
1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS BYPASS
button.
The LED of the button turns on, indicating
that the current Performance is no longer
processed by the Effects.
2 EFFECTS
BYPASS
To activate the effects
EFFECTS
BYPASS
2. Press the active EFFECTS BYPASS button.
The LED of the button goes off to indicate
that the current Performance is processed by
the Effects.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•12 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
• Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
The headphones jack panel is located on the
left side of the instrument, under the key-
board. Inserting the headphones plug into
the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal
speakers to allow you to play in total silence
without disturbing others in the same room.
Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not
exclude the internal speakers.
Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the
headphone volume.

PLAY WITH THE PEDALS

The rear connections panel includes four jacks
for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper.
The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for
a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remain- PEDAL

ing three pedal jacks are programmable and pre-

set to provide Performance functions.
DAMPER 2 1 VOLUME
The default configuration of the pedals is as fol-
lows:
• Ped1 = Soft DAMPER
VOLUME
• Ped2 = Sostenuto SOSTENUTO
• Ped3 = Damper (sustain)
• Volume = Volume
SOFT

The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function

assignable and can be independently enabled or
disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a
Performance. Footswitch
Volume Pedal
All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be pro- (on/off)
grammed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Con- (continuous)
tinuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume
type).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL
The on-board controlling devices include a
Trackball on the left key block, preset for Per-
formance functions.
The default configuration of the Trackball is as
follows:
Modulation
• Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend
• Up/Down movement = Modulation

The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the

central position.
Pitch Bend
The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to re-
act with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•14 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 General reverb control and equalization

REVERB CONTROL EQUALIZATION

It is possible to adjust the reverb for the surround- It is possible to equalize the tone of the instru-
ings in which you play. Although Performances ment for the surroundings in which you play.
and Styles recall suitable reverb settings for the
sounds used, the a general reverb balance al- 1. Press MIXER in the EDIT/NUMBERS section.
lows you to adjust the intensity of all the reverbs
with a single command.
2. Press F5 (“Equalizer”).

1. Press EFFECTS in the EDIT/NUMBERS section.

2. Press F3 (“Gen.Rev.Bal.”).

3. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons.

4. Modify the frequency of the High and Low bands
and equalize the High and Low Gain controls.
3. Adjust the reverb intensity with the DIAL.
5. Press ESCAPE to return to the main page.
4. Press ESCAPE to return to the main page. The settings remain in System RAM after
The setting does not remain in RAM after turning off the instrument.
turning off the instrument.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT (SEMI-
TONES)
If you would like to play a song in a different key,
or a song is too high or too low for a singer or
another instrument, you can transpose WK4 to
play the song in an easier key.
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time 1 TRANSPOSE

semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the

overall pitch (range ± 24 semitones = 2 octaves).

1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.

An insertion screen shows the Transpose
value and the LED turns on to show that the D4 D#4
instrument is in a positive transposed status. C#4 D4
Press the Transpose # button as many times C4 C#4
as necessary until you reach the desired
pitch.

2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch. 2 TRANSPOSE

The current Transpose value is reduced by

one half-step.
Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b but-
ton until the LED on the button turns on. (An
eventual positive transpose status will be
cancelled). C#4 D4
To clear the keyboard transpose setting C4 C#4
B3 C4
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
The LED on the active button goes off and
the instrument’s normal pitch is restored. The 3 TRANSPOSE

display shows the “0” setting for a few sec-

onds then returns to normal.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•16 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES
1
Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed A

in octave steps, within the range ±5 octaves. B

1. E
D

Select the track you wish to transpose. F

2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting. H

An insertion screen shows the current Oc-

tave setting.
2/3 OCTAVE

Press the OCTAVE + button as many times

as necessary until you reach the desired set-
ting. The value is expressed in semitones:
12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The in-
sertion screen cancels automatically after 2/
3 seconds.
C5 C6
C4 C5
3. Press OCTAVE – button to lower the octave C3 C4
setting.
OCTAVE
The current Octave setting is shown.
Continue pressing the OCTAVE – button as
many times as necessary until you reach the
desired setting. An eventual positive Octave
status will be cancelled.

To clear the Track Octave setting

C4 C5
C3 C4
4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously. C2 C3
The insertion screen shows the value of “0”
and the track’s normal pitch is restored.
4 OCTAVE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Preload
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs
or MidiFiles present on a disk.
Preload is also operational if your WK4 is fitted
with a Hard Disk which contains Songs or MIDI
Files.
This feature works just like pressing play on a
CD player! - No need to load all the data into
memory before hand.

1. Insert an WK4 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk

into the drive. 1
Check the disk label for the type of data con-
tained in the disk.

2. Press PRELOAD.
If you are preloading from a floppy disk, press-
ing Preload shows you the Song directory of
the disk.
If you want to select the hard disk, press F2
to select HARD DISK. Selecting the HARD
DISK option prompts you to select a Block 2 DEMO PRELOAD DISK

file (identified by the “.BLK” extension). _

H. D.
0 +
If necessary, select the type of file to load
(Song or MIDI File).
Press soft button F5 to select SONG or F6 to
select SMF. SMF files are identified by the
“.MID” extension.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•18 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Press option “Select All” to select all the Songs
or MIDI Files of the selected directory.
3
The Preload list is compiled automatically, list-
ing a maximum of 16 Songs or MIDI Files. F1

F2

4. Press PLAY to start the playback. F4

F3

After a short period, a Song starts to play

F5

F6

back. F7

F8

When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a sec-

ond sequence begins (there will be a short
pause while the second song is accessed).
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played.
When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the 4
PLAY
end, playback stops automatically.

5. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP

or START/STOP.
Playback stops instantly and the Preload list
is cancelled.

5
STOP

INTRO KEY START ENDING

OR
START / STOP

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Record a Song
WK4 allows you to record a simple multi-track
Song using the QUICK REC recording method
1/2
SONG

when using existing Styles. In practice, the Quick

Rec method can record from 1 to 8 real time tracks
accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style
to create a multitrack Song of up to 16 tracks. A

Quick Rec Recording

C

1. Press the SONG button. F

The «Song Banks» display shows empty H

songs as follows (##########). If not, you

can use the Restore All Songs function (in
Edit General) to clear all songs in memory. 3
F1

2. Select an empty location with the corresponding F2

F3

Soft button or Function button. F4

F5

3. Select QuickRec with Function button F2.

The RECORD button turns on (LED on).
A new Song and Song Performance is cre-
ated based on the Performance selected at
the time of entering Quick Rec mode.

4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of

the backings for the Song.
To maintain the same Performance, select the
Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY Off then 4 STYLE GROUP

turn on the accompaniment controls (AR- 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

RANGE ON/OFF and LOWER MEMORY) if JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

necessary.
If you want the Style to govern the Perform-
ance sounds, press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY
A

before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off B

and Lower Memory activate automatically if C

off). E
D

Press KEY START if you want to trigger the F

start of the recording by playing on the key- H

board

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•20 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Press either PLAY or START/STOP to start the re-
cording and start to play.
5 PLAY
INTRO KEY START ENDING

The PLAY button starts the recording for the

real time tracks only. OR
The START/STOP button starts the record- START / STOP

ing and also engages the Style accompani-

ments tracks.
If you selected KEY START, this will allow
you to start the recording (Style and real time
tracks) by playing on the keyboard.
You can also start the recording with an Intro
by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING
button before record start. Use START/STOP 6 STOP
INTRO KEY START ENDING

or KEY START to trigger the Intro.

As the recording proceeds, you can select OR
other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Per- START / STOP

formances, activate or deactivate other real

time tracks, etc..

6. When you have finished, stop the recording ei-

ther with STOP or START/STOP.
7 PLAY
INTRO KEY START ENDING

START/STOP stops the accompaniment

tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to OR START / STOP

continue recording the real time tracks.

You must press STOP to stop the sequencer
recording and take the song pointer (locator)
to the starting position [1 1 1]. The RECORD
button LED will now turn off.

7. Press PLAY or START/STOP to listen to the song

playback.
In playback, you can stop the song with STOP
or START/STOP and start the song again
from the stop point with PLAY.
If you press STOP or START/STOP twice
during playback, the song returns to the start-
ing point (locator 1 1 1).
In EDIT SEQUENCER, you can enter a name
for the Song.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Quick Guide 1•21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1•22 Quick Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 2 Front & Rear Panel
Speakers

Power On/Off Front panel Display

UPPER.1
UPPER.2
LOWER.2 LOWER.1
ACC. 4/6 TRACK SCROLL
BASS ACC. 1/3
DRUMS
M.VOL MIC/LINE

CONTRAST
UNDO HELP
D. HOLD KEY PAD
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS
MAX MIDI MIXER
A F1
1
2 3
B F2

F3 CNT / PADS
C T. SPLIT SOUND
G H
MIN F D F4
D E
C SEQUENCER 4
B RECORD 5
A SOLO ST. / SONG 6
EFFECTS F5
ARRANGE BYPASS E SCORE
LOWER MODE
ARRANGE MEMORY
ARRANGE MEMORY F F6 ST. / SONG
ON / OFF OPTION GENERAL

F7 7
STORE STYLE 8
G REAL TIME 9
SINGLE PERF. SONG
TCH. PLAY F8 STOP
HARMONY H PLAY
BASS TO ON / OFF
MIXER LOWEST
TEMPO LOCK DEMO
LOCK PRELOAD
DISK

_ H. D.
PERFORMANCE GROUPS 0
+
STYLE GROUPS SOUND GROUPS

PROG 1 PROG 2 ST. LOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SONG P. PIANO

DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR
ROCK FUNK BASS STRINGS
8. BEAT 16. BEAT ENSEMB BRASS

INTRO KEY START ENDING ENTER TEMPO / DATA

PROG 3 PROG 4 REED PIPE
LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 SYN. LD SYN. PAD
TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 SYN. FIX ETHNIC
JAZZ US. TRAD PERC. SFX

FADE I / O VAR. 1 VAR. 2 VAR. 3 VAR. 4 FILL FILL FILL PAD 1 PAD 2 PAD 3 PAD 4 _ OCTAVE + b TRANSPOSE #

TAP TEMPO
START / STOP ESCAPE

POWE

OFF

Trackball

64 note keyboard
Stereo C2-C7
Headphones Disk drive

Alphanumeric configuration

MIDI VIDEO

PEDA MIC / LINE IN OUTPUT

DAMPER 2 1 VOLUME PEDALB. COMPUTE THRU B OUT B IN B THRU A OUT A IN A 2 1 RIGHT LEFT 2 1 RIGHT LEFT RGB S-VHS

Rear panel (connections)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Front & Rear panel 2•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Front Panel (left section)

UPPER.1
LOWER.1 UPPER.2
ACC. 4/6 LOWER.2
BASS ACC. 1/3
DRUMS
M.VOL MIC/LINE

1
MAX

G H
MIN F
D E
B C
A SOLO
EFFECTS

ARRANGE
ON / OFF
ARRANGE
MEMORY
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MODE
BYPASS
3
2 STORE
SINGLE PERF.
HARMONY TCH. PLAY
BASS TO ON / OFF
MIXER LOWEST
TEMPO LOCK
LOCK

STYLE GROUPS
PROG 1 PROG 2

8. BEAT 16. BEAT

ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2
4
PROG 3 PROG 4
LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2
TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2
JAZZ US. TRAD

FADE I / O VAR. 1 VAR. 2 VAR. 3 VAR. 4 FILL FILL FILL

TAP TEMPO

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Front Panel
SECTION 1 (SLIDERS) modes, the Chord notes are coupled to the melody played
MASTER VOLUME: Adjusts the general volume (headphones with the right hand. When OFF, the Harmony function is
and outputs). Not transmitted or received via MIDI. disabled.
MIC/LINE: Controls the volume of the signal fed into the SECTION 3
MIC/LINE IN1 or IN2 Inputs.
SINGLE TOUCH PLAY: When ON: Style-Performance sounds
DRUM, BASS, ACC.1/3, ACC.4/6: In Full and Upper/Lower are assigned to all the tracks. When OFF: selecting Styles
keyboard modes, the top led indicator turns on to show recalls sounds for the accompaniment sections only while
that the sliders adjust the track volumes of the relative those of the Real Time keyboard sections remain un-
sections shown above each slider. changed.
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H: In Multi mode, in Song Mode and EFFECTS BYPASS: When ON, this button deactivates the
when the accompaniment tracks are displayed, the bot- internal digital effects processor. When OFF, the Per-
tom LED indicator turns on to show that the sliders adjust formances are routed to the effects processors accord-
the volumes of the tracks corresponding to the same let- ing to the memorized situation.
ters.
SOLO: Isolates the selected track from the rest to allow
SECTION 2 you to listen to the assigned sound alone.
The buttons in this group affect the Styles. STORE PERF.: Saves the modifications applied to a Per-
ARRANGE ON/OFF: Enables (On) or disables (Off) the Style formance in RAM and allows the Performance name to
accompaniments. be changed. The modification can be saved to the cur-
ARRANGE MEMORY: When ON, releasing the keys from the rent Performance or any other Performance destination.
keyboard causes the Style auto accompaniments to con- The Performance can belong to the PERFORMANCE
tinue playing; when OFF, all accompaniments except the GROUPS section (Performance) or the STYLE GROUPS
Drum track stop instantly after key release. section (Style-Performance).
LOWER MEMORY: When ON, the Sounds assigned to the SECTION 4
Lower tracks continue playing after releasing the keys; STYLE GROUPS: Each button corresponds to a bank of 8
when OFF, the Lower Sounds stop instantly after key re- Styles (Rom or User) with respective Style-Performanc-
lease. es. Press a button to display the contents of the Style
ARRANGE MODE: Gains access to the Arrange Mode pro- bank and select a Style with the soft button near the Style
gramming page where you can choose between the Fixed name in the display.
Chord or Auto Chord Modes and program the Chord rec-
ognition modes for the Style accompaniments. SECTION 5
TEMPO LOCK: When ON, this button locks the current tem- FADE IN/OUT: Starts and stops a Style with a gradual in-
po setting for all Styles and Performance selections. crease or decrease of volume. Starting requires press-
When OFF, each Style or Performance recalls memo- ing the Start button.
rised Tempo data. Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4: These buttons allow you to
MIXER LOCK: When ON, this button locks the current Track switch from one Style Variation to another.
Volume settings for all Style and Performance selections. FILL< (Fill-to-previous-variation): Recalls a Fill pattern then
When OFF, each Style or Performance recalls memo- moves to the previous Variation.
rized mixer settings. FILL (Fill-to-current-variation): Recalls a Fill pattern then
BASS TO LOWEST: When ON, the bass track of the Style continues with the same variation.
auto accompaniment follows the lowest left note of the FILL>/TAP TEMPO (Fill-to-next-variation): FILL> - pressed
chord played, allowing real time changes of the bass ac- during Style play recalls a Fill pattern then moves to the
companiment according to the lowest note played. When next Variation. TAP TEMPO - sets the Style playing speed
OFF, the bass track follows the programmed pattern of by tapping on the button and starts the Style auto accom-
the Style, regardless of the chord inversion played. paniments automatically.
Harmony On/Off: When ON, this button activates the
melody harmony function. In the Upper & Lower Multi

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Front & Rear panel 2•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Front Panel (central section)

7 6 8
TRACK SCROLL

A F1

B F2

F3
C

D F4

F5
E

F F6

F7
G

H F8

PERFORMANCE GROUPS

ST. LOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SONG P.

9
INTRO KEY START ENDING ENTER TEMPO / DATA

START / STOP ESCAPE

10 11

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECTION 6 SECTION 11
DISPLAY: The principal user-interface which shows the DIAL (TEMPO/DATA): active for Tempo changes in Style or
status of the instrument at all times. The user can inter- Song mode, or operates as a data entry control in Edit
act with the displayed information through the navigation and Record situations.
and data/entry commands and soft buttons. ENTER: confirms specified data in edit situations and closes
the dialogue window.
SECTION 7
ESCAPE: cancels the entered data and closes the dia-
TRACK SCROLL: These two buttons bring the tracks cur- logue window. Allows you to pass from the current Edit
rently out of view into the display area. page to index and/or to the main page of the current op-
SOFT BUTTONS A…H: Software buttons which allows you erating mode.
to select the data displayed on the left part of the display DIRECTIONAL ARROWS: Navigation controls which move the
corresponding to the relative button. These buttons se- cursor in the display in the direction of the arrow. The
lect (a) the tracks or (b) data shown in dialogue windows cursor is shown in negative highlight (reversed in record
(Sounds, Performance, Style, Song). modes).
SECTION 8 SECTION 12 (PAGE 7)
PAGE/BANK BUTTONS ( ): In the simple edit environ- CONTRAST: Adjusts the display contrast. Different display
ments, these buttons allow you to pass from one menu to viewing angles and lighting conditions may require a slight
another. In complex edit environments they allow you to adjustment of the contrast.
pass from one item to another without accessing the di-
UNDO: In “Edit Song” or “Edit Style”, Undo cancels the
rectory. In the “Sound Group” selection window, they
last edit operation.
select a Bank.
HELP: An on-line Help which recalls brief explanations
SOFT BUTTONS F1…F8: Select the corresponding data on
relating to the current mode.
the right part of the display. These Software buttons al-
low you to select (a) options and commands or (b) the D. HOLD: When ON: Display Hold locks the selection win-
data in the dialogue windows (Sound, Performance, Style, dows (Sound, Performance, Style, and Song) for multi-
Song). ple selection possibilities. ESCAPE cancels Display Hold.
When OFF: the temporary selection window closes after
SECTION 9 a selection or after a few seconds if no selection has been
STYLE LOCK: When ON, selecting Performances recalls made.
keyboard sounds only without changing Style. When off, KEY PAD: When ON, this button activates the EDIT/NUM-
Performances can change Style as well as the keyboard BERS section as a numerical keypad. When OFF, the
sounds. EDIT/NUMBERS buttons recall the corresponding Edit
SONG.P.: Activates a selection window containing Song- environments.
Performances associated to the Songs. SECTION 13 (PAGE 7)
PERFORMANCE GROUPS: These buttons gain access to the
EDIT/NUMBERS Each button gains access to the edit of the
user-programmable Performances, arranged in 8 groups
function specified on the buttons. If the KEY PAD LED is
of 8 Performances each. Each Performance can memo-
ON, the edit buttons are enabled as a numerical keypad.
rize a configuration of keyboard sounds.
EFFECTS: edit of the Effects parameters.
SECTION 10 MIDI: edit of the MIDI parameters.
START/STOP: Starts and stops the playback of a Style, or MIXER: edit of the Mixer parameters.
Song. In sequencer recording processes, the Start/Stop CNT/PADS: access to the Controllers and Pads edit pa-
button and the Play and Stop buttons of the sequencer rameters.
operate in the same manner. T. SPLIT: access to the Track and Split edit parameters.
INTRO: Places the introduction of a Style on “standby” Sound; access to the Sound and Sound Patch/Drumkit
before Style start. edit parameters.
ENDING: Stops a Style with an Ending. ST/SONG: Access to the edit of Song and Style data.
KEY START: Synchronizes the start of a Style with a note OPTION: access to disk-loaded additional functions (e.g.
(or chord) pressed on the lower keyboard area. advanced Sound Edit).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Front & Rear panel 2•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Front Panel (right section)

12
CONTRAST
UNDO HELP
D. HOLD KEY PAD
EDIT / NUMB
ER
13
EFFECTS
MIDI MIXER
1
1
2 3

3 CNT / PADS
T. SPLIT SOUND

SEQUENCER 4

5 14 RECORD
ST. / SONG
SCORE
5
6

ST. / SONG
OPTION GENERAL

7
STYLE 7 8
REAL TIME 9
SONG
STOP
PLAY

DEMO PRELOAD
DISK

_ H. D.
0
+
SOUND GROU
PS
PIANO

15
CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB BRASS

REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC. SFX

PAD 1 PAD 2 PAD 3 PAD 4 _ OCTAVE + b TRANSPOSE #

16

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 GENERAL: edit of the General parameters which affect the THE DISK DRIVE (ILLUSTRATED ON PAGE 1)
instrument as a whole. The Disk Drive, located on the right hand side, under the
DEMO: access to the Demo Songs and Styles. keyboard, handles 3.5” double density (2DD) or high den-
PRELOAD: allows a list of Songs or MIDI Files to be played sity (2HD) floppy disks.
back without loading all data to memory beforehand.
DISK: access to file handling operations and utility func- TRACKBALL (ILLUSTRATED ON PAGE 1)
tions. Programmable Trackball, preset for Pitch Bend and Mod-
ulation, is spring loaded to return to the central position.
SECTION 14 Each track of every Performance can be programmed
RECORD ST/SONG: Activates the sequencer for Style or for the action of the Trackball for one, both or neither of
Song recording. the preset functions.
STYLE/REALTIME: Sets the instrument to Style/Perform-
ance mode.
PHONES SOCKETS (ILLUSTRATED ON PAGE 1)
SEQUENCER: This section represents the on-board 32 track Jacks for 2 sets of stereo headphones. Inserting the
sequencer. phones cable into the left jack disconnects the internal
speakers. The headphone volume is controlled by the
<<, >>: Fast forward (>>) or “rewind” (<<) buttons for
M. Vol slider.
Songs.
SCORE: Displays the lyrics track (words, music and chords)
of a Song or MIDI File.
SONG: Activates Song mode - opens a Song selection
window.
STOP: Stops the recording and playback process.
PLAY: Starts the recording and playback process.
SECTION 15
SOUND GROUPS: Each button comprises a group of 8
Sounds. Each Sound Group can consist of several banks
which are selected in the selection windows with the
buttons, or via MIDI with BankSelect messages MSB
(CC00). Bank 1 Sounds conform to the General Midi
standards, while all other banks contain sound variations
of Bank 1 Sounds.
SECTION 16
PAD 1, PAD 2, PAD 3, PAD 4: 4 buttons which provide
sounds or samples that can be played in real time in any
mode. The configuration of the Pads is programmable
and can be stored to the Performances.
OCTAVE +/–: Track octave transposer which affects the
currently selected track over the maximum range of ± 5
octaves. Pressing both buttons at the same time resets
to 0.
TRANSPOSE #/b: Raises (#) or lowers (b) the pitch of the
instrument as a whole in semitone steps, over a range of
±24 semitones. Pressing both buttons at the same time
resets to 0.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Front & Rear panel 2•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Rear Panel (Connections)

MIDI VIDEO

PEDA MIC / LINE IN OUTPUT

DAMPER 2 1 VOLUME PEDALB. COMPUTE THRU B OUT B IN B THRU A OUT A IN A 2 1 RIGHT LEFT 2 1 RIGHT LEFT RGB S-VHS

MIDI

PEDAL

DAMPER 2 1 VOLUME PEDALB. COMPUTER THRU B OUT B IN B THRU A OUT A IN A

1 2 3 4

VIDEO

MIC / LINE IN OUTPUT

2 1 RIGHT LEFT 2 1 RIGHT LEFT RGB S-VHS

5 6 7 8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Rear Panel (Connections)
1. PEDALS 5. MIC/LINE IN
DAMPER, 1, 2, VOLUME: Three programmable jacks for con- 1, 2, GAIN 2/1: Jacks 1 and 2 are audio inputs for Micro-
tinuous control pedals or switch action pedals (Damper, phone or Line signals (a musical instrument, cassette re-
1, 2) and a Volume jack for a standard Volume pedal. corder, CD player or microphone). For mono connec-
The footswitch polarity of the switch action pedals can tions use the IN 1 jack. The volume of the MIC/LINE
also be reversed. signals fed into the IN 1 and 2 jacks can be regulated
with the front panel MIC/LINE control. The gain 2/1 twin
2. PEDALB. knob controls the volume of the signal fed into the Inputs.
PEDALBOARD: Connector for a pedalboard (optional). En- Gain 1 (the smallest central knob) regulates IN 1, gain 2
abling the pedalboard disables the computer port auto- (the larger outer knob) regulates IN 2. All to the left (min-
matically. Pedalboard settings are enabled in Edit Gen- imum) corresponds to the LINE impedance (stereo de-
eral. vices and musical instruments). All to the right (maxi-
3. COMPUTER mum) corresponds to the MIC impedance (microphones).
Computer port: Serial port which permits WK4 to be con- The optional A/V board is required for most external
nected directly to a computer (Apple Macintosh or IBM processing applications.
PC and compatibles.) Data interchange between WK4 6. OUTPUT
and PC or Mac requires appropriate setting in Edit Gen- LEFT, RIGHT, 1, 2: Stereo Left-Right Outputs and auxiliary
eral. 1, 2 outputs to listen to the WK4 sound through an exter-
4. MIDI nal device such as a mixer or audio amplifier. For Mono
MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/B, MIDI OUT A/B: Two series of reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack. The
independent connectors (A and B) used to control other auxiliary outputs emit “dry” sounds (i.e. with no effects).
MIDI instruments or to communicate with a Computer. 7. VIDEO (AUDIO/VIDEO INTERFACE)
IN: receives data from another instrument. OUT: trans- RGB. Video output in RGB/Composite Video standard.
mits data to another instrument. THRU: retransmits data SVHS. Video output in SVHS/Composite Video stand-
received at MIDI IN. ard.
When using WK4 on its own, these jacks are not required Both outputs are operational only with the optional Au-
to be connected. dio/Video Interface.
Models not fitted with the A/V Interface leave the factory
with an adhesive applied below these outputs saying “NO
VIDEO INTERFACE INSTALLED”.
8. MAIN SOCKET
Insert the supplied power cord into this socket.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Front & Rear panel 2•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 3 Basic concepts
In this chapter, you’ll find information regarding Style/Performances are always divided into two
the principal elements that make WK4 work, in- parts: the first 8 tracks are dedicated to the key-
cluding useful information which will help you to board, the remaining 8 tracks are associated to
understand the structure of the instrument. the auto-accompaniment.

PLAY MODES: STYLE/REALTIME AND 1-8 tracks contain... 9-16 tracks contain...
SONG Keyboard Sounds Auto-accomp Sounds
Keyboard effects Accompaniment effects
WK4 offers two different play modes:
Programmable drumkit
• Style/RealTime mode: to play with the Per-
Tempo
formances and use WK4 as a conventional
keyboard, or to play with the automatic ac- Selected Style
companiments. WK4 powers up in this mode
every time it is turned on. Press the Style/
Sounds and accompaniments can be recalled by
RealTime button to activate Style/RealTime
selecting a Style (STYLE GROUP buttons) or a
mode if the instrument is not currently set to
Performance (PERFORMANCE GROUPS but-
this mode.
tons).
• Song mode: to play Songs or to work via
MIDI with an external sequencer. Press
SONG then select a song in order to activate
this mode.

STYLE/REALTIME MODE
In this mode you can play with Styles, or play
with the Performances and use WK4 as a con-
ventional keyboard. If the auto-accompaniments
are playing, the Style mode is on: if not, Style
mode is off and Performance (RealTime) mode
is on.
Style and RealTime modes have a Performance
in common, structured with the same number of
tracks (sounds) which can be played simultane-
ously (16) and the same Performance editing
tasks.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Basic concepts 3•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The STYLE LOCK and SINGLE TOUCH PLAY but-
tons
In Style/RealTime mode the selection of the
Sounds and the ACCOMPANIMENTS is deter- REAL-PERFORMANCE Style lock
mined by the status of STYLE LOCK and SIN-
PERFORMANCE
GLE TOUCH PLAY buttons. GROUPS
ST. LOCK

1
STYLE LOCK on. Selecting Performances se-
lects live keyboard sounds only. 8. BEAT

ST. LOCK

STYLE LOCK off. Selecting a Performance se-

REAL-PERFORMANCE
lects live keyboard and also accompaniment
Sounds. The relative Style, Variation and Tempo
are selected. Sounds are those stored in the
Performance.

SINGLE TOUCH PLAY on. Selecting a Style

changes keyboard and accompaniment Sounds.
Single Touch Play
The Sounds are those of the Style-Performance. STYLE-PERFORMANCE
The Tempo stored in the Style is recalled. SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
STYLE
SINGLE TOUCH PLAY off. Selecting a Style GROUPS
changes the accompaniment Sounds, Tempo 8. BEAT

data and the relative pattern. The live keyboard SINGLE

TCH. PLAY
Sounds remain unchanged.

STYLE-PERFORMANCE

SONG MODE
A Song is sequenced data consisting of one or
more tracks (instrumental parts). A Song can be
loaded from disk as an WK4 Song or as a Stand-
ard MIDI-file, it can be recorded one track at a
time (multitrack recording), or in a single step by
exploiting the existing styles (Quick Record).
Up to 32 tracks are available in Song mode. Via
MIDI, WK4 can be also used as a multitimbral
(32 parts) sound generator for Song recording
with an external sequencer.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PERFORMANCES Song-Performances

A Performance is a combination of sounds (for Song-Performances can combine up to 32

the keyboard, for the accompaniments, for a sounds. They can be applied to two types of
Song). It also contains the status of the effects, operating mode: the assignment of a sound to
the assignments of the controlling devices each track of the sequencer, or the reception via
(wheels, pedals, pads), MIDI channel configura- MIDI of 32 different parts. Song-Performances
tion, track status, Tempo data. Selecting a Per- can also be used to create complex sound com-
formance instantly changes all the sounds of the binations on the keyboard for a performance in
tracks and the relative Performance settings. real time.

Performances are divided into two types: those

residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which
govern the keyboard sounds and those associ-
ated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by
selecting the respective element. The structure
and programming procedures of both Perform-
ance types are practically identical.

Performance Groups (RealTime)

64 user-programmable Performances are stored
in the eight PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons.
Performances contain the programmed status of
the keyboard Sounds and the auto-accompani-
ment sounds. Given that the Performances store
the current Style, Variation and Tempo at the
moment of pressing the STORE PERFORM-
ANCE command, the PERFORMANCES can
also be utilized to recall a Style and a Variation.

Style-Performance
128 Performances associated to the Styles and
stored in STYLE GROUPS. Style-Performances
assign sounds to the auto-accompaniments and
keyboard that suit the Style to which they are as-
sociated. If the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY led is on,
the keyboard Sounds can be changed.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Basic concepts 3•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TRACKS THE TRACK ICONS
A Track is the smallest part of a Performance. «key-play» icon (keyboard play)
Style-Performances and Programmable Perform-
ances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for The track can be played on the keyboard
the keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer in Real Time.
for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can
«mute» icon
contain up to 32 tracks.
The track is temporarily deactivated, even
A Performance is a configuration of several
if it is connected to the keyboard. The
tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined
track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
to play at the same time. The Sound name and
its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or «seq-play» icon (sequencer-play)
the relative Group name appears on the main
display. The track contains notes – i.e. it is engaged
Sometimes, a track is not assigned to an WK4 by Song or the automatic accompaniment
Sound, but it controls an expander connected to of the Style. In either case, this type of
the MIDI OUT. In this case, “MIDI” is shown as track cannot play in real time on the key-
well as ProgramChange and BankSelect num- board, unless it is set to key-play. This
bers (MSB-LSB) on the main display when set to track cannot receive data at MIDI IN.
Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes, the «mute» icon (track with note)
ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers do
not appear. The track is temporarily deactivated.

Most of the operating modes display the tracks «record» icon

and their status icons are shown on the left part of
the display. Tracks can be selected and can be The track is in a recording status.
programmed for Sound assignments, a transposi-
«MIDI-receive/transmit» icon
tion, an effect selection or a performance control.
The status of a track can be set in four different The track can receive (IN) and transmit
ways: in key-play if it can be played on the key- (OUT).
board, in mute if the track is temporarily deacti-
«MIDI-receive» icon
vated, in record if the track is in a record pending
status, in seq-play if the track contains recorded The track receives MIDI messages (IN),
notes. Each status is shown by an icon which but does not transmit them (OUT).
appears in the track status column. Icons can
be combined together to allow you to control the «MIDI-transmit» icon
status of the various tracks under control. The
The track does not receive MIDI mes-
MIDI status of the tracks can also be identified
by a status icon. sages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SOUNDS RAM -Sound

WK4 Sounds are divided in four different types: RAM-Sounds based on RAM samples. WK4 has
• ROM-Sounds an incorporated Sample Translator which allows
you to load disk-based Samples and edit them
• RAM-Sounds
with dedicated parameters.
• RAM -Sounds (need sample RAM)
• Drumkits / SoundPatches
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds can be modified via the «Edit Perf
WARNING - RAM -Sounds are conserved in
memory when the instrument is turned off
Sound» or «Edit Sound» features. The WK4 op- provided that the Backed Sample-RAM is installed.
erating system contains a quick edit method ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

which forms part of the Edit Performance func-
Note: It is not possible to load RAM -
Sounds unless the optional Sample-RAM is
tions and an advanced Edit Sound method which installed.
takes you deep into the heart of sound synthesis ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

technology.
In the «Edit Perf Sound» environment, the re-
sulting modifications are stored in the track to Drumkit / SoundPatch
which the Sound is assigned, consequently, all These are Sound combinations comprising the
Sounds subsequently assigned to the same track three sound types described above. Drumkits
inherit the same modifications. Tracks that con- assign a different percussive Sound to each note
tain modified Sound parameters are identified by of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two
the symbol shown as a suffix in the display. Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (ve-
In the more advanced «Edit Sound» environment, locity switch).
you intervene on the Sound parameters and the The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can
resulting modifications are stored to RAM. be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a
Sounds created with the advanced «Edit Sound» Drumkit in which a percussive instrument re-

Sound name.
*
system are identified by an asterisk ( ) after the sponds with two different Sounds, each on a dif-
ferent dynamic level.
Disk based edited sounds can be loaded into A Performance can store a user-programmed
memory and conserved in the battery-backed Drumkit/SoundPatch which remains tied to the
Sample RAM. accompaniment part. When you change Perform-
ances, the DrumKit/SoundPatch follows the
ROM-Sound tracks of the accompaniment.
Sounds contained in ROM. These sounds are The Drumkit / SoundPatch changes when a Style
permanent and cannot be cancelled. They are or a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK
based on the internal samples archive (ROM- off.
Waves).
Performances which contain a user-programmed
Drumkit/SoundPatch are identified by the sym-
RAM-Sound bol.
Sounds loaded from floppy disk (WK4 or WX/
SX), or created by the more advanced «Edit
Sound» method.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Basic concepts 3•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EDIT ENVIRONMENTS
Styles, Songs, Performances, Tracks and Sounds
can be modified in the respective Edit environ-
ments. The respective operating modes allow
you to modify of every single operating aspect of
the WK4.
Three type of Edit environment are available:
• simple structure, in which the pages contain-
ing the variable parameters are accessed
directly on the first edit level.
• complex structure, where the first edit level
shows an index page (or menu) which allows
you to gain access to “editors” (or “modules”)
and a second level of edit pages.
• «Edit Disk», in which each page corresponds
to a data handling function.
You can pass from one edit environment to an-
other without escaping from the one you are cur-
rently working on. You can also select a Sound,
Style, Song or Performance without having to
escape the current edit mode first. The
multitasking operating system allows several
environments to be opened at the same time.
Therefore, Sounds, for example, can be edited
(with Edit Perf Sound) while a Style is currently
being modified without having to escape «Edit
Sequencer» before entering «Edit Perf Sound».
A slight exception is the advanced «Edit Sound»
environment (only for models which have been
installed with the optional update kit). If you are
in «Edit Sound» and attempt to select a Song,
Style, Sound or Performance, a user message
will “remind” you that you are still in the middle of
an unfinished sound editing task. In this case, to
carry out your desired selection, you must abort
«Edit Sound» using the “Abort” command, not
Escape.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Connections
This section takes a brief look at the types of con- PEDALS
nections that can be achieved with your WK4 by
means of the rear panel connectors. Volume, Damper Ped 1 and Ped 2 are connec-
tors for continuous or switch action control ped-
als. The Volume connector can only accept a
POWER SUPPLY continuous pedal to control main Volume. The
remaining three connectors can be programmed
Insert the instruments power cord into to a suit-
to accept switch action or continuous control type
able grounded wall outlet.
pedals and are all function assignable.
The programmable pedals, denoted Ped 1, Ped
OUTPUT RIGHT/LEFT, 1, 2 2 and Damper, are preset to provide the follow-
ing three functions:
Right/Left Stereo outputs for amplified speakers,
amplifiers or domestic hi-fi units. Outputs 1 and
2 are auxiliary outputs which emit sounds not Ped 1 Soft Pedal (CC67)
processed by the internal effects processors (“dry”
Ped 2 Sostenuto (CC66)
signals).
DAMPER Damper (CC64)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - Before connecting these outputs,

be sure that the volume of the external amplifica-
tion devices is turned down. Connecting to the These three pedals can be independently ena-
jacks causes noise which can damage an bled or disabled to react with the keyboard sec-
amplification device. tions of a Preset.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Continuous control pedals offer graduated levels

Connect the LEFT and RIGHT jacks for stereo of change while Switch action pedals are of the
reproduction. For mono reproduction, connect on/off type.
either LEFT or RIGHT.
The pedal polarity can be programmed in the
Tracks can be independently assigned to the «General Controls» editor of «Edit General».
auxiliary outputs 1 & 2 in «Edit Mixer». Each Per-
formance can be independently programmed for
the audio outputs.
General equalization: regulate the General
equalization in «Edit Mixer». Consult the instruc-
tions in the Reference Section.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Basic concepts 3•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MIDI COMPUTER
Use the MIDI ports of group A for simple connec- It is possible to connect WK4 directly to a com-
tions. puter via the COMPUTER port. It is not possible
to use the COMPUTER and PEDALBOARD ports
Specific instructions for MIDI connections are
at the same time. The selection between these
found in the relevant chapters further ahead. The
two devices is made in «Edit General», «P.brd/
following setups show some of the principal con-
Cmptr» editor.
nections.
Macintosh and compatibles. Use a standard
• To pilot another instrument with WK4 con-
serial cable DB8-DB8 available from computer
nect the WK4 MIDI OUT to the MIDI IN of the
outlets. Program the sequencer to communicate
other instrument.
with WK4 at a velocity of 1 MHz.
WK4 EXPANDER PC-IBM and compatibles. Use a standard se-
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
rial cable DB8-DB9 or DB8-DB25 available from
computer outlets. Two communication velocities
• To pilot WK4 with a master keyboard con- are available for PC connection, PC1 and PC2.
nect the WK4 MIDI IN to the MIDI OUT of the
master keyboard. If the master keyboard has
to simulate the WK4 keyboard, the master APPLE MACINTOSH

keyboard must transmit MIDI on a channel

that corresponds to the WK4 Common Chan- mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 8-pin, male

nel (refer to the chapters dedicated to MIDI). 678 mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 8-pin, male 678

HSKo 1 1 HSKo
HSKi 2 2 HSKi
TXD- 3 3 TXD-

MK WK4 3 4 5
12
GND 4
RXD- 5
TXD+ 6
4 GND
5 RXD-
6 TXD+
3 4 5
12

MIDI OUT MIDI IN GPi 7

RDX+ 8
7 GPi
8 RDX+

IBM PC/AT

• To record Songs on external computers

or sequencers connect the WK4 MIDI IN to mini DIN, 8-pin, male

the MIDI OUT of the external device, the WK4 678 mini DIN, 8-pin, male

HSKo 1
mini DIN, 9-pin, female

7 RTS D-sub, 9-pin, female

MIDI OUT to the MIDI IN of the external de- HSKi 2

TXD- 3
GND 4
8 CTS
3 TXD
5 GND
1 5

3 4 5

vice. This configuration is called a “closed 12

RXD- 5 2 RXD
6 9

MIDI loop”. IBM PC/AT

WK4 COMPUTER
MIDI OUT MIDI IN mini DIN, 8-pin, male

678 mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 25-pin, female

MIDI IN MIDI OUT HSKo 1 4 RTS D-sub, 25-pin, female
HSKi 2 5 CTS 1 13
TXD- 3 2 TXD
GND 4 7 GND
3 4 5
RXD- 5 3 RXD
12 14 25

mini DIN, 8-pin, male

678 mini DIN, 8-pin, male mini DIN, 25-pin, female

HSKo 1 4 RTS D-sub, 25-pin, male

HSKi 2 5 CTS 1 13
TXD- 3 2 TXD
GND 4 7 GND
3 4 5
RXD- 5 3 RXD
12 14 25

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PEDALBOARD If the Generalmusic Audio/Video card is installed,
the Mic/Line input signal can be processed by
Connect the optional Generalmusic pedalboard the internal effects processor and directed to the
to this port. It can be used to play bass parts main mix (outputs). The editing operations are
(instead of auto-arrangement bass), or as a in «Edit General».
multifunction pedalboard to control the arrange-
ments.
It is not possible to use the COMPUTER and PHONES
PEDALBOARD ports at the same time.
Two headphones jacks are available under the
Pedalboard programming and the selection be-
keyboard on the extreme left of the instrument.
tween these two devices is effected in «Edit Gen-
Each jack can accept a standard pair of stereo
eral», «P.brd/Cmptr» editor.
headphones.

MIC/LINE IN
You can connect the following devices to the au-
dio MIC/LINE inputs:
• a microphone and a guitar (MIC
impedance). Private listening is achieved by inserting the head-
• an instrument with a stereo output phones into the HEADPHONES 1 jack (the inter-
(LINE impedance). nal speakers are not functional when this jack is
used).
The impedance of the two inputs 1 and 2 is con-
trolled by the twin knob 1 and 2. All to the left
corresponds to the lowest impedance (LINE), all
to the right to the highest (MIC).
VIDEO (OPTIONAL)
Regulate the output volume of the signal with the Installing the optional Generalmusic Audio/Video
front panel MIC/LINE slider. The volume of the card enables the video outputs. Connect an RGB
signal sourced from the audio inputs is not af- monitor, a domestic television or a closed circuit
fected by the M.VOL slider. video system to these sockets.
The domestic TV has to operate in AV mode. The
possible connections are shown in the following
table.

SOCKET VIDEO CABLE

RGB Monitor RGB with SCART socket RGB/SCART (Europe, Asia, South America, North
Africa)
RGB Television with SCART socket RGB/RCA (Europe, Asia, South America, North Africa)
RGB Television with Video-Composite socket RGB/RCA (U.S.A., Korea, South Africa)
SVHS Television with SVHS socket Standard SVHS cable

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Basic concepts 3•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The Display
The WK4 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all
times. The negative highlight cursor can be moved by means of the cursor buttons, and the selected
parameter can be modified with the DIAL or numeric keypad.
Parameters are shown in various different types of pages or windows:
• “Sound View” pages
• “Play View” or “Rec View” pages
• Edit pages
• Index pages
• Selection windows
• Dialog windows
• Warnings

“SOUND VIEW” PAGES:

This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. «Sound View» is the default viewing mode.
The Style/RealTime and Song editing modes and the Style and Song recording modes each show a
slightly different «Sound View” page.

d d
e f g e f g

h h

a b c a b c

Style/RealTime Song

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 d d
e f g e f g

h h

a b c a b c

Style Record Song Record

a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / .
b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound
name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which
are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.

If the track has been modified with «Edit Perf Sound», the symbol appears after the Sound name.
c. Menu. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In Style/Performance
mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu shows the options to
select:
• the track status.
• the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone
for the automatic accompaniment.
d. Status bar showing general information.
e. Style/RealTime mode: Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depend-
ing on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance
name.
A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by
the symbol [‘]. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*].
f. Tempo (varied with the DIAL).
g. Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter shows the cycle of the meas-
ures of the riff.
h. The current recognized Chord.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Display 3•11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 “PLAY/REC VIEW” PAGES (SONG MODE)
This type of page shows and allows you to edit the playing parameters of the Song.

h i k
h
b
a f
c

d
e

a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H. In record mode, the tracks identi-
fied by the key-play icon are set automatically in mute.
b. Locator [Song Pointer] which monitors the position of the Song events expressed in measures,
beats and sequencer resolution [or “tick”]. This parameter can be varied when the sequencer is off
to change the starting point of a song.
c. Song start and end locators for play, record or loops.
d. Time Signature, starting Tempo of a Song, record Quantize value.
e. Free memory indicator for the Song recording (max 400 kb).
f. Menu. Contains options which are selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. The menu contains the
«Sound View» option, the metronome setting parameter, the track or song erase function.
g. Status bar showing general information.
h. Names of the Song and Song-Performance.
i. Tempo (useful indicator for the «Sound View» page).
k. Locator (measure and beat counter useful for the «Sound View» page).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•12 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 “REC VIEW” PAGE (STYLE/REALTIME MODE)
This page allows you to program the Style parameters and to select the riff to record.

f g h
i
b
a d

a. Track status icons . Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H. When the Style is in Record mode
(RECORD led on) only the auto-accompaniment tracks (9-16) can be selected (DR, BS, AC1...AC6).
In record mode, tracks shown with a key-play icon are set automatically in mute.
b. Indicator of the riff currently in record. The first line indicates the Variation, the second the “cycle” or
section (Basic, Fill, Intro, Ending), the third the chord (Major, Minor, Seventh). Can be selected with
Soft button F2 («Rec. riff...»).
c. Time Signature parameters, Tempo, length of riff in measures, reference key, Scale Converter,
record Quantize activator.
d. Menu. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. The menu contains
the «Sound View» option, the metronome setting parameter, the function to cancel the track, riff or
Style.
e. Status bar showing general information.
f. Names of the Style and Style-Performance.
g. Tempo.
h. Locator (Measure and beat counter).
i. Riff name.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Display 3•13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EDIT PAGES
The edit pages differ, but have in common the presence of variable parameters in the edit zone at the
centre of the display.

e
g h i
f

b
a d
c

Simple structure

a. Tracks status icons. The Soft buttons A...H or the cursor buttons / select the tracks. Not all edit
environments shows this column.
b. Sound area (only shown in some pages) containing the name of the Sounds.
c. Area of programmable parameters.
d. Functions. Items which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. Each function generally
corresponds to a page of the respective edit environment. In some cases, On/Off options also
appear.
e. Status bar showing general information.
f. Edit environment icon. The symbol appears if the page parameters can be stored in the Per-
formance.
g. Name of the edit environment and edit page.
h. Name of the Performance and the track in edit (pages with parameters relating to the single track),
or name of the Sound in edit.
i. Icon corresponding to the . buttons. These buttons select other menus or other editors. If no
other menus or editors exist, the arrows are shown as transparent elements which cannot be se-
lected. If other menus or editors exist, one or both arrows will appear to indicate the presence of the
next or previous item.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•14 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Every environment has a relative icon:

Edit Effects Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit

Edit MIDI Edit Style/Song

Edit Mixer Edit General

Edit Controllers/Pads Edit Disk / Preload

Edit Track/Splits

In «Edit Effects», «Edit MIDI», «Edit Mixer», «Edit Controllers/Pads», «Edit Track/Splits», «Edit Perf
Sound» (simple structure) the buttons allow to pass to other functions within the same environment.
(In some versions of the operating system, some of these environments will have one function only,
therefore the buttons will not be active).
In «Edit Style/Song», «Edit General» (complex environments with several editors where only one
menu is available) the buttons pass from one editor to another without returning to the main menu.
In «Edit Disk» the buttons pass from one disk operation to another (Load, Save, Copy, Move, Erase,
Utility).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Display 3•15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTION WINDOWS
These appear when a button of the SOUND GROUPS, PERFORMANCE GROUPS, STYLE GROUPS
or the SONG button are pressed. The items shown in the selection window are selected with the
respective Soft buttons.

a b

a. Title of the window.

b. Bank selector (only in the Sound selection). Corresponds to the buttons.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The bank can be selected either in this selection window or by means of a BankSelect message
received via MIDI. Once the bank has been selected, the received ProgramChange selects Sound of the current
bank. Via MIDI, the Bank remains selected until a different BankSelect number is sent
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

c. List of items that can be selected.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•16 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DIALOG WINDOWS
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters
require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.

Select one of the options with the cursor buttons.

Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.

Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor.

Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.

Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.

WARNINGS
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate
specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).

Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Display 3•17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Data Entry
The WK4 data entry devices are used to insert alphanumeric data, select options and navigate within
the edit pages or the operating environments. The data entry devices consists of:
• DIAL;
• Numeric keypad (Edit/Number section when the KeyPad LED is on).
• Cursor buttons (directional arrows);
• Scroll menu buttons ( );
• ENTER and ESCAPE buttons.

NAVIGATING THROUGH THE MAIN MENUS

Some operating environments show a main menu.

The main menu is a list of the ‘editors’ (or modules).

Select the elements with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to
gain access to an editor.
OR, use the scroll menu buttons to enter directly into the
editors and pass from one editor to another.

NAVIGATING THROUGH THE LISTS

Some operating environments show a data list.

Select the elements with the cursor buttons. The black frame
represents the cursor, the white frame the selected location. The
display can show only a part of the list; when the first or last
element of the list is reached with the cursor, the list scrolls up-
wards or downwards.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•18 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NAVIGATING THROUGH THE PARAMETERS
Move the cursor (the negative highlight zone) using the cursor buttons.
For example, after turning on, the display shows the Style/Performance mode. You can select the
tracks with the cursor buttons / .

In edit pages, select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify the parameter value with the
DIAL.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Data entry 3•19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MODIFYING PARAMETERS WITH THE DIAL
The value of the selected parameter can be modified by rotating the DIAL (TEMPO-DATA). Clockwise
rotation for data increase and counter-clockwise rotation for data decrease.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: In the main display of the Style/Performance mode, the DIAL is active for Tempo changes.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

MODIFYING PARAMETERS WITH THE NUMERIC KEYPAD

KEY PAD

The numeric keypad corresponds to the EDIT/NUMBERS section. To use this EDIT / NUMBER
MIDI
section for data entry purposes, press the KEY PAD button. The numeric keypad EFFECTS MIXER

permits instant insertion of absolute numeric values. 1 2 3

CNT / PADS T. SPLIT SOUND

The following example shows how to assign a sound to a selected track by speci-
fying the corresponding ProgramChange/BankSelect MSB number on the nu- 4 5 6

meric keypad. If WK4 is used as a stand alone unit, it is not necessary to specify ST. / SONG OPTION GENERAL

the BankSelect LSB number (the last digit). 7 8 9

1. Select the track to which a sound has to be assigned. DEMO PRELOAD DISK

H. D.
_ 0 +
2. Press the KEY PAD button to activate the numeric keypad. An active zone
appears for a numeric insertion.

3. Specify the ProgramChange number. For example, 49 corresponding to StringsEnsemble 1.

4. Specify the ‘minus’ sign [-] (a separating symbol). The cursor passes to the BankSelect MSB:

5. Specify the BankSelect MSB number. For example, 2 corresponding to “StringsEnsemble Bright”
(49-2-1 number).

6. In cases where necessary, specify the “-” sign and the BankSelect LSB number for the last digit.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•20 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7. To correct an inserted number, move the cursor backwards with the DIAL or with the cursor buttons
/ , then insert the right number in place of the incorrect one.
8. To confirm the modification press ENTER or KEY PAD. The value is confirmed and the desired
sound is assigned to the track. The KEY PAD LED goes off and the EDIT/NUMBERS section is
restored as the Edit environment selector. To cancel the entire operation press ESCAPE. The
window closes and the data rests unchanged.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The active zone for data insertion closes after a few seconds of inactivity (as if ESCAPE has been
pressed).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

TEXT ENTRY
For text entry purposes, the keyboard activates as a source of alphabetical data where each note of the
central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to
navigate within the active zone.
The following example shows how to modify a Performance name.
1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button.

2. Press F7 or F8 to activate the “Change name...” function. An active zone appears where the name
can be inserted.

3. The name appears selected (shown in negative highlight). To cancel the selected name insert the
first character. To change one or more characters only characters, move the flashing cursor with the
cursor buttons.
4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character or process-
ing command:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Data entry 3•21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Two options appear below the name (“Caps On/Caps Off” and “Insert/Overwrite”) which can be
activated or deactivated with notes D2 and D#2 respectively.
The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard zone provide word processing functions:

• D2: CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off;

• D#2: INS/OVER - toggles between Insert / Overwrite mode;
• E2: SPACE - inserts a space between two entries;
• F2: DELETE - cancels the selected character or the one after;
• G2: <— (BACKSPACE) - cancels the previous character;

5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode, the inserted
characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight).
6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and close the
window.

ENTER/ESCAPE
ENTER confirms selections and values assigned
ENTER TEMPO /
to parameters in dialogue windows. In some edit
pages, ENTER confirms the value assigned to
the relative parameters and executes the func-
tion, such as the copy of notes or the quantization.
ESCAPE cancels operations and values as-
signed to parameters of dialogue windows. In
edit environments, ESCAPE returns to the main
menu or escapes edit and returns to the main ESCAPE
page of the current operating mode.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•22 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 User Configurations
THE NON-VOLATILE RAM Data NOT conserved at power down
When the instrument is turned on, you’ll find the Status of the control panel.
same data which was present when the instru- RAM -Sounds, if the battery-backed Sample-RAM
ment was turned off, thanks to the battery-backed is not installed.
RAM. RAM-Samples, if the battery-backed Sample-RAM is
In practice, it is possible to reconfigure the in- not installed.
strument’s memory with new data that differs to
the factory supplied configuration yb programming
or loading new Sounds, new Performances and
new Styles, etc.. THE BLOCK
WK4 defaults at power up with the Grand Piano The Block is a data set consisting of almost the
Performance, corresponding to the first location entire contents of the instrument’s memory. You
of the Performance Groups 1 button. In prac- can, therefore, configure the instrument’s RAM
tice, you can memorize a desired power-up sta- according to your needs and save the Block to
tus in this Performance. disk for future loading in a single operation.
The Block does not memorize the settings of the
Data conserved at power down accompaniment control buttons; these remain
RAM Sounds. in memory after power down but are not part of
RAM -Sounds, provided that the battery-backed the Setup.
Sample-RAM is installed. For example, you can load RAM-Sounds to
RAM-Samples, provided that the battery-backed Sam- memory in order to extend the on-board sound
ple-RAM is installed. library. You can load User Styles in order to ex-
The on/off status of the following buttons: ploit all the USER slots. You can load Songs.
Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower Memory,
All the above mentioned data can then be loaded
Tempo Lock, Mixer Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony
On/Off and the Arrannge Mode settings. to disk in a single step by saving the Block using
the «Save Single Block» procedure, and subse-
User-programmed Performances of the Performance
quently loaded back into RAM in a single step
Groups.
using «Load Single Block».
User Styles.
In order to fully exploit the features of the Block,
Songs.
however, it is more convenient to install the in-
Setup. strument with a Hard Disk owing to the limited
capacity of floppy disks.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Configurations 3•23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE SETUP SAVING THE SETUP
The Setup is part of the Block which contains the The Setup present in RAM can be saved in two
global settings of WK4. ways:
• Save the Setup to a Block as a single file
Contents of the Setup («Save Single Setup»), in order to create files
for particular occasions (for example, you can
Status of the TRANSPOSE buttons (general transpose
create a Setup for home sessions, a Setup
in semitones).
for live playing, one for piano-bar work, etc.).
«Edit General» - pages
• «Tuning Scale» (tuning and temperaments). • Save the Setup as a part of Block data («Save
• «Pedalboart/Computer» status. Single Block»). As in the case of the RAM, a
• «Video Controls». Block can contain only one Setup.
• «Mic/Line In» (settings of the MIC/LINE IN audio
inputs).
«Edit MIDI» LOADING THE SETUP
• «MIDI Channels LOCK» options
• MIDI channel settings for the LOCK — if the You can load a Setup in two different ways.
status is LOCK ON, when the Setup is loaded,
• Load the Setup only from a Block («Load Sin-
the MIDI status is set automatically to LOCK ON
and the tracks are assigned the programmed
gle Setup»).
MIDI channels. • Load the Setup as part of the data of a Block
«Edit Effects - «General Effect 1 Balance» page. («Load Single Block»).
«Edit Mixer» - «Equalizer» page.

A Setup is always present in memory and after

power down.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3•24 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 4 Sounds and Performances
THE SOUNDS AND TRACKS WAYS OF SELECTING SOUNDS
A Sound is assigned to each of the tracks that WK4 allows you to select single sounds or a com-
appear on the display. While you play, the tracks bination of different sounds.
currently generating notes flash a small triangle • To select a single sound, select the track that
after the track status icon. will accommodate it, press one of the buttons
of the SOUND GROUPS section and select a

sound with the corresponding Soft button.
• To select a sound combination, select a Per-
The tracks can be configured to play on the key- formance or a Style. Along with the sounds,
board in different ways, called keyboard modes: the keyboard modes, the track status, the ef-
fects and the general settings also change.
• Full keyboard mode - the Upper tracks (7
and 8) play across the entire keyboard range.
The Lower 1 and 2 sections are disabled for
activation (for Full keyboard mode only).
• Upper&Lower mode - the Upper tracks (7
and 8) play to the right of the Split point while
the Lower tracks (1 and 2) play to the left
from the split point down.
• Multi mode - tracks 3 to 8 play to the right of
the Split point while tracks 1 and 2 play to
the left from the split point down.
The Soft buttons A…H to the left of the display
select, activate or deactivate the tracks. For ex-
ample, if an Upper track is muted and not se-
lected, by pressing its corresponding Soft button
twice, the sound assigned to the track will acti-
vate for play (press once to select, press again
to activate).
The Sounds and the keyboard modes can be
changed instantly by selecting a Performance or
a Style.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting single Sounds

There are two ways of listening to single sounds:

• Press the SOLO button. SOLO

Activating this button isolates the selected

track from the rest, regardless of its current
active/mute status. All other active tracks are
temporarily muted.
Use the SOLO button to isolate a track in or-
der to listen to the assigned Sound and ap-
ply any eventual modifications.
Press SOLO again to restore normal play-
ing.

• Select Full Keyboard mode and mute one of the

Upper sections.
The procedure for this method is outlined
below.
1
1. Press F1 or F2 to select Full Keyboard mode.
The Upper1 and Upper2 sections are as- F1

signed to the entire keyboard range while the F2

F3

Lower sections are temporarily disabled for F4

activation. F5

F6

2. Set Upper1 to play and Upper2 to mute. F8

F7

Select Upper2 by pressing the Soft buttons

E or F. Press the same button repeatedly to
toggle between the «mute» and «key-play» 2
status icon. Set the track to «mute».
Select Upper1 by pressing the Soft buttons E

G or H. Press the same button repeatedly to

F
toggle between the «key play» and «mute»
status icon. Set the track to «key-play». G

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. With track Upper1 selected, press a button of
3
SOUND GROUP

the SOUND GROUPS section. PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB

The display shows a bank of 8 Sounds be- REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC.

longing to the selected Group.

Each Sound is also displayed with the corre-
sponding ProgramChange (PC) and
BankSelect MSB (CC00) number, in the form
PC-CC00. These are the relative MIDI mes-
sages for the corresponding Sounds.

4. Select the Bank containing the desired sound

using the buttons.
Each Group can contain up to 16 banks. The
bank number corresponds to the BankSelect
4/5
MSB (CC00) MIDI message.

5. Select a Sound with the soft buttons.

A

In the Sound selection window, the soft but- B

tons are paired. Either of the two buttons C

can be used for selection purposes. E

D

6. The selected Sound is assigned to the currently G

selected track (in this case Upper 1). H

Play and repeat the selection operations to

listen to other sounds.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6
Note: To avoid the closure of the selection
window each time a Sound is selected, press D.
HOLD (display hold).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting Performances
Select a Performance when you want to change
the whole sound combination, not just a single 1
sound. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS but-

tons.
The display shows 8 Performances to choose
from.

2. Select a Performance using the corresponding

Soft buttons.
Once a Performance has been selected, the
selection window closes and the display re-
turns to its previous status showing the con-
figuration and sounds of the selected Per- 2
formance.
The settings recalled by the Performance in- F1

clude: the keyboard mode, the track status, F2

F3

the Sounds assigned to the tracks, the ef- F4

fects, the track assignments for the action of F5

the pedals and the chord recognition mode. F6

F7

The status bar shows the name of the se-

F8

lected Performance.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When a selection window shows a

choice of 8 items to select from, the 16 Soft buttons
pair up to become 8 buttons as follows: A/B, C/D,
E/F, G/H, F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6 and F7/F8.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Select Sounds, Performances or Styles using Display Hold
Normally, after selecting an item from a selection
window, the display returns to the previous sta- 1 D. HOLD

tus automatically.
If you activate D. HOLD (LED on), the selection
window remains locked after selecting an item.
This allows you to continue selecting other items
until you are satisfied with the result.
2/3
SOUND GROUP

PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS S

1. Press D. HOLD. REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX E

The LED of the button turns on.

2. Press a button from the SOUND GROUPS, the A

PERFORMANCE GROUPS or the STYLE GROUPS C

B

section to open the relative selection window. D

In this case a Sound. F

3. Select an item.
H

The selection window remains locked.

4. Select other items as required. 4

5. Press another Group button to open a different F1

selection window and select another item.

F2

F3

F4

6. Press ESCAPE to close the selection window with- F5

out cancelling D. HOLD.

F6

F7

F8

Press D. HOLD to cancel the function (LED

off).
5 SOUND GROUP

PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB BRASS

REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC. SFX

6 D. HOLD

OR
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 How to Program Performances
This section describes some of the most com-
mon changes that can be applied to the Perform-
ances.
Once a Performance has been modified, it can
be saved to RAM by pressing STORE PER-
FORMANCE. Without saving, the modifications
remain temporary and are lost when you select a
different Performance, or reselect the same one.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The changes described in this section

can also be applied to Style-Performances and
Song-Performances.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

HOW THE SOUNDS ARE ARRANGED Sound Group name ProgramChange

Piano 1 ... 8
In default conditions, the Performances recall
factory-set Sound combinations. You can change Chromatic 9 ... 16
one or more Sounds of any Performance and Organ 17 ... 24
store the resulting modifications to memory so Guitar 25 ... 32
that the Performance recalls your preferred Bass 33 ... 40
Sound combination when it is selected.
Strings 41 ... 48
The Sounds are arranged in 16 Groups of 16
Ensemble 49 ... 56
banks each. Each bank can contain up 8 Sounds.
Brass 57 ... 64
The Sounds of Bank 1 are arranged according to
Reed 65 ... 72
General MIDI standards, while those that reside
in other Banks are variations of the Bank1 Pipe 73 ... 80
Sounds. The table shown opposite lists the Synth lead 81 ... 88
Sound Group names. Synth pad 89 ... 96
Synth SFX 97 ... 104
Ethnic 105 ... 112
Percussive 113 ... 120
Special SFX 121 ... 128

Sound map

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ASSIGNING SOUNDS TO THE TRACKS
1
1. Use the Soft buttons to select a track. A

The selected track is shown in negative high- C

light. A track can also be selected in other D

pages, provided that the track icon appears F

in the extreme left area of the display. G

2. Press a button of the SOUND GROUPS section.

The display shows 8 Sounds to choose from.

3. Select a Sound Bank using the buttons.

2
SOUND GROUP

PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB

Each Group contains up to 16 Banks. Scroll

through the Banks using the buttons until REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC.

the required Sound is displayed.

4. Use the Soft buttons to select a Sound.

The Sound is assigned to the selected track
and the selection window closes. The dis-
play returns to its previous status showing
the updated situation.
The new situation remains in memory as a
temporary status until changed again, or un-
til you recall the default conditions by select- 3/4
ing the same Performance again.

5. To save the change press STORE PERFORMANCE

followed by ENTER to confirm. A

The new situation is permanently memorized. C

You can restore the original settings of the E

Performance using the Restore Performance G

command, explained at the end of this chap- H

ter.

5 STORE
PERF.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT A SOUND
Each WK4 Sound is identified by two numbers:
1
the ProgramChange (PC) and the BankSelect A

MSB number, or ControlChange 00 (CC00). You C

can select a Sound by specifying the absolute D

values corresponding to the PC and CC num- F

bers on the numeric keypad. G

In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to

the BankSelect LSB, or ControlChange 32 (CC32),
is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an
expander connected to the WK4 MIDI OUT.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KEY PAD

Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its
own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if
2
the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying
ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you
will select Sound 96-2-1.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1. Select the track to which the Sound is to be as-

signed.
2. Press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric EDIT / NUMBER

keypad. 3 EFFECTS MIDI MIXER

1 2 3

An insertion window activates showing the CNT / PADS T. SPLIT SOUND

number of Sound currently assigned to the 4 5 6

track.
ST. / SONG OPTION GENERAL

3. Specify the ProgramChange of the required 7 8 9

Sound. DEMO PRELOAD DISK

H. D.

If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, key _ 0 +

in a dash («–») which acts as a separator

then specify the corresponding Bank number EDIT / NUMBER

(Bank Select MSB). 4 EFFECTS

1
MIDI MIXER

3
2

If necessary, add a second separator («–»)

CNT / PADS T. SPLIT SOUND

and the third part of the message (BankSelect

4 5 6
LSB).
ST. / SONG OPTION GENERAL

4. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press 7 8 9

ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

DEMO PRELOAD DISK

H. D.
The KEY PAD LED will go off. _ 0 +

Press STORE PERF then ENTER to save

the change.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING THE TRACK STATUS
Tracks 1-8 of a Performance (the keyboard
tracks) can be set to either key-play or mute sta-
tus. «key-play» status icon
A track set to key-play status can play, while a
muted one cannot. It is possible to toggle be-
tween the key-play and mute status in order to «mute» status icon
instantly add or remove a sound while playing.
How to toggle between the mute and key-play
status is explained as follows.
1
1. Select a track shown set in key-play with the A

corresponding Soft button. C

The selected track is shown in negative high- E

light. G
F

2. Press the same Soft button again to mute the

track.
The track changes status. The «mute» icon
replaces the «key-play» icon and the track is
temporarily deactivated for play and ceases 2 F

to receive or transmit MIDI messages. G

3. Press the same Soft button once more to toggle

back to the key-play status.
The track status changes back to «key-play»
showing the relative icon as before. The track
activates for play and it is able to receive and
transmit MIDI messages as before.
3 F

4. Press STORE PERFORMANCE and confirm with

H

ENTER to save the change.

Pressing STORE PERFORMANCE saves
the track status to the Performance. If you
select another Performance before saving the
4
STORE ENTER TEMPO / DATA
PERF.
current one, the changes will be lost.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: In Song mode and in the accompaniment

tracks of the Style/RealTime mode, the track status
is toggled in the following cyclic order: seq-play –> ESCAPE

mute –> key-play –> seq-play.......

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING THE KEYBOARD MODE FULL Keyboard
The keyboard Sounds can be set to various key-
board modes:
< -------- Full keyboard (Upper1 &/or Upper 2) -------- >
• Full keyboard;
UPPER/LOWER Keyboard

• Upper&Lower;
< - Low 1&/or2 -- > < --- Upper 1 &/or Upper 2 ----- >
MULTI Keyboard
• Multi

The following example outlines how to select the

< -- TRACKS 1-2 --- > < --------- TRACKS 3 -8 ----------- >
keyboard modes.

1. With the main page of the Style/RealTime mode

showing, select the Full Keyboard mode with the 1
Soft button F1 or F2.
Full keyboard mode assigns the Upper 1 and F1

Upper 2 tracks to the entire keyboard. F2

F3

Try playing and changing the track status of

F4

F5

the Upper sections. F6

F7

2. Select Upper & Lower mode using Soft button F3 F8

or F4.
Upper & Lower keyboard mode splits the key-
board at note B3 and assigns the Lower 1
and Lower 2 tracks to the left split (from B3
2
down) and the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks
F1

to the right (from C4 up). F2

F3

Try changing the track status to modify the F4

combination of the sounds in both sections F5

F6

of the keyboard. F7

F8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Select Multi mode using Soft button F5 or F6.
3
Multi keyboard mode splits the keyboard at
note B3 and assigns Tracks 1 and 2 to the
F1

left split and Tracks 3 - 8 to the right. F2

F3

Try changing the track status to experiment F4

with the overall sound combinations that can F5

F6

be obtained. F7

F8

4. Press STORE PERFORMANCE and confirm with

ENTER to save the change.
When you press STORE PERFORMANCE,
the last set keyboard mode is memorized to 4 STORE
PERF.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

the Performance. If you select another Per-

formance before saving the setting, your new
data will be lost.
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT
The Split Point is:
(a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower
keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and
Multi keyboard modes and,
(b) the point below which the keyboard recog- 1
nizes chords which trigger the Style automatic
accompaniments (in Fingered and One Fin-
ger chord recognition modes).
The current Split Point setting appears in the main
page as an option that can be selected with soft
button F7 or F8. The setting can be modified as F8
F7

required.

1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing,

press either Soft button F7 or F8 to open the
«Split Point» dialog window.
2. Rotate the DIAL or play a note on the keyboard
(corresponding to the highest note of the Lower
split zone) to modify the setting.
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog
window. If you entered the wrong note, sim-
2 TEMPO / DATA

ply play another. or

3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or

ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
If you press ENTER, the main page will show
the new Split Point setting. If you press ES-
CAPE the original Split Point will be restored.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The Split Point is a general parameter

(not linked to a particular Performance) which is
conserved in memory when the instrument is
turned off. The new setting is lost when the “Reset
All” operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM
loses its data due to the total discharge of the 3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

battery.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•12 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING TRACK VOLUMES
Performances also memorize the individual track
volumes. Use sliders A to H to obtain the re-
quired mix and save the Performance with
STORE PERFORMANCE.
The correspondence between the sliders and the
tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on
the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can
affect a) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings above the sliders, or b) the tracks iden-
tified by the silkscreened markings A…H below
the sliders.
If the display shows four tracks, refer to the mark-
ings shown above the sliders. If eight tracks are
displayed, refer to the markings shown below the DRUMS BASS ACC. 1/3 ACC. 4/6 LOWER.2 LOWER.1 UPPER.2 UPPER.1

sliders.
• In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard
modes, refer to the markings above the sliders.
The sliders control the indicated tracks.
A B C D E F G H

• In Multi mode or when the Style accompani- DRUMS BASS ACC. 1/3 ACC. 4/6 LOWER.2 LOWER.1 UPPER.2 UPPER.1

ment tracks are shown, refer to the markings

A…H. Each slider corresponds to one of the dis-
played tracks: slider A to track A, slider B to track
B, …., slider H to track H.
A B C D E F G H

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: To conserve the obtained mix, save the

Performance using STORE PERFORMANCE. The
changes will be lost if you select another
Performance (or the same one again).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TRANSPOSING TRACKS (BY SEMITONES)
1
The tracks can be independently transposed by T. SPLIT

semitones in the «Tracks/Splits» edit environ-

5
ment.

1. Press the T.SPLIT button in the EDIT section.

The main page of the «Edit Tracks/Split» en-
vironment appears.
If the «Transpose» page does not appear,
recall it with Soft button F1 («Transpose»). 2 A

2. Select the track that requires transposing using D

OR
either the soft buttons or the cursor buttons.
E

In certain edit pages it is possible to select H

the tracks by selecting the relative parameters

with the sliders.

3. Rotate the DIAL to set the required transposi- TEMPO / DATA

tion. 3
In the edit pages, the DIAL modifies the se-
lected parameter. Rotate the DIAL to raise
or lower the transposition in steps of one
semitone. Negative values correspond to a
lowering of the transposition.

4. Exit the «Tracks/Splits» editor by pressing ES- 4 T. SPLIT ENTER TEMPO / DATA

CAPE or T. SPLIT.
5

ESCAPE returns to the main «Edit Perform- OR

ance” page; PERFORMANCE escapes from
the edit and returns to the previous status. ESCAPE

5. Press STORE PERFORMANCE and confirm with

ENTER to save the changes to the current Per-
formance.
If you fail to save the modified Performance,
5 STORE
PERF.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

the new setting will be lost by selecting an-

other Performance (or selecting the same one
again).
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•14 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 GENERAL TRANSPOSITION
Transpose all the tracks in semitone steps by
using TRANSPOSE. 1 TRANSPOSE

The General transposition effects the instrument

as a whole and allows you to tune WK4 to other
instruments or to the voice of a singer.
C#4
C#4 D4D4
1. Press the TRANSPOSE b button one or more times
C4C4 C#4
C#4
to lower the pitch by one or more semitones.
B3 B3 C4C4
The b LED turns on (cancelling an eventual
positive transposition if present).

2. Press the TRANSPOSE # button one or more times

2
TRANSPOSE

to raise the pitch by one or more semitones.

The previous transposition is cancelled. The
b LED goes off and the # LED turns on.

3. Cancel the current Transpose setting by pressing D4 D#4

both b and # buttons at the same time. C#4 D4

The LED goes off and the instrument is restored C4 C#4

to normal pitch.

3 TRANSPOSE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 How to Store Performances
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE button to save Performances containing a modified Drumkit or
a Performance, to create a new one or to change SoundPatch are identified by the keyboard sym-
the name. bol:
Save a Performance if you want to conserve the
changes that have been applied. The temporary
changes made to a Performance are lost if you ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

select a different one or the same one again,
Note: The examples above show how to save
a Performance. The procedures to save a Style-
select a Style, or if you press START/STOP or Performance or Song-Performance are identical.
PLAY. ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Note: The changes made do not alter the

You can save the changes to the current Per- original WK4 data in any way because they are
formance, or to a different one. The changes changes made to RAM copies. The original data
can be restored using the Restore function
can be memorized to a Programmable Perform- (Restore all, Restore Performance, Restore Style-
ance or a Style-Performance, regardless of the Performance) in «Edit General».
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

source Performance. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - STORE PERFORMANCE saves

The following data are also saved: the Performance to RAM, not to disk. The data in
RAM is lost when (a) the backing battery runs flat,
(b) when the instrument is initialized (Restore All
command).
Data saved to a Performance Saving a Performance to a location cancels the
Performance currently occupying the selected
EDIT parameters destination.
Tempo Save the Performances that you do not want to
loose to disk. Use the Save Single Block, Save
The number of the selected Style and Variation (Per- Single Performance or Save all Performance
formance only) procedures in «Edit Disk».
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Modified Performances not yet saved to memory

are identified by a small dash before the name:

Styles with modified Style-Performances are

identified by an asterisk (*):

Performances containing Sounds modified in

«Edit Perf Sound» are identified by the symbol
( ) next to the name of the modified Sound:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•16 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVING CHANGES TO THE CURRENT PER-
FORMANCE
Save a Performance to itself if you want to con-
serve a recent change (e.g. a transposition or a
track volume change).

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to recall the «Store

1
Performance» dialog window. STORE
PERF.

To save changes to the current Performance,

the displayed parameters can remain as
shown.

2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE

to cancel.
With ENTER, the Performance retains the
new settings. Each time this Performance is
2
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

recalled, WK4 will be configured with pre-

cisely the same settings as those memorized.

Saving to the power-up Performance

WK4 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the ESCAPE

GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to

play. The factory-programmed status of the Grand
Piano Performance can be modified in order that
WK4 powers-up according to a preferred setting.
The factory-set situation recalled by the
GrandPiano Performance is the following:
Piano1 sound assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard
section and set to play across the entire keyboard
range, the ARRANGE ON/OFF and LOWER
MEMORY buttons activated (LED on), VARIA-
TION 2 of Style 8 Beat Standard selected from
the 8 BEAT Style Group, the keyboard mode set
to Full, the Upper 2 section mute and both Lower
1 and Lower 2 keyboard sections mute and disa-
bled for selection.
Whatever modifications you make and save to
the GrandPiano Performance are retained after
power down, but, however, you can restore the
original status of the Performance Groups using
the Restore Perfs function in «Edit General».

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVING CHANGES TO A DIFFERENT PER-
FORMANCE (OR CREATING A NEW PER-
FORMANCE)
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Store
Performance» dialog window.
1
The dialog window shows the Group and the STORE
PERF.

location within the group where the Perform-

ance will be saved. The Group corresponds
to one of the PERFORMANCE GROUP or
STYLE GROUP buttons.

2. Use the cursor buttons to select the type of Per-

formance to save the changes to.
You can save the Performance as a Perform-
ance or a Style-Performance. The two types 2
of Performance are perfectly compatible.
• To save the data as a Performance, select
the Performance option with cursor button .
• To save the Performance as a Style-Per-
formance, select the Style option with cursor
button .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The type of Performance proposed by

WK4 when the dialog window is recalled depends
on the status of the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button -
if active a Style-Performance is suggested, if not
active the type suggested is a Performance.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•18 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Select the destination Group and destination Per-
3
TEMPO / DATA

formance.
The “Store to Group” display area corre-
sponds to one of the PERFORMANCE
GROUP or STYLE GROUP buttons. Rotate
the DIAL to select the Group required.
Use the down arrow to select the Perf area
and rotate the Dial to select the destination
Performance. If you are saving as a Style
Performance, the Perf area switches to
“Style” if you select the Style option in point 2
above.
Empty locations are identified by a location
number while those already occupied show
the name of a Performance or Style.
Styles with a modified Style-Performance are
shown with an asterisk (*) after the name.

4. Press ENTER to confirm the save procedure, or

ESCAPE to cancel.
4 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

After saving, the original Performance will

remain selected (the modified version).

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING THE NAME OF A PERFORM-
ANCE
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: This procedure changes the name of the

PERFORMANCE GROUPS only. To change the
name of a Style-Performance, change the name of
the Style it belongs to in «Edit Style».
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Store 1

Performance» dialog window. STORE
PERF.

2. Press F7 or F8 to open the «Performance name»

dialog window.
The entire name of the current Performance
is shown selected. Specifying one character
will cancel the entire name.

3. Change the name of the Performance.

2
Modify the name using the data entry devices. F1

F2

Using the keyboard as a source of alphanu- F3

meric data is explained in the chapter enti- F4

tled «Data entry». F6

F5

F7

F8

TEMPO / DATA

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•20 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
4
After pressing either ENTER or ESCAPE the ENTER

display returns to the «Store Performance»

dialog window.

5. Press ENTER to save the Performance. ESCAPE

5 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sounds & Performances 4•21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RESTORING THE ORIGINAL PERFORM-
ANCE SETTINGS 1 GENERAL

9
It is possible to cancel all modifications made to
the Performances and restore the factory settings.

1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access

to the «Edit General» environment.
2. Press F6 («Restore Perfs») or F8 («Rest. St.Perfs»)
to cancel the changes made to the Performances
or Style-Performances in RAM.
You are prompted with a request to recon-
firm your choice.
2
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and
F1

the original Performance settings (volume, F2

sounds, transposition, tempo) are restored. F3

F4

With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained. F5

F6

F7

F8
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a

single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4•22 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 5 Styles
Selecting Styles

OPTION A: THE STYLE ALSO CHANGES

THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS
1. Press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the 1 SINGLE
TCH. PLAY

sounds memorized in the Style Performance

are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a
Style changes the sounds of the accompani-
ment tracks as well as those assigned to the
keyboard sections.

2. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons.

The «Select Style» selection window ap- 2 STYLE GROUP

pears. The button pressed corresponds to a 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

group of 8 Performance Styles which are dis- JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

played in the selection window.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The PROG1, PROG2, PROG3 and

PROG4 buttons recall programmable Styles, which
can be empty. If you select an empty location,
WK4 prompts you to create a new Style:

Press ESCAPE or F5 to cancel and return to the

previous display.
Do not press any of the PROG buttons for the
moment.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Select a Style from the «Select Style» window
with the corresponding Soft button. 3
A

Selecting a Style instantly changes the auto- B

matic accompaniment, the accompaniment C

and keyboard sounds and the effects. If

D

TEMPO LOCK is off, the tempo also changes. F

If MIXER LOCK is off, the track volumes also G

change.
If the arrangements are playing, the new Style
enters at the next measure (bar).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OPTION B: THE STYLE DOES NOT CHANGE
THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS
1. Turn off SINGLE TOUCH PLAY.
1 SINGLE
TCH. PLAY

When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, select-

ing a Style changes the accompaniment pat-
terns, sounds and effects of the accompani-
ment tracks. If TEMPO LOCK is off, the
tempo also changes.
The sounds and effects of the live keyboard
tracks remain unchanged. 2 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK
STYLE GROUP

FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 U

2. Press one of the buttons of the STYLE GROUPS JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 U

section.
3. Select a Style from the «Style Select» window
with the corresponding Function button.
Selecting a Style instantly changes the auto-
matic accompaniment pattern together with
the sounds and effects of the automatic ac-
companiment tracks. The sounds and effects
of the live keyboard tracks remain un-
changed.
If TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK are off,
the tempo and track volumes also change. 3
A

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECT A STYLE WITH THE PERFORM-
ANCES 1
The Performances memorize the status of the ST. LOCK

instrument when the STORE PERFORMANCE

button is pressed, therefore, they also ‘remem-
ber’ which Style and Variation were active at the
time.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The Performances of the Performance

Groups are factory-set to recall the “8bt Std” Style, 2
therefore, you may not observe a change of Style. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1. Deactivate STYLE LOCK.

To change Style and Variation by selecting a
Performance, STYLE LOCK must be off.

2. Press a bank button in the PERFORMANCE

GROUPS section.
3. Select a Performance.
If on, SINGLE TOUCH PLAY deactivates au-
tomatically.
The sounds and effects of all the tracks 3
change (reverts to those contained in the
Programmable Performances).
F1

The Style and Variation that were active at F2

the time of saving the Performance are re- F3

F4

called. If TEMPO LOCK is off, the tempo also F5

changes. F6

F7

The status bar shows the name of the Style F8

and of the selected Performance.

Style name
status bar

Performance name

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The accompaniment tracks
In the Style/RealTime mode, 8 tracks are as-
signed to the keyboard and 8 to the automatic
accompaniment. The accompaniment tracks and
the keyboard tracks can be changed in the same
manner and saved in the Performance (Style-
Performance or Performance).
Press the right TRACK/SCROLL button to bring
the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
Each track corresponds to a precise part of the
accompaniment and is identified by an abbrevia-
tion.

Track Abbr. Part MIDI channel

9 DR Drum 10
10 BS Bass 9
11 AC1 Acc1 11
12 AC2 Acc2 12
13 AC3 Acc3 13
14 AC4 Acc4 14
15 AC5 Acc5 15
16 AC6 Acc6 16

Default configuration of tracks and MIDI channels

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The Style controls
Certain buttons on the control panel are dedicated 1. Make sure that ARRANGE MEMORY or
to the control of the Styles and the selection of LOWER MEMORY are on.
the variation, fill, intro and ending.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER

START/STOP MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while
your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops
Starts or stops the accompaniment playback. The instantly when the notes are released. If, instead,
one of these two functions are active, the accompa-
two LEDs under the button act as a visual metro- niment of the drum track will continue playing after
nome: the left LED flashes on the first beat of the releasing the keys.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

measure (bar) and the right LED’s flashes every

successive beat. 2. When the accompaniment is not playing,
Before pressing START/STOP to start the accom- press KEY START (if not already activated).
paniment, you can pre-select one of either 3. You can press one of INTRO, FILL or END-
INTRO, ENDING or FILL. ING to Performance the relative function. The
LED of the function activated remains on.
KEY START
4. Play a chord with your left hand. The ac-
Synchronizes the start of the automatic accom- companiment starts immediately (eventually
paniment with a note pressed on the keyboard preceded by the introductory pattern if se-
without having to use START/STOP. lected. The LED of the intro function selected
remains on until the cycle of the relative intro
KEY START can be turned off by: function is complete).
• pressing START/STOP to start the accom- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If the recognition mode in «Arrange

paniment. Mode» is Auto Chord Mode, when the keyboard is
split the chord will only be recognized below the
• pressing ENDING while the accompaniment Split point, while in the Full Keyboard mode, the
is playing. chord can be played at any point along the
keyboard.
• pressing KEY START once more to deacti- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

vate the function.

5. Stop the accompaniment with START/STOP.
KEY START is still on.
Key Start is not turned off by:
6. Play a chord with your left hand. The ac-
• pressing START/STOP while the accompa- companiment starts playing again.
niment is running.
7. Press ENDING or START/STOP to stop the ac-
• pressing INTRO, ENDING or FILL before companiment. ENDING turns KEY START off.
starting the accompaniment.
8. If you have stopped the accompaniment us-
ing START/STOP, press KEY START to turn
KEY START can be used in various situations.
it off.
The most common use is as follows:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INTRO FILL>< plays the fill cycle then continues with the
Selects an introductory pattern lasting one or current Variation. When the accompaniment is
more measures. After pre-selecting the INTRO, not playing, Fill can be Performance as an intro.
to start the Style you will need to press START/ FILL> plays the fill cycle then breaks into the next
STOP (or play left hand notes if Key Start is se- Variation. If variation 4 is selected, Variation 1
lected. will be recalled.
Pressed while the Style is playing, the INTRO
Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you hold
pattern can play as a fill.
the FILL button pressed, it will repeat the Fill cy-
cle continually until released.
ENDING
Stops the Style playback with an ending (a ‘coda’). TAP TEMPO
With the accompaniment stopped, you can pre-
This button also acts as the TAP TEMPO func-
select the Ending to play as an introduction.
tion.
You can use the ending as a fill when passing
With the accompaniment off, beat time on the
from one Style to another. While the Style is play-
button. The tempo is established according to
ing, press ENDING and immediately select an-
the timing of the last two taps, the relative Tempo
other Style. The ENDING cycle plays then
value is displayed and the accompaniment starts
passes directly over to the new Style.
automatically.

THE DIAL (TEMPO/DATA) The tempo is established according to the cur-

rent Time Signature, i.e. four times for 4/4, three
In the main window of the Style/RealTime mode times for 3/4, etc..
the DIAL is permanently active as a tempo con-
trol. Turn it clockwise to increase tempo or coun- As an audio indication to the rest of the band, the
ter-clockwise to slow it down. time is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If TEMPO LOCK is off when a Style is

selected, the tempo also changes when selecting FADE IN/OUT
new styles.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FADE IN/OUT fades the accompaniment with a
gradual increase or decrease of volume.
VAR 1, VAR 2, VAR 3, VAR 4
Press the button before starting the accompani-
These buttons control the Style Variations. Each ment. The Style track volumes are instantly set
button recalls a different version of the same ac- to zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY START
companiment. to start the accompaniment. After the start, the
Each variation includes different patterns for the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase
Basic, Intro, Fill and Ending sections. and reach their programmed peak after a 2 meas-
ure (bar) cycle.
FILL<, FILL><, FILL> Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment
is running; all the track volumes gradually de-
FILL< plays the fill cycle then breaks into the pre- crease and the accompaniment automatically
vious variation. If variation 1 is selected, Varia- stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
tion 4 will be recalled.
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ARRANGE ON/OFF Performance is selected the track volumes
change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks
When this button is on, all the accompaniment
assigned to the keyboard will change while the
parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you
accompaniment track volumes will not.
will only hear the Drum track when a Style is
started.
BASS TO LOWEST
ARRANGE MEMORY If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the
auto accompaniment of the current Style plays
When this button is on, the accompaniment con-
around the lowest note of the current chord. If
tinues to play after releasing the left hand from
you play a different inversion of the same chord,
the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand
the lowest note also changes resulting in a dif-
causes the accompaniment to stop.
ferent bass note being played.
LOWER MEMORY If off, the bass will follow the original programmed
pattern of the Style.
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the
left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the
held even if the left hand is taken away from the otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by play-
keys.. ing different chord inversions.
The Lower Memory function is useful for holding
HARMONY ON/OFF
on ‘background’ sounds without having to use a
Damper pedal (which may be of more use with This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED
the upper sounds). off) the current Harmony Type selected in the
HARMONY function of the «Edit Tracks/Split»
In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the func-
environment.
tion is used to keep the Drum part playing even
when you have taken your hand off the keys. Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing,
making simple one-note melodies sound as if they
ARRANGE MODE are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is
associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit
Pressing this button gains access to the chord this function. For more information on the Har-
recognition modes for the accompaniments. mony types available, see «Edit Track/Split» in
Refer to the paragraph “The Chord recognition the Reference Guide.
modes” on page 9 for more information.

TEMPO LOCK
If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Per-
formance is selected the tempo changes too. If
the function is on, the tempo will not change.

MIXER LOCK
A Performance also memorizes the track vol-
umes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The chord recognition modes (Arrange Mode)

WK4 can recognize the chords used in the auto-

matic accompaniment in various different ways.
These are: One finger, Fingered 1, Fingered 2,
Free 1 and Free 2.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The symbols of the recognized chord

appear on the main display screen. If the chord is
not recognized, the chord symbol is shown as the
lowest note played followed by several asterisks.
For example: «C***** ».
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: In order for the chord to be recognized

(and the relative symbol to be shown on the
display) Arrange On/Off must be on.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

«AUTO CHORD MODE» AND «FIXED

CHORD MODE»
The way in which the chords are recognized can
be either fixed or can change when the keyboard
mode is changed. Respectively, the options Fixed
Chord Mode or Auto Chord Mode must be se-
lected in «Arrange Mode».
• The “Fixed Chord Mode” option allows you to
select a general chord recognition mode which
does not take into consideration the keyboard
mode (and consequently any Performance
changes).
• The “Auto Chord Mode” option, active by de-
fault, changes according to the selected keyboard
mode (Full Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi).
Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a
Performance, the recognition mode can change
along with the Performance.
The option selected remains memorized after
power down.
The procedure which follows below explains how
to select one of the two «Arrange Mode» options.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Press ARRANGE MODE to gain access to the «Ar- ARRANGE

range Mode» environment. 1 MODE

The page shows the parameters of either

«Auto Chord Mode» or «Fixed Chord
Mode», depending on the option currently
selected.

2. Use the Soft buttons to select one of the two 2

options (Auto Chord Mode) or (Fixed Chord
Mode).
F1

• Fixed Chord Mode - the display shows a F2

F3

single list of recognition modes. Select the F4

mode desired to establish, regardless of the F5

keyboard mode. F6

F7

• Auto Chord Mode - the display divides into

F8

two parts. The left part shows the options

for Upper&Lower and Multi, while the right F1

F2

shows those for Full Keyboard. The black F3

frame (a) represents the cursor which can F4

be moved with the cursor buttons, while the F6

F5

white frame (b) shows that the element has F7

been chosen but not yet selected by the cur- F8

sor.
a b
3. Select the preferred recognition modes with the
cursor buttons.
4. Exit «Arrange Mode» by pressing either ESCAPE 3
or ARRANGE MODE.

ENTER TEMPO / DATA

4 ARRANGE
MODE

or
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING THE CHORD RECOGNITION
MODES One Finger
Independently of whether “Auto” or “Fixed” mode
Split Point
is selected, there are five possible chord recog-
nition modes available.
• One Finger, Fingered 1 and Fingered 2 require
the chord to be played below the Split Point.
• Free 1 and Free 2 allow the chord to be played
anywhere on the keyboard, ignoring the Split
Point.

One finger - A single note played below the Split

Point is interpreted as the root of a major
chord. Fingered 1
To obtain a minor chord, play the root and
the minor third (e.g. C and Eb). To obtain a Split Point
seventh chord, play the root and the seventh
(e.g. C with a Bb either above or below).
Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for the
chord to be recognized. If less than three
notes are played, the chord is not recognized
and the notes played in the left hand are con-
sidered ‘stray’ notes.
Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be played
to obtain the programmed pattern. If less than
three notes are played, the arranger recog-
nizes the chord but only triggers a light ac-
companiment. Fingered 2
Split Point

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Free 1 -The chord is recognized anywhere along
the keyboard, even if played in the right hand Free 1/Free 2
or using both hands. The chord must com-
prise a minimum of three notes.
7 sm (min)
In order not to be considered as part of the
chord, melody notes must be played at least
a fifth interval (seven semitones) higher than
the highest note of the chord.
If the bass note of the chord is separated from
the rest by more than a fifth interval (seven
semitones), the chord recognized will be di-
vided into two parts: the bass note itself, and
the rest of the notes which make up the chord.
The bass note is considered a ‘Pedal note’.
For example (see the illustration), if a chord
of C major is played with a D in the bass, the
chord symbol will be «C Maj/D».
While the instrumental parts in the accom- 7 sm (min)
paniment play in the recognized key (C ma-
jor in our example), the Bass part will play
around the lowest note (D in our example).
Free 1 recognizes up to 4 notes.
Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recog-
nized.

C Maj/D

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•12 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Dynamic Arrange Autobacking
This function allows the accompaniment volume The Autobacking function permits the accompa-
to be controlled according to the velocity applied niment to change pattern the instant you change
to the chord. chord.
When Dynamic Arrange is active, if you press When Autobacking is off, when you change chord,
the chord notes softly, the volume of the accom- the accompaniment pattern does not update in-
paniment tracks is lowered, if you press them stantly but waits for the next note of the accom-
harder, the volume increases. paniment before revising the pattern.
The function can be found in the «Arrange Mode» If Autobacking is on, changing chord updates the
page. Press ARRANGE MODE to access Dy- accompaniment pattern instantly without “breaks”
namic Arrange. in the pattern.
The function can be found in the «Arrange Mode»
page. Press ARRANGE MODE to gain access
to Autobacking.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING PERFORMANCES DURING
1
STORE

STYLE PLAY PERF.

ARRANGE ARRANGE
You can select Performances while the accom- ON / OFF MEMORY

paniment is playing to change the combination

of the keyboard sounds.

1. Activate SINGLE TOUCH PLAY. ARRANGE ON/ TEMPO MIXER

OFF and LOWER MEMORY activate automatically LOCK LOCK

if off. Turn off TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK (if

on).
2. Activate STYLE LOCK.
If STYLE LOCK is on, the Style and tempo
rest unchanged when you select a Perform-
ance. 2 ST. LOCK

If STYLE LOCK is off, when you select a

Performance, the Style, Variation and tempo
memorized in the Performance are recalled.

3. Select a Style.
STYLE GROUP

4. Press INTRO, ENDING or FILL>< to activate the 3 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 U

introduction. JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 U

4
INTRO KEY START ENDING

FILL

START / STOP
or or

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•14 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Press START/STOP to start the accompaniment
running. 5 INTRO KEY START ENDING

6. Play freely.
7. Select a Performance from the PERFORMANCE START / STOP

GROUPS section.
The SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button deacti-
vates and the combination of keyboard
sounds, the keyboard mode and the assigned
6
effects memorized in the Performance are re-
called. The sounds and arrangements of the
Style accompaniment tracks rests un-
changed.

8. Select other Performances. 7/8

9. Stop the accompaniment with ENDING or START/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STOP.

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

9 INTRO KEY START ENDING

START / STOP
or

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CHANGING STYLE WITHOUT STOPPING STYLE GROUP

THE ACCOMPANIMENT 1 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 U

JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 U

If you change Style while playing, the two Styles
unite without loss of continuity. You can pass
from one Style to another directly, or via a fill, an
intro or an ending. The following explanation is
a typical example. A

1. Select a Style. D

2. Press INTRO, ENDING or FILL to activate the intro. G

F

3. Press START/STOP to start the accompaniment.

4. Play normally with the selected Style.

2
INTRO KEY START ENDING
FILL

START / STOP
or or

INTRO KEY START ENDING

START / STOP

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•16 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Press a button of the STYLE GROUPS section and
5
STYLE GROUP

select a different Style. ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

The new Style starts to play at the end of the TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

current measure.

6. Play freely with the new Style.

A

7. Press FILL, INTRO or ENDING. B

8. Before the Fill, Intro or Ending cycle finishes, E

D

select another Style and one of its Variations. F

The new Style starts playing as soon as the H

Fill, Intro or Ending cycle terminates.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: The fill breaks into the arrangement

immediately and the relative cycle usually plays for 6
one measure (bar) only, unless the FILL button is
held pressed for a period. The Intro and Ending
patterns start their relative cycles and the end of
current measure and can last for more that one
measure. Therefore, when changing Styles, the
Intro and Ending give you more time to select a
different Style.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 INTRO KEY START ENDING

FILL

START / STOP
or or

8 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK

STYLE GROUP

FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

A
VAR. 1 VAR. 2 VAR. 3 VAR. 4
B

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9. Play freely.
9
10. Select another Style and immediately press
INTRO or FILL><.
The Intro or Fill of the new Style are played
before passing to the selected Variation.

11. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the accom-

10
STYLE GROUP

paniment. 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE

JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

INTRO

FILL FILL FILL

TAP TEMPO

S or

INTRO KEY START ENDING

11

START / STOP
or

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•18 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tempo
The Style Tempo, shown on the main page, can SAVING THE TEMPO TO A PERFORM-
be adjusted while playing by rotating the DIAL. ANCE
The current tempo setting can be saved to a Per- A tempo setting that differs to the default tempo
formance or Style-Performance. data of the ROM Style can be saved to the Style-
By saving the Tempo to a Style-Performance, in Performance or Performance.
practice you modify the tempo setting of a ROM 1. Select a Style.
Style.
2. Modify the tempo with the DIAL.
Thanks to the battery-backed RAM, the tempo
setting remains memorized after turning off the 3. Press START/STOP to listen to the Style. If
instrument. the tempo needs further adjustment, rotate
the DIAL until you obtain the desired tempo.
4. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to save the
CHANGING THE TEMPO OF A STYLE Performance. The «Store Performance» dia-
Use the DIAL to change the tempo setting, either log window appears. If you want the new
before or after starting the Style. tempo setting to be associated to the Style,
select the «Style» option. If the setting is to
To recall the original tempo, select the same Style be associated to a Performance, select the
again. «Performance» option.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to can-

Note: If a different tempo has been memorized
in the Performance, when a Style is selected the cel.
tempo will be that of the Performance and not the
original. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: Save the Performance to disk to conserve

the changes. The Performances remain in RAM
after power down but are cancelled when you save
other Performances to the same locations.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Styles 5•19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RESTORING THE ORIGINAL DEFAULT
STYLE-PERFORMANCES 1 GENERAL

To erase all modifications saved to the Perform-

ances, all the modified Performances currently
residing in RAM must be cancelled to restore the
factory Performance settings.

1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access

to the «Edit General» environment.
2. Press F8 («Rest. St.Perfs») to cancel the changes
made to the Style-Performances in RAM.
You are prompted with a request to recon-
firm your choice. 2
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel. F1

F2

With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and F3

the original Performance settings (volume, F4

sounds, transposition, tempo) are restored.

F5

F6

F7

With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained. F8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a

single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5•20 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 6 Disk & Hard disk
Working with disks provides you with a means of • Hard disk: handles a 2,5” IDE or E-IDE unit
building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds - a more complex device. Installation requires
and Songs that you can load into the WK4 RAM the Generalmusic HDisk installation kit which
memory at any time. As you become more fa- also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk
miliar with your WK4, you’ll discover the practi- has faster access times and a capacity of 500
cal uses of working with disks, because of the Mb (max.). Clearly, a Hard disk is more con-
flexibility and power that they offer. venient than floppies. If you have purchased
your instrument with a factory installed Hard
This chapter introduces you to the concepts of disk, you’ll find that it is write-protected to
Files, Disks and RAM memory, explains the prin- avoid accidental cancellation of the files it
cipal Disk functions by showing you how to load contains. You can remove the protection by
and save Songs, Styles, Performances and MIDI deactivating the Hard Disk Protection option
Files. in the Disk Utility page.
Other useful Disk functions (Erase, Copy, Move, All the operations described in this chapter
Utility) are discussed in the Edit Disk chapter. make reference to the Floppy disk - Hard disk
operations are identical in every respect.
For first time Disk users
Those who are using floppy disks for the first time
are recommended to read through all the pre- FLOPPY DISK FORMATS
liminaries, right up to page 8, and refer also to
WK4 recognizes the following formats: WK4 ex-
the pages at the end of this chapter which dis-
panded format (1.6 Mb) or standard MS-DOS
cuss disk handling precautions, how to insert and
(1.44Mb), the Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
extract disks and other general information.
WK4 is able to initialize disks for every format. It
is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles and
To skip the preliminaries Songs from WK4, WX and SX Series disks.
If you want to skip the preliminary information, Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3
go straight to page 8 which starts with details and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
about how to load files into RAM. conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI
eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders
the first three banks of WK4 fully compatible.
FLOPPY DISKS AND THE HARD DISK WK4 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data
The WK4 can handle floppy disks and hard disks. disks originating from non-Generalmusic in-
struments. Song exchanges with other instru-
• Floppy disks: handles 3.5" high density ments requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI
(HD) and double density (DD type for MIDI file on MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720
files only). Kb formats).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FILES & THE BLOCK Type of File Description ID
Data is stored on disks in the form of FILES. A Block All file types Name.BLK
file can be a Song, a Performance, a Style, a except MIDI files
Setup or a Block. Setup General settings Name
for MIDI channels
Files are organized in sub-directories which are video, pedals & pads
contained in a BLOCK. The Block reflects the
Sound RAM-Sound and Name
structure of the instrument’s internal RAM, as il-
RAM -Sound.
lustrated below.
Performances Perf. Groups Name
Block n Style-Perf. ROM Style Perfs. Name
Block Block 3
Block 2 excluding USER
Real-Perf Block 1
Songs
1
Group 1
...
User Style USER Styles and Name
Group 8
Real-Perf
...
16
Songs Group 1
...
relative Style-Perfs
1
Style-Perf ... Group 8
User Styles Group 1
...
16 Song WK4 format Name
Group 1 Style-Perf
Group 2
Group 3
Group 12
User Styles Group 1
WX2/SX2 format. “Name”.WXS
Group 4 Group 1 ...

Sounds
Group 2
Group 3
Group 12 or “Name”.SXS
Setup Group 4
Group 1
...
Group 16 Sounds Setup
MIDI file MIDI files “Name”.MID
Group 1
...
Group 16
(SMF 0 and 1)
RAMlock)
(1 B
DISKlocks)
(n B

Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.

THE MAIN DISK PAGES
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block, Pressing DISK enters the «Disk» environment
but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suit- where all DISK operations are performed. The
able for Hard Disks. Disk commands a spread across 6 main pages,
each identifying a principal Disk operation:
When you load a Block using the Load Single
Block command, the entire contents of RAM are
updated. 1. Load Loads data to RAM.
2. Save Saves data to disk.
3. Erase Erases data from RAM or disk.
FILE TYPES 4. Copy Copies data from floppy disk to hard
The types of File encountered when working in disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
the WK4 Disk environment are identified by a
name. In some cases, a file name includes an 5. Move Moves data from floppy disk to hard
extension which is eliminated when the file is disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
loaded into RAM.
6. Utility Useful functions (formatting, disk
The table which follows summarizes the file types name, data restore, etc.)
encountered and, where applicable, the exten-
sion:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FILE QUANTITY THE FILE SELECTOR
Files can be handled as Single elements, as a The File Selector corresponds to the second level
Group of files or as an entire set of file types (All), of disk operations and is accessed by confirming
as shown in the following table: the command specified in the main page. Once
in the file selector, you can select the source
files and respective destinations.
FILE QUANTITY
The file selector is divided into two columns
Single A single file.
showing (a) the source file directory (a contents
Group All the files assigned to one of the list) and (b) the destination directory. All «Disk»
buttons of the Style Groups (ROM operations, except the Erase command and the
and User), Performance Groups or
Utility, copy or move files from a source to a des-
Sound Groups. It is also possible to
load to 2 “virtual” Song Groups. tination (e.g. from disk to RAM).
All All Groups of a file type (all Sounds, The direction of the copy or move operation is
All Performances, All Styles, etc.). shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the
direction and the names of the source and des-
tination files.

THE DISK COMMANDS

The «Disk» commands are specified in the main The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard
Disk pages by combining the File Quantity in one Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the
column with the FileType in the other: Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3.
• select the file quantity (Single, Group, All);
Empty locations are represented by a broken line.
• select the file type (Sound, Performance, If you select a destination already occupied by a
Song, etc.). file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming
Example: To load a single Song, specify «SIN- one.
GLE» and «SONG» in the main LOAD page.

source destination page selection device

device device ( ) selection

(a) (b)

directory available Source Destination

quantity file type refresh memory Directory Directory

Main «Load» page «Load Single Song» File selector

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD, SAVE, ERASE COPY, MOVE OPERA- HOW TO NAVIGATE IN THE DISK ENVI-
TIONS RONMENT
Data stored in floppy disk, hard disk or RAM can Move around in the Disk pages with the naviga-
be Loaded, Saved, Erased, Copied or Moved tional tools which are;
using one of the following methods:
• the directional arrows [ / - / ]:
• as single elements (Single Song, Single User
Style, Single Performance, Single MidiFile,
etc.);
• as a Group of files (User Style Group, Song
Group, etc.);
• as an “ALL” data set containing file types of
all Groups (All Songs, All Sounds, All Style • the page selector buttons:
Groups, All Performance Groups, etc.).

Limitations
Some file types cannot be handled more than Execute the Disk commands with the ENTER
one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only button or abort with the ESCAPE button:
be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE com-
mand. Some files can be handled as Single ele- ENTR TEMPO/DA

ments, Groups and All sets, while others are lim-

ited to Single and All sets only.
The table below shows the valid commands for ESCAP

each file type:

The cursor is represented by a negative high-
light zone which moves vertically and horizon-
File Type Command tally and also serves to identify which part of the
Block Single display is currently active (source or destination).
Setup Single
Sound Single, Group, All
Real Perfs Single, Group, All
The part of the display not currently active shows
Style Perfs Single, Group, All
an item “preselected” by a frame which also
User Styles Single, Group, All serves to identify the item that will be selected
Song Single, Group, All when the cursor is moved into the area.
MIDIFile Single The / navigating buttons move the cursor hori-
zontally from source to destination and vice versa.
The source files or destinations are selected by
moving the cursor vertically with the / buttons.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The general «Disk» procedure
Use the following procedure as a reference.
The procedure described is valid for All the Disk
operations which are discussed in this chapter.
Any variations are explained separately.
1
1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a
disk into the drive.
If you are working with the Hard Disk (op-
tional accessory), simply press DISK.

2. Press DISK and go to the page relating to the DISK

desired Disk function (Load, Save, Erase, Copy, 2 H. D

Move, Utility). +

Use the buttons to scroll through the

main disk pages. The example shows the
main Load page.

3. Select, if necessary, the device being handled with

the soft buttons F1, F2, F3. 3
Load and Save operations show the Floppy
Disk and Hard Disk options. If you are work- F2
F1

ing with the Hard disk, the H.D. LED will turn F3

on during the course of an operation. F4

F5

Erase, Copy and Move operations show the F6

RAM option in addition to Floppy and Hard F8

F7

Disk.
Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Specify the desired command with the directional
arrows (for example, «Load Single Song»). 4
Use the button to move into the quantity
column and select the file quantity (Single,
Group, All) with the / buttons.
Pass over to the other column with the but-
ton and select the file type (Sound, Perform-
ance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.

5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open

the File Selector.
The “Wait Please” message appears for an
instant before opening the File Selector.
The file selector now shows the source di-
rectory consisting of one or more Blocks to 5 (c)
choose from, and the destination directory
ENTER TE

representing the sector of RAM correspond-

ing to the file type being handled (in this case
the Song memory).
This display example shows the floppy disk ESCAPE

directory (a) with a single Block file, and the (a) (b)
instrument’s RAM directory (b) showing the
empty Song memory. The disk name is
shown at the top of the left column (c). If the
disk has no name, either “NO NAME” or
“UNTITLED” or other will be shown.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: At this point, to exit from «Edit Disk»,

press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.

6
The contents of the opened Block reveals the
file type selected in step 4 (in this case, sev- ENTER TE

eral Songs in numerical order).

At the bottom of both columns, information
regarding the selected file will appear. In this
ESCAPE

case, the left column shows the date that the

file was created and its dimensions expressed
in Kb (d). The right column is blank and rep-
resents the empty destination. (d)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7. If necessary, select the source file.
Use the / buttons to select the source
7/8
file from the active column. If you are not in
the desired column, move over with the /
buttons.

8. If necessary, select the destination.

Move into the destination column with the /
buttons and use the / buttons to select
a destination.
Empty locations are identified by a broken
line. If you select an existing file, it will be
erased by the incoming file. 9 ENTER TEM

9. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.

You will be prompted with “Are you sure?”. ESCAPE

10. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or

ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
10
With ENTER, the command is executed and ENTER TEM

a dialog window opens showing a message

relating to the current operation: For exam-
ple, if you are loading a single Song, the
message will say: “Loading Single Song....” ESCAPE

When the dialog window closes, the opera-

tion has been executed..

11. Repeat steps 7, 8, 9 and 10 until your destina-

tion is organized according to your requirements. 11/12
To select another file from a different block,
return to the source column, press Escape
to escape the current Block, press Escape
again to exit the File Selector, select another
Block, press Enter to gain access and con-
tinue as already described.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

12. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit «Disk». DISK

H. D
Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations +
and remembers the last page selected. or
Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the ESCAPE

current Block, (2) close the file selector and

(3) escape from «Disk».

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Load Operations

The load operations operate in the direction

Source –> RAM where the source can be Floppy 1
disk or Hard disk.
Have a disk ready containing the data you wish
to load. These can be WK4 format disks, disks
of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series,
and MIDI file disks.

THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive. DISK

2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.

2 H. D
+

If the main Load page is not shown, use the

left page scroll button ( ) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.

3. Specify the load operation required (example,

Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the
File Selector.
From here, proceed as described for the Load 3
operations on the pages which follow. ENTER TE

NOTE: All Load Single operations also fea-

ture a SEARCH RESOURCE function which
allows you to search for a single element
(Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User ESCAPE

Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the

Search Resource is explained in the Edit Disk
chapter of the Reference Guide. ENTER TEMPO / DATA

4. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE

4 DISK

H. D
three times) to exit «Disk». +
or
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE BLOCK
1
Use «Load Single Block» to rewrite the entire con-
tents of RAM. Block data contains: Sounds, Per-
formances, Style Performances, User Styles (and
relative Performances), Songs (and relative Per-
formances) and a Setup file. ENTER TE

1. Select SINGLE BLOCK from the main Load page

then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR. ESCAPE

2. Select the BLOCK to load then press ENTER twice

to load into RAM.
The “RAMFILE” shown at the destination is 2
replaced by the new file with the same iden-
tity (1 RAMFILE.BLK). ENTER TE

The Demo Disk supplied with the instrument

contains a Block file with the name
“AUTOLOAD.BLK” which is loaded automati- ESCAPE

cally to RAM when you turn on the instru-

ment with the disk inserted in the drive.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE SETUP
1
Use «Load Single Setup» to load a Setup file
into RAM. To create some Set-up files, see “Save
Single Setup” afterwards.
ENTER TEM

Load a disk-based Setup file when you want to

change the general status of the instrument in a
single step instead of programming the individual
parameters that constitute a Setup file. ESCAPE

Setup files contain all information relating to the

status of the instrument’s general functions (Tun-
ing/Scale, Audio Mic/Line settings, the MIDI Lock
status, the locked MIDI channel configuration,
the status of the Pedals/Pads Lock option and
the Pedals and Pads configuration). Loading a 2
Setup file into RAM does not affect other data.
Only one Setup file resides in each Block. ENTER TEM

1. Select SINGLE SETUP from the main Load page

then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR. ESCAPE

2. Select the Block containing the Setup required

then press ENTER to gain access.
3. Press ENTER twice to load the Setup to RAM.
3
ENTER TEM

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE SONG
Use «Load Single Song» to load Songs to RAM
1
one at a time. The advantage of this operation
lies in the fact that you can choose single Song ENTER TEM

files from various different blocks and load to RAM

in a preferred order.
The «Demo» disk supplied with the instrument
contains various Songs. ESCAPE

1. Select SINGLE SONG from the main Load page

then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR.
2
2. Select the Block from the source directory con- ENTER TEM

taining the Song required then press ENTER to

gain access.
3. Select the Song from the source directory and its ESCAPE

destination in RAM then press ENTER twice to

execute the command.
4. Repeat step 3 to load additional songs to 3
memory.
To load a Song from a different Block, return
to source column, press Escape twice to es-
ENTER TEM

cape the File Selector and Block and repeat

steps 2 and 3.

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE MIDI FILE
Use «Single MIDI File» to load disk-based MIDI
files to RAM one at a time Loading MIDI Files 1
into RAM automatically converts the files into
WK4 format Songs.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ENTER TEM

Hint: Once loaded into RAM , save MIDI files

as standard WK4 Songs – the loading speeds of
WK4 Songs are faster.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

The load procedure is almost identical to «Load

Single Song». In this case instead of Song
names, you’ll see a list of files in the source di-
rectory with the .MID extension. In some cases,
other names appear which represent sub-direc-
tories containing other MIDI Files.
2
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Load page
then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR.
2. Select the MIDI file to load from the source di-
rectory and its destination in RAM then press ENTER TEM

ENTER twice to start the conversion process.

If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory;
shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain ac- ESCAPE

cess to other MIDI Files.

3. Repeat step 2 to load other MIDI Files one at a

time until you load RAM with the Songs required.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•12 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE SOUND
RAM-Sounds based on samples contained in
ROM can be loaded to RAM to expand the WK4’s
sonic power.
Owing to the fact that each Sound Group con-
sists of 16 Banks, the number of RAM-Sounds
that can be loaded into the instrument’s memory
is almost unlimited.
Use «Load Single Sound» to load single sounds
to the Sound Bank destinations. Use this method
to load disk-based Ram-Sounds as well as
RAM -Sounds (the latter requires additional
RAM to be installed).
The «Load Single Sound» procedure is charac-
terized by an increased number of steps, owing
to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each
consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots.
1
You can choose to load your Ram-Sounds any-
where you want, but it is recommended that you
load to the Sound Group that originally housed
the sound when it was saved to facilitate future ENTER TEM

selection.
«Load Single Sound» also features a Sound
Search function. Owing to the large WK4 Sound ESCAPE

library, you might find it easier to pass directly to

a Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound
that occupies a particular bank. From there, you
can then easily select a destination for the Sound
being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail in the Edit Disk chapter of the
Reference Guide.
2
ENTER TEM

1. Select SINGLE SOUND from the main Load page

then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR.
ESCAPE

2. Select the Block containing the Sound required

from the source directory then press ENTER to
gain access.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Select the RAM-Sound that you wish to load and
its corresponding destination in RAM. 3
The display opened will depend on the type
of disk inserted in the drive. The display ex-
ample shows 4 RAM-Sounds and a Percus-
sive sound in the source directory.
Use the buttons to scroll through the
Sound Groups (1, 2, … 15, 16).
Use the directional / arrows to scroll the
individual Sounds of each Bank (1-1, 1-2, 1-
3 … 1-15, 1-16, 2-1, 2-2, … 15-16, 16-1, 16-
2, … 16-15, 16-16).
In the example, the selected RAM-Sound “19-
7 SxOrgan” belongs to the ORGAN Group,
as indicated by the information box at the
bottom of the left column (a). The Organ A
Group contains eight Banks numbered from
17-24.
The number 19-7 also indicates that the RAM-
Sound originally occupied Bank 19, slot 7 at
the time it was saved to disk.
The display example A shows Group 17 se-
lected. Display example B shows the origi- B
nal destination (now empty) of the RAM-
Sound at the time of saving it to disk (19-7).
It is recommended that you load your RAM-
Sounds to their original positions but, you are
free to load them wherever you please.
Bear in mind, however, that the RAM-Sound
will take the number of the destination, there- 4
fore, if you load 19-7 SwOrgan to, say, desti- ENTER TEM

nation 25-16, the Sound will be detected via

MIDI with the new number, not the old.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: You can also use the Sound Search

function to pass to a particular Sound. Refer to the ESCAPE

Edit Disk chapter in the Reference Guide.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4. Press ENTER twice to load the Sound file to

memory.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to load other Sounds
to RAM.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•14 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD SINGLE PERFORMANCE, SINGLE
STYLE PERFORMANCE, SINGLE USER
STYLE
The «Load Single» procedure is also used to load
a single Performance, a single ROM Style Per-
formance or a single User Style to the respective
locations in RAM.
Single Performances can be loaded to any of the
64 Performance Groups locations in RAM,
overwriting the original factory-set Performances
if you wish. You can also always restore the origi-
nal settings and names using the Restore Per-
formance operation.
Single User Styles can also be loaded to any
USER 1, 2, 3 or 4 location.
ATTENTION! Single ROM Style Performances
must be loaded to their original destinations in
RAM - you will not be permitted to “switch” the
ROM Style Performances. For example, ROM
Style Performance 59 cannot be loaded to any
other location in RAM other than slot 59 of the
ROM Style Groups (59 corresponds to the U.S.
TRAD Style Group, Style Gospel).
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and

try again, this time selecting the correct destina-
tion.
The example described on the next page shows
how to load a single Style Performance.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Select SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Load page then press ENTER to gain access 1
to the FILE SELECTOR.
2. Select the Block containing the Style Perform-
ENTER TEM

ance required from the source directory then

press ENTER to gain access.
3. Select the Style Performance that you wish to
ESCAPE

load and its corresponding destination in RAM.

In this case, Style Performance 59 (corre-
sponding to STYLEBANK58) must be loaded
to destination 59 of the ROM Style directory.
Use the directional arrow to scroll to the 2
destination required. ENTER TEM

4. Press ENTER twice to load to the destination.

If you try to load to a different destination, a
ESCAPE

user message will inform you of your proce-

dural error:

3/4

Press ESCAPE to close the window and re-

peat the operation, this time selecting the ENTER TEM

correct destination.

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•16 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD GROUP PERF, STYLE PERF, USER
STYLE, SONG
Use «Load Group» to load a Group of User Styles
(and associated User Style-Performances), Per-
formances (Realtime), Style Performances (as-
sociated to the Rom Styles) and Songs. A Group
consists of 8 elements which can be loaded in a
single step. The Song “Groups” are virtual ele-
ments (found in the Disk environment only), cor-
responding to the first 8 or second 8 locations of
the Song memory. In fact, when you press the
Song button to select a Song, the song selection
display shows two columns, left and right. The
left column corresponds to Songs-Group 1 and
the right to Songs-Group 2. This feature is par-
ticularly useful for the WX Series Songs disks
which contain Song Groups containing up to 8
Songs each.
ATTENTION! A Group of ROM Style Perform-
ances must be loaded to the original destination
in RAM - you will not be permitted to “switch” the
ROM Style Groups. For example, Group 8 (US.
TRAD) cannot be loaded to any other location in
RAM other than Group 8.
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try

again, this time selecting the correct destination.
The example on the following page shows how
to load a Group of User Styles. Use the same
steps for «Load Group Performance (Real)»,
«Load Group Style Performance» or «Load
Group Song».

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load
page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE
SELECTOR.
2. Select the desired Block from the source direc- 1
tory then press ENTER to gain access. ENTER TEM

3. Select the Group from the source directory and

its destination in RAM, then press ENTER twice to
execute the command. ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Warning: The Group currently in memory is

overwritten by the incoming Group. If the User Style
Group you are loading contains only one User Style,
all User Styles of the destination Group currently in
RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new
Group. Be sure that your Group data are safely
2
saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding. ENTER TEM

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

ENTER TEM

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•18 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LOAD ALL
Use «Load All» to load an entire set of file types
contained in a Block in a single step. This proce-
dure allows you to load:
• up to 16 Songs (All Song);
• an unspecified number of Ram-Sounds and
RAM -Sounds (All Sound);
• 8 Groups of Performances (All Performance
Group);
• 12 Groups of Rom Style Performances (All
Style Performance);
• 4 Groups of User Styles (All User Style). 1
The example refers to the Load All Song proce-
dure. Use the same steps for other Load All op-
erations.
ENTER TEM

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then

press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELEC-
TOR.
ESCAPE

2. Select the Block containing the Songs required

from the source directory then press ENTER twice
to start the loading procedure.

2
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Warning: Use “Load ALL” with care. If, for

example, the disk-based «All User Style» data ENTER TEM

contains only one User Style, all your User Styles

currently in RAM will be irremediably lost. Be
absolutely sure, therefore, that your Sounds,
Songs, Styles and Performances are safely stored
to Disk or Hard Disk before using the “Load ALL”
procedures. ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Loading WX2/SX2 Songs and Styles
WK4 can load Songs and Styles from the follow-
ing previous format disks:
WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3
The loading procedures are identical to those
used for WK4 Songs and Styles. The Blocks
however show the «.WXS» extension instead of
«.BLK». Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain
one Block only.
WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consist-
ing of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the
WK4 Disk environment contains two virtual Songs
Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks.
Refer to the Load Group procedure explained on
pages 17 and 18.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•20 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Save operations

The Save procedures operate in the direction

RAM –> Destination where the destination can
be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
The WK4 RAM is backed by a rechargeable bat-
tery to safeguard the data when the instrument
is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is
necessary to store your data to floppy disk or Hard
disk with the Save command. The RAM should
be considered as a work area which can be con-
tinually updated, not as a data storage device.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to.
These can be WK4 format disks or standard MS-
DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI files.
You can also save MIDI Files to WK4 format
disks.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected - 1
if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you
forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you
with an appropriate message when you attempt
to save to the disk.
Save operations are characterized by an addi-
tional option: the creation of a new Block if nec-
essary.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - Do not save data to the original

disks supplied with the instrument. As a precau-
tionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected. DISK
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

2 H. D
+
THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
F1

F2

If the main Save page is not shown, use the F4

F3

page scroll buttons ( ) to open it. F5

F6

If you are working with the Hard Disk, press F7

DISK and select the HARD DISK option with F8

soft button F2.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
Save All Song) then press ENTER to open the File 3
Selector.
4. Select an existing Block to save to or empty des- ENTER TEMP

tination to create a new Block.

Save to an existing Block to backup your data
after a work session when the destination ESCAPE

Block and RAM block are of the same origin.

Select an empty destination (shown as a bro-
ken line with .BLK extension) to create new
block a name.

5. Press ENTER. 4
If you selected an existing Block, the opera-
tion will proceed depending on specified com-
mand.
If you save to an empty location, you’ll be
prompted to create a new Block. Use the
keyboard and the numeric keypad as the
sources of alphanumeric data to give the
block a name (see Data Entry procedures in
the Basic Concepts chapter). The extension 5/6/7
“.BLK” is created automatically. Confirm the ENTER TEMP

new name with ENTER.

6. Press ENTER to confirm the Save operation.

ESCAPE

The existing Block will be updated or the new

Block will be created and the file(s) will be
saved to the Block. ENTER TEMP

Remember that if you save to an existing file,

it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty ESCAPE

location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard ENTER TEMPO / DATA

DISK
existing data on the storage device.
H. D
+
7. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE or
three times) to exit «Disk». ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•22 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE BLOCK
Use «Save Single Block» to save the entire con-
1
tents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step.
Block data contains: Sounds, Performances, User
Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs
(and relative Performances), all housed in their ENTER TEMP

respective Groups and a Setup file.

1. Select SINGLE BLOCK from the main Save page

and press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE- ESCAPE

LECTOR.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard disk).
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk. 2 F1

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk. F2

3. Select an empty destination or an existing

F1
BLOCK.
F2

An existing BLOCK will be entirely rewritten

by the new one. Use this method to backup
your data after a work session when the des-
tination Block and RAM block are of the same
origin.
Saving to an empty destination (shown as a 3/4
broken line with .BLK extension) prompts you ENTER TEMP

to give the block a name (refer to the Gen-

eral Save procedure for specific details about
how to create a new block).

4. Press ENTER.
ESCAPE

If you select an existing Block or created a

new Block, you will be prompted to confirm
the operation (Are you sure?).

5. Press ENTER to confirm the operation.

5 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

The existing Block will be updated or a new

Block will be created.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If you assign a new block the name

“AUTOLOAD”, you can load the Block into RAM ESCAPE

automatically on a future occasion by turning the

instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the
drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name
“AUTOLOAD” can exist in a disk.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE SETUP
1
Use «Save Single Setup» to save a Setup file to
a Block on floppy disk or Hard Disk.
The Setup corresponds to the configuration of
the instrument’s global parameters (Edit General ENTER TEMP

status) that determine how the machine operates,

regardless of the contents of RAM (Song, Styles,
Performances). Saving a Setup file to a Block
overwrites the existing file without affecting other ESCAPE

data. Only one Setup file can be saved in each

Block.
Create Setup files for particular occasions. For
example, one for home sessions, one for live 2 F1
shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.
F2

1. Select SINGLE SETUP from the main Save page

F1
and press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
F2
LECTOR.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
3
3. Select the destination Block to save the Setup to.
If necessary, select an empty location to cre-
ate a new Block (refer to the General Save
procedure for specific details about how to
create a new block).

4. Press ENTER twice to save the Setup.

4 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•24 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE SONG
Use «Save Single Song» to save Songs to disk
1
one at a time. If you have already loaded some
MIDI Files to RAM, use this procedure to convert
the files to WK4 format songs. ENTER TEMP

1. Select SINGLE SONG from the main Save page

and press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-
LECTOR. ESCAPE

2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard

disk).
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
2 F1

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk. F2

3. Select a destination Block then press ENTER to F1

gain access. F2

If necessary, select an empty location to cre-

ate a new Block (refer to the General Save
procedure for specific details about how to
create a new block).
3
4. Select the Song from the RAM directory and its ENTER TEMP

destination in disk then press ENTER twice to

execute the command.
If you save to an existing Song, it will be
overwritten by the incoming song. ESCAPE

If possible, save to an empty location (shown

as a broken line).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4

Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided
into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are
shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In
this case, either overwrite an existing Song that
you don’t mind losing, or close the Block with
ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press ENTER TEMP

ENTER to create a new Block.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE MIDI FILE
Use «Single MIDI File» to save a PS Song to
disk as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song
with other instruments or computers. WK4 saves
Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set
the “SMF Save Format” parameter in the «Gen-
eral Set» function of «Edit MIDI».
If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set
the “General MIDI” parameter to ON in the «Gen-
eral set» function of «Edit MIDI».
Performances are converted into track data (Bank
Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume,
Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects).
If a Score is present, the text is converted into
Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text
events.
The save procedure is almost identical to «Load
Single Song». In this case you’ll see a list of files
in the destination directory with the .MID exten-
sion. In some cases, other names appear which
represent sub-directories containing other MIDI
Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken
line with the .MID extension. The .MID exten-
sion is attached to the original PS Song name
automatically.
Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk
ready. Use the «Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb)»
and «Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB)» functions
in the «Utility» Disk page to format your new disks.
○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: 3.5” HD disks can be formatted in either

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1
WK4 or MS-DOS format, but 3.5” DD disks can
only be formatted in MS-DOS/Atari format.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page

ENTER TEMP

then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-

LECTOR.
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•26 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk). 2 F1

F2
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk. F1

F2
3. Select the WK4 Song to save as a MIDI file from
the RAM directory and select a “.MID” destina-
tion in disk.
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory
shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain ac-
cess to other MIDI File locations.
3
You can create a new Block in the destina-
tion device as already discussed in the Gen-
eral Save procedure.

4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion proc-

ess.

4 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE SOUND
1
Use «Save Single Sound» to save single Ram-
Sounds as well as RAM -Sounds to disk or hard
disk to build a library of Sounds for future use.
The «Save Single Sound» procedure is charac-
terized by an increased number of steps, owing ENTER TEMP

to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each

consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots.
You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds any-
where you want, but it is recommended that you ESCAPE

save to the same location as the original RAM

position to facilitate future selection.

1. Select SINGLE SOUND from the main Save page

2 F1

and press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE- F2

LECTOR. F1

2. Select the destination device. F2

Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.

3. Select the destination Block and press ENTER to

gain access. 3
ENTER TE

If necessary, select an empty location to cre-

ate a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.

4. Select the Sound from the RAM directory and its ESCAPE

destination in disk.
To select the destination, use the but-
tons to scroll through the Sound Groups (1,
2, … 15, 16).
4
Use the directional / arrows to scroll the
individual Sounds of each Bank (1-1, 1-2, 1-
3 … 1-15, 1-16, 2-1, 2-2, … 15-16, 16-1, 16-
2, … 16-15, 16-16).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: You can also use the Sound Search

function to pass directly to a particular Sound and
sound Bank. Refer to the Edit Disk chapter in the
Reference Guide.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•28 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Press ENTER twice to execute the command.
5 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take

the ProgramChange number of the chosen
destination, therefore, if you save 19-7
SwOrgan to, say, destination 25-16, the
Sound will be shown with the new ESCAPE

ProgramChange number on a future load op-

eration, not with the old.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE SINGLE PERFORMANCE, SINGLE
STYLE PERFORMANCE, SINGLE USER
STYLE
The «Save Single» procedure is also used to save
a single Performance (Real), a single ROM Style
Performance or a single User Style to floppy disk
or Hard disk.
Single Performances (Real) can be saved to any
of the 64 available Performance Groups locations
in disk, overwriting those already present if you
wish.
Single User Styles can also be loaded to any
USER 1, 2, 3 or 4 location on disk.
ATTENTION! Single ROM Style Performances
must be loaded to their correct destinations in
the disk directory - you will not be permitted to
“switch” the ROM Style Performances. For ex-
ample, ROM Style Performance 59 cannot be
saved to any other location on disk other than
slot 59 of the ROM Style Groups (59 corresponds
to the 16 Beat Style Group, Style 16 Beat Folk).
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and

try again, this time selecting the correct destina-
tion.
The example described on the next page shows
how to save a single Style Performance.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•30 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Select SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Save page then press ENTER to gain access 1
to the FILE SELECTOR.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk). ENTER TEMP

Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.

3. Select the destination Block and press ENTER to ESCAPE

gain access.
If necessary, select an empty location to cre-
ate a new Block using the method already 2 F1
discussed in the General Save procedure.
F2

4. Select the Style Performance that you wish to

F1
save and its corresponding destination in disk.
F2

In this case, Style Performance 59 (corre-

sponding to STYLEBANK58) must be saved
to destination 59 of the disk Style directory.
Use the directional arrow to scroll to the
destination required. 3
ENTER TEMP

5. Press ENTER twice to save to the destination.

If you try to save to a different destination, a
user message will inform you of your proce-
dural error: ESCAPE

4/5
Press ESCAPE to close the window and re-
peat the operation, this time selecting the
correct destination. ENTER TEMP

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE GROUP PERF, STYLE PERF, USER
STYLE, SONG
Use «Save Group» to save an entire Group of
User Styles (and associated User Style-Perform-
ances), Performances (Real), Style Perform-
ances (associated to the Rom Styles) or Songs.
A Group of 8 elements which can be saved in a
single step.
The Song “Groups” are virtual elements (found
in the Disk environment only), corresponding to
the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song
memory. In fact, when you press the Song but-
ton to select a Song, the song selection display
shows two columns, left and right. The left col-
umn corresponds to Songs-Group 1 and the right
to Songs-Group 2.
ATTENTION! A Group of ROM Style Perform-
ances must be saved to the correct destination
in the disk directory - you will not be permitted to
“switch” the ROM Style Groups. For example,
Group 2 (16 Beat) cannot be loaded to any other
location in disk other than Group 2.
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and

try again, this time selecting the correct destina-
tion.
The example on the next page shows how to save
a Group of Style Performances. Use the same
steps for «Save Group Performance (Real)»,
«Save Group User Style» or «Save Group Song».

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•32 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Save page then press ENTER to gain access 1
to the FILE SELECTOR.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk). ENTER TEMP

Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.

3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to

ESCAPE

gain access.
If necessary, select an empty location to cre-
ate a new Block using the method already 2 F1

discussed in the General Save procedure. F2

4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and F1

its destination then press ENTER twice to execute F2

the command.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Warning: The Group currently in disk is

completely rewritten by the incoming Group. For
example, if the User Style Group you are saving
contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the 3
destination Group will be cancelled and replaced by ENTER TEMP

the new Group. Be sure of the contents of the

Group data being overwritten before proceeding.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

ENTER TEMP

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SAVE ALL
Use «Save All» to save an entire set of file types
contained in RAM in a single step. This proce-
dure allows you to save:
• up to 16 Songs (All Song);
• 16 Groups of Ram-Sounds and RAM -
Sounds (All Sound);
• 8 Groups of Performances (All Real Perform-
ance);
• 12 Groups of Rom Style Performances (All
Style Performances;
• 4 Groups of User Styles (All User Style).
1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Warning: Use “Save ALL” with care as this

procedure overwrites all data at the destination.
Be absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in
disk before using the “Save ALL” procedures. ENTER TEMP
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

The example refers to the Save All Song proce-

dure. Use the same steps for other Save All op-
erations. ESCAPE

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page then

press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELEC-
TOR. 2 F1

2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard F2

disk).
F1

Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk. F2

Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.

3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory.

If necessary, select an empty location to cre-
ate a new Block using the method already 3/4
discussed in the General Save procedure.
ENTER TEMP

4. Press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure.

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•34 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 General disk handling information
If you’re new to working with floppy disks and THE WRITE PROTECT TAB
are not sure as to how you should handle these
delicate accessories, please read this section for Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which
some useful information. allows you to protect valuable data from being
accidentally overwritten.
To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid acci-
INSERTING A DISK INTO THE DISK DRIVE dental erasure, slide the tab fully down to “open”
Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive the window.
label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully
into the drive until it “clicks” into place. up to “close” the window.

Disk not protected Disk protected

Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab
as shown.

Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the

disk straight while inserting it.

EJECTING A FLOPPY DISK

Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk
drive operating led is off and that the WK4 dis-
play is not currently showing a “Loading” or “Sav-
ing” message.
To extract the disk, press the eject button and
remove the disk.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Disk 6•35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 HANDLING FLOPPY DISKS BACKUP COPIES
When handling floppy disks, certain precautions At the end of a work session, always remember
should be taken to avoid damage and/or data to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or
loss. Hard disk to Floppy Disks.
• Do not open the metal protection shutter or Should you accidentally erase some files from
touch the surface of a disk RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and
data loss, you will always be able to recuperate
• If your WK4 has to be transported, make sure
the data from your disks.
that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk
drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive head It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your
to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable. disk data. “Backup” is technical jargon for “a sec-
ond copy”. Backup copies stored in a safe place
• Do not store or place floppy disks in close
are extremely important. Disks can become dam-
proximity of television sets, computer moni-
aged or lost, so please backup your work.
tors, loudspeakers, power transformers, or
other devices that are potential sources of
magnetic fields. Doing so may render the
disk unusable. DISK DRIVE HEAD CLEANING
• Do not store or place floppy disks in loca- After a prolonged period of use, disk save and
tions subject to extremes of temperature and load errors may become frequent due mainly to
humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive
and dirt. head may need cleaning. This can be done us-
ing a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for
• Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk. 3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a
• Return disks to their protective cases after cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
use.
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid.
2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive.
3. Execute a load function. An error message will
appear. This is normal.
4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

6•36 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 7 Songs & MIDI files
WHAT IS A SONG WHAT IS A STANDARD MIDI FILE
A Song is a multitrack recording of several in- A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created
strumental parts, each corresponding to a track. to maintain data compatibility among different
devices complying with the Standard MIDI File
WK4 can load Songs from disk in its own format
format. This format allows Songs to be ex-
(Song), in previous compatible formats (WX, SX),
changed between different instruments and com-
in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in
puters. If a Song is saved as a MIDI file on an
Tune1000™ format.
MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the most
WK4 Songs are ‘free’, that is, tracks can be re- recent generation of instruments and sequencers/
corded starting from any point, without start or computers will be able to load and read that Song.
end segment limitations, which characterize most
sequencers. General MIDI
The “Edit Song” functions allow you to modify the To facilitate compatibility between different makes
recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts of instruments, MIDI files should be in General
of a song, by correcting timing errors, by insert- MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds
ing events in ‘event edit’ environments (Micro- and the way they are selected.
scope and Master Track).
General MIDI stipulates common standards re-
Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and garding the listing of sounds, Program Change
control data. Control data can include PitchBend numbers for sound selection, the percussive
and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assign-
BankSelect messages for sound changes, ment of MIDI channel 10 to the Drumkits, a mini-
ControlChange messages to control the effects mum polyphony (24) and a maximum number of
sends, Sustain pedal and other control param- tracks (16).
eters.
In WK4, Sound Bank 1 and Drumkit Bank 2 are
MIDI events recorded on tracks are not the inter- fully GM compatible. WK4 recognizes GM com-
nal Wave sounds, but messages which activate patible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained
the WK4 internal sound generator or an expander in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If this
controlled by WK4. A Song is a MIDI event list – message is not detected, sounds that differ to a
a list for each track. Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10.
General control messages are recorded in the To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI
Master Track. These messages relate to the in- files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag,
strument in general, such as effects change or set the General MIDI parameter to ON in the
Performance selections. “General Set” parameter of «Edit MIDI» before
loading.
WK4 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when
the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Files loaded into the WK4 memory are converted «seq-play» icon
to WK4 Songs.
The track, engaged by the sequencer,
contains notes but cannot play in real time
GMX format
on the keyboard and cannot receive mes-
GMX refers to the “General MIDI eXtended” for- sages via MIDI IN. To play it on the key-
mat, specifically created by Generalmusic, which board, set it to key-play.
renders the first three sound banks of the WK4
with previous series instruments (WK and PS) «MIDI-receive/transmit» icon
completely compatible. The track can receive (IN) and transmit
To program WK4 Songs that are perfectly com- (OUT) MIDI.
patible with all WK and PS Series instruments
(e.g. WK4 and WK3), use the Sounds of the first «MIDI-receive» icon
three Sound banks and record the Songs using The track receives MIDI messages (IN)
16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1…A16). but does not transmit them (OUT).

«MIDI-transmit» icon
TRACK STATUS ICONS
The track does not receive MIDI message
The track status icons of a Song can appear as (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
follows:

«key-play» icon
The track can be played on the keyboard.
You can select it and assign other sounds
to it. Remember that when you change
Song-Performance, or press PLAY or
STOP, the sounds return to those of the
Performance. You can memorize differ-
ent sounds to the Performance by press-
ing STORE PERFORMANCE button.

«mute» icon (track without notes)

Track is temporarily deactivated and can-
not play.

«mute» icon (track with notes)

The track, even if it contains notes, is tem-
porarily deactivated and cannot play.

«record» icon
The track is in a record pending status.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SONG-PERFORMANCES SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES
Normally, Sound change messages 1. In Song mode, press the SONG P. button.
(ProgramChange and BankSelect) are inserted
in the single track. Effects change messages are The SONG P. button is located to the left of
inserted in the Master Track. the Performance Groups section.
Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and
rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects.
Song-Performances instantly reset the instru-
ST. LOCK 1 2 3
ment, therefore, they are very useful during a real
time Song recording.
Generally, when programming a Song from an
external computer, it is convenient to insert all
the messages in the tracks, while during a real
time Song recording, it is better to program sev- The «Select Song-Performances» windows
eral Song-Performances and select them during is opened:
the recording. The selection message is recorded
in the Master Track as a ProgramChange.
Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which
are loaded and memorized with the correspond-
ing Song.
When a MIDI file is saved, Performances are con-
verted in track data (ProgramChange, Pan, Vol-
ume, effects send).

PROGRAMMING SONG-PERFORMANCES
The method used to program Song-Perform-
ances is identical to that used for the Perform- 2. Select the desired Performance using the corre-
ances of the Performance Groups (Real) and dis- sponding Soft button.
cussed in detail in the Sounds & Performances If you select it during the recording, the event
chapter 4 of the User Guide. is stored in the Master Track as a
A Song has a maximum of 32 tracks. ProgramChange.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: After having programmed or modified a

Song-Performance, press STORE PERFORM-
ANCE to save it to RAM. The selection of another
or the same Performance or pressing STOP and
PLAY, will erase the modifications.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting Songs
WK4 can store up to 16 Songs. Press the SONG
button to select a Song and pass to Song mode.
Pressing the SONG button opens the selection
window with the list of the memorized Songs.
Once a Song has been selected with the Soft
button, the Song is active and can be played.

TO SELECT A SONG
1 Press the SONG button. 1 SONG

The «Select Song» window appears:

2 Select the Song with the Soft buttons.

The Song is selected and you pass automati-
cally to Song mode. The Song name appears
on the status bar.
2
Song Name
A

Performance name G

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Song Playback/Jukebox
SEQUENCER

PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS SCORE

The buttons which control the playback of Songs

in memory are in the SEQUENCER section. SONG STOP PLAY

Song playback
control buttons

PLAY
1 PLAY

1. After selecting the Song, press PLAY to start the

playback.
This button starts the Song playback (or re-
cording).
During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The location (LOC) in the dis-
play shows the current position of the Song.
If the Song is not playing, pressing PLAY
starts the Song from the current position.

<</>>

2. Press << rewind the Song and >> to advance.

2
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance
one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these
buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or ad-
vances at high speed. These buttons are
active either in Song play or stop status.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3. Rotate the DIAL (TEMPO/DATA) to change the
tempo. 3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

During playback, the DIAL changes the

Song’s playing speed (tempo).
ESCAPE

ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

STOP

4. Press STOP to stop the playback.

4 STOP

This button stops the Song playback (or re-

cording).
When the Song has been stopped at a posi-
tion that differs to the initial Song start posi-
tion, the LED on the STOP button flashes.

5. Press STOP again to return to the starting posi- 5

tion of the Song, or rewind with the << button.
STOP
When the Song is not playing and at its initial
starting position, the LED on the STOP but-
ton remains on.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 «Play view» parameters
The main page of Song mode («Play View») con- Song name
tains position pointers and performance control Tempo locator (not
parameters. Song-Performance name programmable)

SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW

You can opt to see the Song in «Play View» mode
in order to modify the playing parameters, or in
«Sound View» mode in order to see the sounds
assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Per-
formance. You can pass from one mode to an-
other by pressing the corresponding Soft button
(F5 or F6).

tracks menu
Sound
«Sound View» page
Tempo
Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the
playing speed (beats per second) at the current
song position. During the playback, the Tempo Song name
Tempo locator (not
can be modified with the DIAL. Song-Performance name programmable)
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value,
are an indication of the status of the synchronizing
MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK4) or [e] = external
(external sequencer connected to the WK4 MIDI
IN). The synchronization is programmed in «Edit
MIDI», «General settings» page.

i = Internal
tracks menu
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
locator Play/loop modes

Note: The starting tempo can be changed by (programmable)
modifying the Master Track in «Edit Song», or by
using the DIAL in «Play View». The selected value
remains in memory. «Play View» page
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locator (Song position pointer) • Forced stop
This section shows the current Song position The Song starts at the point indicated by the
expressed in measures and beats. When the locator and stops at the specified End.
Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified
• Loop
in the «Play View» page in order to select a start-
ing point for the playback. It can be also modi- The Song starts at the point indicated by the
fied with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of locator, stops at the End, then repeats from
the status of the sequencer (playing or off). the Starting point. The loop repeats continu-
ously until stopped with the Stop button.
measure beat

Start
Locator (programmable) Determines the start measure and can be modi-
fied only if the Play mode is set to «Loop». If
Repeats the same information of the locator
Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the
shown in the status bar, but also contains the
starting point of the loop. Modify this parameter
sequencer resolution (or ‘tick’).
when it is in a selected state, or when the Song
When the sequencer is off, the three parts can has already been recorded, by rotating the DIAL.
be individually modified (if selected) by rotating
the DIAL.
measure beat resolution (tick)

End
Determines the end measure and can be modi-
fied only if the Play mode is set to «Forced stop»
or «Loop». If Loop is selected, this parameter
indicates the point at which the sequence ends
Play/Rec mode before looping back to the Start locator. If Forced
stop is selected, it indicates the automatic Stop
There are three Play or Record options to choose
point.
from:
This parameter can be modified when it is in a
• Linear
selected state by rotating the DIAL.
The Song starts at the point indicated by the
locator and stops at the natural Song end.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Time Signature (programmable with an empty
Song) Play view Soft buttons
This parameter can only be modified before re-
cording the Song. JUKEBOX... (F1)
Recalls the Jukebox function (explained after-
wards).

OPTION... (F2)
Metronome options.
Start Tempo (programmable when the Song is off)
Countdown - activates a one measure lead
Determines the starting tempo of a Song. This into the recording of a sequence during which
parameter can be modified when the Song is off. events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off.
The value of the setting is recorded in the Master
Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume.
Track, as the Start Parameter.
Options: Off, 10...127.

SOUND VIEW (F5)

Recalls the «Sound View» page, where you can
Song memory (not programmable) see and change the sounds of the current Per-
formance.
Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilo-
bytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory,
PLAY VIEW (F6)
independent of the memory remaining in the Sys-
tem RAM. Recalls the «Record View» page, where you can
control the record/playback parameters.

ERASE... (F7)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The System-RAM corresponds to the part Track or Song erase parameter.
of RAM (not cancelled at power down) which Track- Cancels the selected track.
contains all data, except new samples. Samples
are contained in the Sample-RAM (optional). Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

an empty Song, ready to start another record-

ing.. The Song-Performances are not can-
celled.

METRONOME (F8)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your
choice and plays them back as a ‘medley’ with a
single command.
1
F1

1. With the Song «Play View» page showing, press F2

F1 («Jukebox...») to access the Jukebox display.

The left part of the display shows the list of
Songs in memory. The right part shows the
Jukebox list.
The negative highlight cursor shows which
song is selected in the Song list. The frame
on the right shows the destination in the Juke-
box list.
Pass from left to right and vice versa with the
directional arrows.
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the
Jukebox list. Press INSERT (F5) (or ENTER) to
2/3
insert the Song in the list. F1

The right part of the display shows the name F2

of the Song added to the list and the frame F4

F3

advances one step automatically. F5

F6

3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press F7

INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list. F8

If you want to substitute one of the names in the

Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of
the display, select the name to change; move
the cursor back to the left part, select the Song
to insert and press INSERT or ENTER.
4
Take the cursor to the right and select a new F1

location for the next Song. Return to the left F2

F3
part and carry out the selection. F4

4. Press F8 («Execute») to start the playback of the F6

F5

Jukebox list. F7

F8
The Play View page of the Song appears and
the status bar shows the indication: «Juke-
box active».
You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with
STOP.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Jukebox Soft buttons To display score, chords and
lyrics (SCORE button)
DELETE (F4)
While the Sequencer is playing a Song, the dis-
Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list. play or an external monitor or television can show
the melody, chords and/or lyrics (the optional
Generalmusic A/V card is need for external dis-
INSERT (F5) play).
Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the It is possible to see the score of the main melody,
display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving or any other part of the score. For example, the
the names which follow afterwards one step for- bass part of the song can be muted and be played
ward. This command can be used instead of by a bass player, who can read the notes on a
ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling an- television transformed into a large screen music
other at the same location. score.
The lyrics can be displayed together with the
RESET LIST (F6) score, or alone in large type and in different colors
while the Song is playing. In public venues, the
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list. lyrics can be projected on an external monitor or
television for the audience to sing (in karaoke
style).
ALL SONG (F7)
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to
the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled
and substituted with the new.

EXECUTE (F8)
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once
pressed, this button appears in the Play View
page of the Song.
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TO DISPLAY THE SCORE
○ ○

IMPORTANT
○ ○ ○ ○

Before displaying the score,

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 SONG

chords and lyrics, you must first generate the

Score part (in «Edit Song.», «Edit Score» function).
The supplied demos and Songs found in
commercial outlets may already include a Score.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 Select the Song. D

Press the SONG button, then select a Song F

with the Soft buttons. G

2 Press the SCORE button.

The Score View display appears. If the
melody has already been created the notes
2 SCORE

will be shown, otherwise only an empty clef

appears.

3 Press PLAY to listen the Song.

During the performance, an indicator box
monitors the notes as they are played. If you
are viewing lyrics only, you will see a change
of color of the words in synchronization with
the playback.

4 Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main 3 PLAY

Song Playback page.

STOP

4 ENTER TEMPO
SCORE

OR
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•12 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TO DISPLAY LYRICS IN LARGE TYPE
1
1 In Song mode, press SCORE to display the Score. SCORE

2 Press F8 («Score controls...») to open the «Score

controls» dialog window.
3 Select the «Lyrics 1,2,3 or 4» option with the
cursor buttons.
The options correspond to:
All - notes, chords and lyrics.
Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4 - lyrics of various dimen-
2/3 F4

sions F5

F6

Chords - chord symbols. F7

F8

4 Press ENTER to close the dialog window and

return to the Score View page.

4
ENTER TEMPO

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL
MONITOR 1/2 AV
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

IMPORTANT: A monitor can be connected only

if the Generalmusic audio/video board is installed.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 Connect one of the video outputs to a domestic

TV or to a monitor.
The dedicated cable to connect an RCA con- RGB S-VHS
VIDEO

nector is supplied with the optional AV board.

2 Tune the TV to the AV channel. 3

To select the AV channel, consult the own-
SCORE
er’s manual of the television set. Computer
monitors or televisions normally operate in
AV mode.

3 In Song mode, press SCORE to display the Score.

4 Press F8 («Score controls...») to open the «Score

controls» dialog window and move the cursor to
the «Echo LCD» parameter. 4 F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•14 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5 Set the «Echo LCD» parameter to OFF.
«Echo LCD = OFF»: only the Score or the
5/8
Lyrics is displayed on the external monitor.
TEMPO / DATA

«Echo LCD = ON»: the monitor displays ex-

actly what is shown on the display, including
all the controls.

6 Move the cursor to «View mode» and select a

combination of colors for the lyrics and the
screen.
If the Song includes a background image, the
16 option will display the image as a back-
ground for the lyrics on the external monitor.

7. Move the cursor to «Video mode» and select the

RGB or CV (Composite Video) mode. 9
To view on RGB monitors, set this parameter ENTER TEMPO

to RGB. U.S.A. models normally operate in

CV and transmit in Composite.

8. Move the cursor to «Y shift» and regulate the ESCAPE

vertical alignment of the image.

9. Press ENTER to close the dialog window and re-

turn to the Score View page.
The «Score controls» settings are memorized
in System RAM. They are not saved in the
Setup.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TO CREATE A SCORE PART (EDIT SCORE)
The Score (staff with musical notation, chord sym-
1/2 ST. / SONG

bols and lyrics) must be created for new Songs. 7

Record the melody track of a Song to generate

the Score using the following instructions.
Edit Score also contains a Lyrics Editor which F1

allows you to insert your own Lyrics and Chord F2

symbols into the Score. Inserting Lyrics and F3

F4

Chord symbols is discussed in detail in the Edit F5

Score chapter of the Reference Guide. F6

F7

1. In Song mode press the ST./SONG button in the F8

EDIT section to enter «Edit Song».

Select an existing Song, not an ‘empty’ one.

2. Press F6 («Edit Score...»). 3

3. Press F4 («Get Score...») to create the part from F1

a track. F2

F3

A dialog window appears which prompts you F4

F5

to select the track from which the Score will F6

be created. F7

F8

4. Rotate the DIAL to specify the different track

number and press ENTER to confirm.
If the track contains chords, the melody ana-
4 TEMPO / DATA

lyser extracts the highest notes, those re-

tained to belong to the melody. It is easier to ENTER TEMPO / DATA

obtain a good Score part from an exclusive

melody track.

5. Press ESCAPE to exit «Edit Score». (Press ESCAPE ESCAPE

again if you want to exit «Edit Song»).

5 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•16 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Rapid Song recording (QuickRec)

WK4 allows you to record a Song in a conven-

tional way - track by track including the Drum part
using the ‘manual insertion’ method – or in a sim-
ple way, using the existing automatic accompa-
niments.
The simple method is called «Quick Record»
(«QuickRec») and permits you to record the
Sounds assigned to the keyboard sections with
automatic accompaniments. Once a song has
been recorded, the result obtained is a normal
Song which can be saved as a MIDI file and ed-
ited with the «Edit Song» functions.
The Song recorded with the QuickRec method is
identical to a Song created with the «Record»
option.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The following procedure explains one of

the several possible examples without referring to
the different ways of starting the accompaniment or
passing from one Variation to another, all actions,
however, possible.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FIRST PHASE: ENTER THE ‘RECORD
PENDING’ STATUS
1 STYLE GROUP

8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

1. In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style and the JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

Performance with which you want start the re-

cording. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 Press SONG and select an empty location (i.e. a

new Song).
A dialog window appears asking you to
choose between the conventional («Record»)
and the «QuickRec» methods.
2 SONG

3. Press the F2 Function button to select the

«QuickRec» method.
The LED of the RECORD button turns on and
access to the «Quick Record» mode is
3
F1

achieved. The page is shown in negative F2

highlight. The instrument is now in “record F4

F3

pending” status. F5

The page is very similar to the main Style/

Performance page (with the Locator in the
top right hand corner monitoring the meas-
ures of the Song rather than the Style).
For the recording, you can select any Style
and use any accompaniment command (intro,
fill, etc., exactly as if you were in Style/Per-
formance mode.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•18 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SECOND PHASE: PREPARATION
1 STYLE GROUP

1. If necessary, select a different Style. Set the panel 8. BEAT 16. BEAT ROCK FUNK DANCE. 1 DANCE. 2 USER. 1 USER. 2

controls as preferred (ARRANGE ON/OFF, AR- JAZZ US. TRAD TRAD. 1 TRAD. 2 LATIN. 1 LATIN. 2 USER. 3 USER. 4

RANGE MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, SINGLE

TOUCH PLAY, STYLE LOCK buttons).
2. Adjust the Tempo.
2 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

3. Select the desired Sounds and save the Perform-

ance with STORE PERFORMANCE.
The sounds, effects, track settings, mute/play
status, tempo regulations are memorized to
ESCAPE
the Performance.

3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Do not disconnect the tracks from

internal sound generation («Configuration» page of SOUND GROUP

«Edit MIDI»). The QuickRec method allows you to PIANO CHROM. ORGAN GUITAR BASS STRINGS ENSEMB BRASS

record only the tracks connected to the WK4

sounds. REED PIPE SYN. LD SYN. PAD SYN. FIX ETHNIC PERC. SFX

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To use one or more tracks to play only the

sounds of an expander connected to MIDI OUT,
after recording you can disconnect the same tracks ENTER TEMPO / DATA
STORE
from the internal sound generator in «Configura- PERF.
tion».
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THIRD PHASE: RECORDING AND ESCAP-
ING FROM ‘RECORD PENDING‘ STATUS 1/2
INTRO KEY START ENDING

FILL

1. Preselect an INTRO, ENDING or FILL as required.

2. Activate KEY START, if desired.
3. Press START/STOP or PLAY. START / STOP

Pressing START/STOP activates PLAY au-

tomatically. The recording starts immediately
and the locator starts to monitor the meas-
ures (bars) of the Song being recorded. 3 INTRO KEY START ENDING
PLAY

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: If you want the Song to start with all the

accompaniment parts (not only the Drum track),
play a chord and press START/STOP at the same
time, or use KEY START.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ START / STOP
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To start the Song without arrangements,

start the record by pressing PLAY and press
START/STOP when you want to introduce the
arrangements.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

4. Start to play
4
You can stop the Style, select another one
and restart, as if you were playing live.

5. Press START/STOP (or ENDING) to stop the ar-

rangements.
The Song is still in record mode, allowing you
to continue recording the keyboard sounds. 5 INTRO KEY START ENDING

The locator in the top right continues to moni-

tor the measures (bars).

START / STOP

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•20 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6. Press STOP to stop the recording and escape from
QuickRecord mode. 6 STOP

The LED of the RECORD button goes off. At

this point you can:
• add other parts to the Song with the
Record method (conventional recording
method).
• modify the Song in «Edit Song».
• save the Song to disk as an WK4
Song.
• convert the song in MIDI file format (if
you wish to transfer it to another
compatible MIDI instrument or compu-
ter sound card)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Avoid saving the Song as a MIDI file

format only. The WK4 format conserves a great
deal more information (for example, the name of
the composer and editor) and has faster file
handling and loading times.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Songs 7•21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy
way of clearing memory to make room for other
Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Natu-
rally, you must remember to save your Songs to 1 GENERAL

disk before proceeding with the restore proce- 9

dure.

1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access

to the «Edit General» environment.
2. Press F7 («Restore Songs») to cancel all the Songs
(and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
You are prompted with a request to recon-
firm your choice.

3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
2
memory.
F1

With ESCAPE, the song data are retained. F2

F3

F4

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F5

Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a F6

single operation, use the «Restore All» command. F7

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
F8

3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

7•22 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 8 MIDI
WHAT IS MIDI? CONNECTION RULES
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a • An instrument which controls another instru-
system of communication between electronic ment is called the master, while an instru-
musical instruments and computers. ment that is controlled by a controlling de-
vice is called the slave.
With MIDI it is possible to:
• control another musical instrument with WK4; • The MIDI OUT of the master instrument is
connected to the MIDI IN of the slave instru-
• control WK4 with a master keyboard or other
ment.
controlling device (guitar controller, wind con-
troller, drum pads...); • To program Songs on an external sequen-
• connect WK4 to an external sequencer to pro- cer, the MIDI OUT of WK4 is connected to
gram Songs and Styles. the MIDI IN of the sequencer; the MIDI OUT
of the sequencer is connected to the MIDI IN
of WK4.
WHAT TRAVELS VIA MIDI? • Do not connect the same MIDI port between
The MIDI ports do not emit sounds, but transmit two instruments.
instructions on how the instrument being control-
led (slave) must emit the sounds.
THE MIDI THRU PORT
For example, when a note is played on the WK4
keyboard, the MIDI OUT port transmits a Note The MIDI THRU port permits the connection of
On message which plays the sounds of the in- several slave instruments in series (as shown in
strument whose MIDI IN is connected to the WK4 Figure 1 on the next page).
MIDI OUT. In the example, Slave 1 and Slave 2 are control-
There are several different types of MIDI mes- led by the single Master. Slave 2 does not re-
sages: ceive Slave 1 data, which only acts as a through
device.
• Note On, Note Off, Velocity - messages gen-
erated by the notes played.
• Program Change (abbreviated: PC) - mes- THE COMPUTER PORT
sages which select Sounds, Styles, Perform-
ances and Songs (normally coupled with a The COMPUTER port can simultaneously act as
BankSelect message). a MIDI IN and MIDI OUT port and allows the con-
• Control Change (abbreviated: CC) - mes- nection of the instrument to a computer by means
sages which activate MIDI Controllers. of a single serial cable.

The list of MIDI messages is in the Appen- When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI
dix. ports can be used to connect to other musical
instruments.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI 8•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2
MIDI cable MIDI cable
OUT IN THRU IN
internal course

Fig. 1 - Connection diagram of a master keyboard and two expanders or other instruments (slave 1 and slave 2). The data
generated by the master is received at MIDI IN of slave 1 and sent to the sound engine of slave 1 and to MIDI IN of slave 2.

If you have a computer capable of directing MIDI TRACKS AND MIDI CHANNELS
data to the serial port (specified as RS232 in IBM
PCs and compatibles, MODEM in Macintosh) you WK4 can transmit and receive via two groups of
can substitute the two MIDI cables with the sin- MIDI channels.
gle serial cable. Group A corresponds to the MIDI A ports while
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows the group B to the MIDI B ports. Each group han-
control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while MIDI dles 16 MIDI channels.
connections can control 32 (groups A and B). One MIDI channel is freely assignable to each
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
track of WK4, from the 32 channels available

Note: The COMPUTER port and (A1...A16, B1...B16).
PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the
same time. Connecting one excludes the other In Song mode, the factory set MIDI configuration
automatically. is as follows:
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Song track MIDI channel

1...16 A1...A16
17...32 B1...B16

WK4 CH. 1 COMPUTER Fig. 2 -

Connection of
COMP. CH. A1...A16 WK4 and
RS-232/
MODEM computer via
the
COMPUTER
MIDI port.
OUT A Connectoin of
EXPANDER an expander
at MIDI OUT A
RS-232/ of WK4.
MODEM

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

8•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 In Style/RealTime mode, the MIDI configuration channels as the WK4. Alternatively, program
of the Performances in ROM is as follows: the WK4 accordingly to react with the mas-
ter.

Style tracks MIDI channels

1/Lower2 A1 THE COMMON CHANNEL
2/Lower1 A2 The Common Channel is used to:
3 A3
• simulate the WK4 keyboard with a master
4 A4 keyboard. The master keyboard must trans-
5 A5 mit on the same channel as the WK4 Com-
6 A6 mon Channel.
7/Upper2 A7 • dedicate a special track in a sequencer or
8/Upper1 A8 other instrument for the selection and con-
trol of Styles, Performance, Songs and Ef-
DR A10
fects. In the external sequencer, a track is
BS A9 reserved for the transmission of control data
A1 A11 which travels on the same MIDI channel as
A2 A12 the WK4 Common Channel.
A3 A13 The track assigned to the Common Channel can-
A4 A14 not be used for the normal tracks.
A5 A15
A6 A16 NUMERATION
The numeration of MIDI data usually adopts the
When you connect external MIDI devices, the system 0-127. Some instruments adopt the sys-
corresponding tracks must be tuned to the same tem 1-128. When devices are used that adopt a
MIDI channels as the WK4 tracks. Some exam- different numeric system, it is necessary to apply
ples follow, with WK4 programmed as shown in the conversion between one system and the
the previous table: other.
• If a single WK4 track (Upper 1 - track 8) con- In WK4 the Control Changes and relative values
trols an expander, the expander must be pro- follow the system 0-127. For example, the Bank
grammed to receive on MIDI channel 8. Select values range from 0 to 127.
• If WK4 controls a multi-timbral expander, the The Program Change values, instead, follow the
instrumental parts of the expander must be numeration 1-128.
tuned to the same MIDI channels as the WK4.
Assign MIDI channel 10 to the drum track,
channel 9 to the Bass, etc...
• If WK4 is controlled by an external control-
ling device, you must program the parts
(tracks) of the controlling device to the same

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI 8•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Playing WK4 with a master keyboard

ACTIVATE THE COMMON CHANNEL SELECTING SOUNDS AND PERFORM-

The master keyboard must transmit on the same ANCES
MIDI channel as the Common channel assigned If you are not able to select single WK4 sounds
to WK4. The WK4 Common Channel must be from a master keyboard connected via the Com-
active. mon Channel, you can use the Bank Select
By transmitting across the Common Channel, the (CC00) and Program Change (PC) messages to
master keyboard simulates the WK4 keyboard. select the Performances.

1. Program the WK4 Common Channel. Press These messages travel on the Common Chan-
MIDI in the EDIT section to enter «Edit MIDI». nel only.

2. Press F5 («Common/Arrg.») to go to the

«Common/Arrangement» page. Values CC00 / PC Performances

3. Assign a MIDI channel and a MIDI port to the 48 / 1-8 1-8 (Grp button 1)
Common Channel. 48 / 9-16 9-16 (Grp button 2)
48 / 17-24 17-24 (Grp button 3)
48 / 25-32 25-32 (Grp button 4)
48 / 33-40 33-40 (Grp button 5)
48 / 41-48 41-48 (Grp button 6)
The Common channel assignment is a gen- 48 / 49-56 49-56 (Grp button 7)
eral setting and it is not memorized to a Per- 48 / 57-64 57-64 (Grp button 8)
formance.
4. Press ESCAPE to exit «Edit MIDI». ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If ST. LOCK is off, when you select a

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

5. Program the master keyboard to transmit on Performance, the Style memorized by the
Performance will be recalled.
the same channel as the WK4 Common ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Channel. Consult the owner’s manual of the

master keyboard for information regarding the
assignment of the transmission channel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

8•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING THE STYLES CONTROLLING THE STYLES
To select a Style, send a Bank Select (CC00) and The Style controls can be simulated by sending
Program Change (PC) message from the mas- a Control Change 80 message to WK4 with the
ter keyboard with the values shown in the follow- values shown in the following table.
ing table.
The messages travel on the Common Chan-
The messages travel on the Common Chan- nel only.
nel only.
Style control Value CC80
Values CC00 / PC Style Fill >< 00
32 / 1-8 1-8 (8 BEAT) Fill < 01
32 / 9-16 9-16 (16 BEAT) Fill > 02
32 / 17-24 17-24 (ROCK) Intro 08
32 / 25-32 25-32 (FUNK) Ending 16
32 / 33-40 33-40 (DANCE 1) Var 1 24
32 / 41-48 41-48 (DANCE 2) Var 2 25
32 / 49-56 49-56 (JAZZ) Var 3 26
32 / 57-64 57-64 (US TRAD) Var 4 27
32 / 65-72 65-72 (TRAD 1) Key Start ON/OFF 40
32 / 73-80 73-80 (TRAD 2) Rotary 1 Slow/Fast (GrpA) 61
32 / 81-88 81-88 (LATIN 1) Rotary 2 Slow/Fast (GrpA) 62
32 / 89-96 89-96 (LATIN 2) Start/Stop 64
44 / 1-8 1-8 (USER 1) Tempo increment 66
44 / 9-16 9-16 (USER 2) Tempo decrement 67
44 / 17-24 17-24 (USER 3) Next Performance 68
44 / 25-32 25-32 (USER 4) Previous Performance 69

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is active,

selecting a Style will also change the keyboard
sounds and effects.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI 8•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING SONGS CONTROLLING A SONG
To select a Song, send a Bank Select (CC00) To control a Song via remote control, the WK4
and Program Change (PC) message to WK4 with MIDI Clock must be set to External.
the values shown in the following table.
1. Press MIDI in the EDIT section to enter «Edit
The messages travel on the Common Chan- MIDI».
nel only.
2. Press F4 («General set») to recall the «Gen-
eral settings» page.
Values CC00 / PC Song 3. Set the «MIDI Clock» parameter to External.
55 / 1-16 1-16
4. Press ESCAPE or MIDI to exit «Edit MIDI».
The setting rests in memory after power
down.

SELECTING THE SONG-PERFORMANCES The START/STOP (or PLAY and STOP) com-
mand is a standard MIDI message. Press
To select one of the Performances of the current START/STOP on the master keyboard to start or
Song, send a Bank Select (CC00) and Program stop the WK4 sequencer (when WK4 is set to
Change (PC) message to WK4 with the values MIDI External).
shown in the following table. Before selecting a
The WK4 sequencer receives and transmits the
Song-Performance, select a Song as described
Song Position Pointer. From the master key-
above. The messages travel on the Common
board, it is possible to control the song advance
Channel.
and rewind precisely (with a MIDI resolution of
one ‘tic’ = 1/24th of a quarter).
Value CC00 / PC Song-Performance
64 / 1-16 1-16

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

8•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 WK4 used as a controlling device

LOCAL OFF - WK4 AS A MUTE MASTER 1. Program the expander to receive data on the
KEYBOARD same MIDI channel as that assigned to the
track. For example, if the WK4 track trans-
When WK4 is set for Local Off operation, the key- mits on channel 8, program the expander to
board is disconnected from the internal sound received on channel 8.
generator. The keyboard transmits MIDI OUT
on channel A1. The sound generator receives If the expander is multi-timbral, you can pro-
MIDI IN on all tracks of the Performance (play or gram it to receive on one channel only. Al-
mute). ternatively, you can program WK4 to trans-
mit on a single MIDI channel (in «Edit MIDI»,
Local Off operation simplifies the connection of «Configuration» page).
WK4 with an external sequencer, allowing the
keyboard to be used as a controlling device and 2. Select the WK4 track that is intended to con-
the internal sound engine as an expander at the trol the expander.
disposition of the sequencer. 3. Press MIDI in the EDIT section to enter «Edit
1. Press MIDI in the EDIT section to enter «Edit MIDI».
MIDI». 4. Press F2 («Configuration») to go to the «Con-
2. Press F7 («Local Off») to activate the Local figuration» page.
Off function. Local Off is a general setting 5. Select the internal generation icon and set it
and is not memorized to a Performance. The to OFF. Set the MIDI OUT icon to ON.
keyboard and on-board controllers (pedals)
6. Press ESCAPE to exit «Edit MIDI».
now act as those of a mute master keyboard,
which transmits on MIDI channel 1 of 7. Assign the track the ProgramChange corre-
group A. sponding to the sound of the expander. If
the expander is General MIDI compatible, you
3. At the end of the work session, press F7 («Lo-
can use the buttons of the SOUND GROUPS.
cal Off») again to deactivate Local Off.
8. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to save the
track configuration to the current Perform-
SUBSTITUTION OF THE WK4 SOUNDS ance. Confirm with ENTER.
WITH THOSE OF AN EXPANDER
An WK4 track can be set to control an external
expander instead of an internal sound. The tracks
that limit themselves to transmitting on MIDI OUT
are set to the MIDI-transmit status.
In Song mode, it is possible to define a keyboard
zone to assign to the track («Key range» param-
eter in «Edit MIDI»).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI 8•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Programming Songs on an external sequencer

Consult the owner’s manual of the sequencer for PREPARATION

instructions regarding Song recording.
1. Connect the WK4 MIDI OUT to the external
sequencer’s MIDI IN. Connect the external
sequencer’s MIDI OUT to the WK4 MIDI IN
LOCAL OFF
(“closed MIDI Loop”). Consult the sequenc-
To program Songs with an external sequencer, er’s owner’s manual for additional informa-
WK4 must be set for LOCAL OFF operation. The tion regarding MIDI communications.
procedure is described in this chapter, under the
2. Press MIDI in the EDIT section to enter «Edit
section entitled: «WK4 as a mute master key-
MIDI». Press F7 («Local Off») to activate
board».
LOCAL OFF mode.
Local Off operation disconnects the WK4 key-
board from the instrument’s internal sound gen- 3. Press SONG and select an empty location
erator and sends data to the external sequencer. (a new Song).
The sequencer then returns the data to all the
WK4 tracks; in practice, the WK4 keyboard acts
as the computer’s source of note data.
The tracks to record are selected in the external
sequencer. The notes played on the keyboard
are captured by the track currently in record, re-
gardless of the assigned MIDI channel.
Select the Record option (F1) - the Record
To listen to what is being played on the keyboard,
View page appears and the display is shown
the external sequencer must be set for MIDI
in negative highlight - the instrument is now
THRU operation and the track corresponding to
in “record pending” status.
the WK4 track to listen to must be selected.
In LOCAL OFF status, WK4 transmits on MIDI Press RECORD to escape from “record-
channel 1 of group A. pending” status.
4. In WK4, set the track that will be used to re-
ceive MIDI to key-play.
MIDI OUT

Press STORE PERFORMANCE to save the

Song-Performance to memory.
5. You can play on the keyboard to send data
to the external sequencer. The sequencer
sends data to WK4.
MIDI IN

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

8•8 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE COMPUTER PORT WK4-COMPUTER-EXPANDER CONNEC-
You can use the COMPUTER port via a single TION
cable instead of the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT ports. Connect the WK4 to the computer in the follow-
The COMPUTER port only handles the MIDI ing manner (closed loop):
channels of group A (A1...A16).
• WK4 MIDI OUT connected to the computer’s
MIDI IN.
Apple Macintosh
• WK4 MIDI IN connected to the computer’s
The Macintosh (or compatible) must communi-
MIDI OUT.
cate at the velocity of 1 MHz.. Consult the manual
of the sequencer for information.
Use a standard Macintosh serial cable. Connect Connect one of two expanders to the WK4 MIDI
one end of the cable to the WK4 and the other to THRU ports. These ports transmit exactly the
the MODEM port of the Macintosh. same data as those received at MIDI IN:
• MIDI THRU A retransmits data received at
IBM PC MIDI IN A.
The IBM-PC (or compatible) can communicate • MIDI THRU B retransmits data received at
at the velocity of 31250 baud (PC1) or 38400 MIDI IN B.
baud (PC2).
Use standard Serial cables. Insert the small con-
nector (DB9) to the WK4 COMPUTER port and Connect the expander’s MIDI IN to one of the
the larger connector (DP25) to the RS-232 port MIDI THRU ports.
of the computer. Mute the WK4 tracks that are assigned the MIDI
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
channels dedicated to the expander.

Note: The COMPUTER port and
PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the
same time. Connecting one excludes the other
automatically.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI 8•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

8•10 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 9 Digital Signal Processor
WK4 allows you to route the Performances (Real
Performances, Style-Performances and Song-
Performances) to the on-board multi-effects proc-
essor to enrich the sounds with Reverb and
Modulation effects.
The Digital Signal Processor consists of four real
time controlled units which process the Perform-
ances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation ef-
fects: two Reverb channels (A & B) and two Modu-
lation channels (A & B) are available.
In Style/RealTime mode, channel A effects are
reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B
for the accompaniment tracks. Each track can
be processed by two effects. When a Style is
selected with the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY off, only
the effects assigned to the accompaniments will
change (Group B). When a Performance is se- Page stored in Performance Performance
lected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects
assigned to the keyboard will change (Group A).
In Song mode, each track can be independently
processed by either A or B channel effects.
Access to the DSPs is via the EFFECTS button
in the Edit section.
Pressing the EFFECTS button the first time opens
the main Edit Effect page showing the Effect Type
function currently selected.
The status of the parameters on this page de- Edit Effects - Effects type selection
pends on the current mode (Style/RealTime or
Song).
The display example opposite shows the configu-
ration recalled by the default GrandPiano Per-
formance.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Digital Signal Processor 9•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting the effect types

Regardless of the current mode (Style/RealTime,

Song mode), the method used to select and as-
sign the effects to the current Performance is
identical.

HOW TO SELECT THE EFFECT TYPES

1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section.
The Edit Effects page opens showing the ef- EFFECTS
fect types assigned to the current Perform- 1
ance and relative Effect Volume levels. 1

2. Select the effect type that you wish to change.

If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown,
press the Soft button F1 to activate the cor-
rect page.
Use the / and / buttons to select the 2
processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and the effect type
(shown in negative highlight).
If WK4 is set to Style/RealTime Mode, the
Group A parameters will be assignable for the
keyboard tracks and the Group B to the ac-
F1

companiment tracks. F2

F3

If WK4 is set to Song Mode, the Group A and F4

Group B parameters will be freely assignable F5

F6

(Group A and B assignments are carried in F7

the Send Level page, explained in the Edit F8

Effects chapter of the Reference Guide).

3. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type

from each processor (Eff1 and Eff 2). 3 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

The DIAL scrolls through the available effects

of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP pro-
vides a selection of 24 effects. The Modula-
tion DSP provides a selection of 32 effects.
ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9•2 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Select the Vol parameter and regulate the gen-
eral Effect Volume levels for the Performance. 4
Use the directional arrows to select the pa-
rameters and the Dial to enter a value.
Select other tracks with the cursor button.

5. Press STORE PERFORMANCE and ENTER to save

the changes to the current Performance.
If you select a different Performance, or
reselect the same Performance without sav-
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ing the changes, the newly assigned effects

will be lost and the original settings will be
restored.
Press EFFECTS or ESCAPE to exit the Edit ESCAPE

Effect page.

5
STORE
PERF.

ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Digital Signal Processor 9•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Bypassing the effects

While playing, you can bypass both effect types

assigned to the current Performance.
The status of the EFFECTS BYPASS button
shows at a glance whether the effects are inserted
or bypassed.
• LED on = effects bypassed.
• LED off = effects inserted.
1 EFFECTS
1. Press the EFFECTS BYPASS button to bypass the BYPASS

effects. EFFECTS
BYPASS

The LED goes on to indicate that the current

Performance is not routed to the DSPs.

2. Press the same button to reactivate the effect.

The LED goes off to indicate that the current
Performance is routed to the DSPs. 2 EFFECTS
BYPASS

EFFECTS
BYPASS

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9•4 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Regulating the Send levels

Each track of the current Performance can be

independently adjusted for the amount of Reverb
or Modulation effect applied.
The SEND LEVEL function of the Edit Effects
1
EFFECTS
page gains access to the parameters.

1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section then 1

press the Soft button F2 to activate the SEND

LEVEL parameter.
The display shows the Send Level values of F2
F1

each track (depending on the current mode). F3

F4

If Style/RealTime mode is selected, the Group F5

parameter will be fixed. F6

F7

If Song mode is selected, the Group param- F8

eter will be variable.

2. Select the track that needs to be modified.

Use the Track select soft buttons A … H.
2/3
To bring other tracks into view, use the
directional arrow. A

3. Select the Send level parameter that you wish to D

regulate. E

Use the directional arrows to select E1 or E2

G

as required. E1 corresponds to the Reverb

effects, E2 to the Modulations.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Digital Signal Processor 9•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Adjust the Send levels with the Dial.
4 ENTER TEMPO / DATA
The value can vary from 0 (effect off) to 127.
Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 to make other modi-
fications.

5. Press STORE PERFORMANCE and ENTER to save ESCAPE

the changes to the current Performance.

Press EFFECTS or ESCAPE to exit the Edit
Effects page. 5
STORE
PERF.

Effect Editing
Effect editing procedures are discussed in the Edit
Effects chapter of the Reference Guide.
ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9•6 User Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Reference
Guide
• 10 Selection/Help
• 11 Recording a Song
• 12 User Style recording
• 13 Edit overview
• 14 Edit Effects
• 15 Edit MIDI
• 16 Edit Mixer
• 17 Edit Contr./Pads
• 18 Edit T./Split
• 19 Edit Perf Sound
• 20 Edit Sound (Option)
• 21 Edit General
• 22 Edit Song
• 23 Edit Style
• 24 Preload
• 25 Edit Disk

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Reference Guide
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 10 Selection/Help
Selection Name of the selected
Performance group

SELECTING PERFORMANCES

Panel selection
Panel selection is preferable when playing live.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Per-
formances from the Performance Groups also
changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS
buttons to open a «Select Performance» win-
dow.
2. Select a Performance with the correspond-
Performance (selected with the
ing Soft button. corresponding Soft button)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When you select a Performance, WK4

sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection via MIDI

WK4 must receive the relative selection mes-
sages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 48) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK4.

Message... selects...
CC00 [48] - PC [1...8] Performance 1...8
CC00 [48] - PC [9...16] Performance 9...16
...
CC00 [48] - PC [57...64] Performance 57...64

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection/Help 10•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING STYLES Selection via MIDI
WK4 must receive the relative selection mes-
Panel selection sages on the Common Channel. The Common
1. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons Channel is set in «Edit MIDI »
to open a «Style Select» window. To select ROM Styles, send Control Change 00
2. Select a Style with the corresponding Soft (value = 32) and a Program Change.
button. To select USER Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 44) and a Program Change.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When you select a Style, WK4 sends

CC00 [value 32 or 44]-PC messages in rapid Message.. selects...
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan CC00 [32] - PC [1...8] 8 BEAT - Style 1...8
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels. ...
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

CC00 [32] - PC [89...96] LATIN 2 - Style 89...96

Recalling Styles by selecting the Performances CC00 [44] - PC [1...8] USER 1 - Style 1...8
If the LED of the STYLE LOCK button is ON when ...
you select a Performance, the current Style rests CC00 [44] - PC [25...32] USER 4 - Style 25...32
unchanged. If STYLE LOCK is OFF, selecting a
Performance also recalls a Style, Variation and
Tempo.
As well as track data (Bank Select, Program
Change, Volume, Pan) the Programmable Per-
formances memorize (a) the selection of a Style,
(b) the selection of a Variation of the Style, (c) Name of the selected
the Tempo. Style Group
1. Deactivate the STYLE LOCK button.
2. Press one of the PERFORMANCE buttons
to open a «Select Performance» window.
3. Select a Performance with the correspond-
ing Soft button. The memorized Style and
Variation will be recalled.

Style (select it with the

function buttons)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

10•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING SOUNDS

Recall Sounds by selecting Performances or Styles

Refer to the previous sections relating to the se-
lection of Performances or Styles.
While playing, Sounds are instantly recalled by
selecting Performances or Styles. Program your
Performances or Style-Performances accordingly Name of the selected Bank (select it
before you play. Sound Group with )

Panel selection
1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons
to open a «Sound Select» window.
2. Scroll through the Banks with the but-
tons. The Bank number corresponds to the
Control Change 00 MIDI message (CC00/
BankSelect MSB).
3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft
button.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ProgramChange

Note: When you select a Sound, WK4 sends
CC00-CC32=32-PC messages in rapid succession CC00/BankSelect MSB
on the MIDI channel assigned to the track.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selecting with the Numeric keypad

It is possible to specify a Sound selection mes-
sage on the numeric keypad (EDIT/NUMBERS
section). This section can send a MIDI message
consisting of Control Change 00 (CC00/
BankSelect MSB), Control Change 32 (CC32/
BankSelect LSB), ProgramChange (PC) to an
external unit connected to the WK4 MIDI OUT.
To select an WK4 Sound, it is sufficient to specify
the message CC00-PC. The CC32 message can
be ignored.
The keypad insertion zone will close automati-
cally after a few seconds of inactivity.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection/Help 10•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Select the track to which a Sound is to be
assigned.
2. Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the
EDIT/NUMBERS as a numeric keypad. An
insertion zone opens in the display showing
the number of the current sound assigned to
the track.
3. Specify the Program Change number of the
Sound to select.
If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add
a separating hyphen (symbol «-») followed
by the corresponding bank number
(BankSelect MSB). Insertion Zone
If necessary, add another separating hyphen
and a BankSelect MSB number (not neces-
sary for WK4 internal Sounds).
CC32/BankSelect LSB
4. Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER,
or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The CC00/BankSelect MSB
LED on the KEY PAD button goes off. PC/ProgramChange
5. Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to
memorize the modification to the current Per-
formance.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Sound selection messages are

transmitted and received via MIDI in the order
CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For
practical purposes, the reverse order has been
adopted for the panel selection procedure, given
that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to
select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

When working with an external sequencer,

messages must be entered in the order CC00-
CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the WK4
Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be
ignored.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

PC/ProgramChange
CC00/BankSelect MSB

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

10•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selection via MIDI
The Sound selection message must be received
on the MIDI channel assigned to the track to which
the Sound is assigned.
To select a WK4 Sound, you must send a Con-
trol Change 00 (CC00/BankSelect MSB) and Pro-
gram Change (PC) message.
The relative numbers are also displayed in the main
page (Multi mode) and the selection window that
appears when you select a SOUND GROUPS
button.
The Sound table in the Appendix lists all the WK4
Sounds and corresponding MIDI selection mes-
sages.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection/Help 10•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING SONGS

Panel selection
Selecting a Song sets WK4 to Song mode.
1. Press the SONG button to open the «Select
Song» window.
2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft
button.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When you select a Song, WK4 sends

CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession
on the Common Channel . The BankSelect,
ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of
the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Song (select with the

Soft buttons)
SELECTION VIA MIDI
WK4 must receive the relative selection mes-
sages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 55) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK4.

Message.. selects...
CC00 [55] - PC [1...16] Song 1...16

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

10•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES

Panel selection
To select a Song Performance, WK4 must be set
to Song mode.
1. Press the SONG-P button to open the «Se-
SONG P.
lect Song-Performance» window.
2. Select a Song-Performance with the corre-
sponding Soft button.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When you select a Song-Performance,

WK4 sends CC00 [value 64]-PC messages in
rapid succession on the Common Channel.. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If PLAY or STOP are pressed, the Song-

Performance recorded in the Song is recalled (the
initial one or the most recent one). All temporary
modifications will, therefore, be cancelled.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If a Song-Performance is selected in

record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SELECTION VIA MIDI

To select a Song via MIDI, the selection mes- Song-Performance select
sage must be sent to WK4 on the Common Chan- with the Soft buttons
nel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 64] and
a Program Change message in rapid succession.

Message... selects...
CC00 [64] - PC [1...8] Song-Perfs 1...8

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection/Help 10•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Display Hold Effects Off
You can select items from a selection display with- You can choose to select and play your Perform-
out closing the selection window by pressing the ances, Styles and Songs without the programmed
D. HOLD button. effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function. activation of the function. When the LED is on,
the effects are bypassed and the current Perform-
CONTRAST UNDO HELP D. HOLD KEY PAD ance, Style or Song plays “dry” (i.e. without ef-
fects).
EFFECTS
BYPASS

D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the but-

ton is pressed again.
Use ESCAPE to close the current selection win-
dow without deactivating D. HOLD. EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the
button is pressed again.
Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles,
Programmable Performances and Songs.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

10•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Help

WK4 incorporates an on-line-help system which HOW TO USE HELP

provides brief information on the basic functions
of the instrument. This feature is particularly help- 1. Press the HELP button when you want gen-
ful if you get stuck and do not have access to the eral information regarding the current mode.
owner’s manual at the time. A GENERAL page will open showing infor-
Also incorporated is a PANIC function which helps mation regarding the current operating mode.
to unlock the instrument in MIDI situations. 2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open
Generally, pressing HELP opens a page show- a sub-page with specific details concerning
ing information regarding the currently set mode. the current help topic.

Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode, Depending on the current mode, a NEXT
press HELP to get information concerning the page (F3/F4) may or not be available.
default situation (main page). Once you have entered a NEXT page, the
Similarly, if you are currently working in one of PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available.
the Edit environments, (Edit Effects, for exam- Options not available will be shown with bro-
ple), press HELP to get information on the Ef- ken lines.
fects section.
3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6.
Some Help pages consist of a General informa-
tion page and one or more ‘Detail’ pages which 4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of
provide detailed information regarding the cur- the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/
rent topic. F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2).
5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP
page.

Help - General Default - main page information Help - EDIT Midi - Details information

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Selection/Help 10•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PANIC
MIDI communications can sometimes “lock” the
instrument due to the transmission of an exces-
sive quantity of data, or an incorrect MIDI mes-
sage.
The PANIC function sends the “All notes off” and
“Reset all Controllers” messages to all external
MIDI devices connected to the WK4 MIDI OUT
port.

How to activate PANIC

• If your machine locks up while working with
MIDI, press the two buttons to the right
of the display.

WK4 sends the “all notes off” and “reset all

controllers” messages to all connected MIDI
devices.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

10•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 11 Recording a Song
This section explains the two principal methods RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
used to record a Song.
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
QUICK REC RECORDING the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of
clearing Song memory and making room for other
The easiest method, called “Quick Rec”, exploits Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation.
existing Styles in order to record your keyboard
tracks with automatic accompaniments. This Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs
method is a quick and easy way of recording that you don’t want to lose to disk before pro-
which does not involve the more advanced op- ceeding with the restore procedure.
tions common to the more traditional Song 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
Record method explained afterwards. access to the «Edit General» environment.
The Quick Rec method is an excellent way of 2. Press F7 («Restore Songs») to cancel all the
recording backing tracks for vocalists. Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in
RAM.
You are prompted with a request to recon-
RECORD METHOD
firm your choice.
The more traditional “Record” method allows you
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to can-
to record one track at a time and does not exploit
cel.
existing structures.
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
For example, to record a Drum track, you must
memory.
build the drum accompaniment note for note us-
ing the individual percussive instruments of a With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a

single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Recording a Song 11•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The Quick Rec method
1. Press SONG to open the «Songs» dialog
window and select a free location
(##########).
2. Select the QuickRec option from the «New
Song» dialog window by pressing the soft
button F2.
The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick
Record page activates showing a negative
highlight page.
A new Song and Song Performance is cre- Style name Tempo locator
ated based on the starting Performance (if (measure
modifications were previously applied, enter- Performance counter)
name
ing record mode saves the modifications to
the new Song-Performance).
3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment
controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, AR-
RANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE OP-
TIONS).
4. Program the Performance as required and
save the changes with STORE PERFORM-
ANCE.
5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO,
tracks menu
FILL or ENDING.
6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.
The PLAY button activates automatically. «QuickRecord» page

7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic

accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at
will.
8. Conclude your song (use the Ending).
9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD but-
ton goes off. At this point it is possible to
modify the song recording in «Edit Song», or
to record other tracks using the normal
Record method described on the next page.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

11•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The Record method
PREPARATION 5. Select and program the initial Song param-
eters:
1. Press SONG. In the «Select Song» dialog
window and select an empty location (shown • «Time Signa-
as ########). ture» to modify
the time signature (metronome).
2. In the «New Song» dialog window, select the
Record option. • «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
6. Select the
«Quantize» pa-
rameter to modify the pre-quantization (auto-
correction of timing errors) during the record-
ing phase.
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) but-
ton lights up and the display shows the
«Record View» page for Song mode in nega-
tive highlight.
4. Program the recording options.
• Press F1 («Rec
Mode») to open the
«Rec Mode» dialog Songs in RAM title bar
window, select the
mode required and
press ENTER to confirm.
• Press F2 («Option»)
to open the «Option»
dialog window where
you can program the
metronome and countdown options. Press
ENTER to confirm the settings.
• Press F3 («Controls
rec...») to activate or
deactivate the record-
ing of the Tempo,
Pedal Volume, Effect free locations
Change events. Press
ENTER to confirm the settings. «Select Song» window

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Recording a Song 11•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7. If necessary, The Start locator can be modified only when
select «Play/ the Play/Rec mode is set to Loop. The End
Rec Mode» to locator can be modified only if the Play/Rec
alter the Song Play/Rec mode: mode is set to Forced Stop or Loop.
• The Linear option causes the Song to play 9. Select the track(s) to record and set it (them)
or be recorded once only, from the beginning for recording. Only tracks marked by the
to the point at which you press STOP. record icon will capture data and be heard:
• The Forced Stop option causes the song
to play or be recorded from the specified start
locator to the end locator. To place all the tracks in record, press F4
• The Loop option allows you to play or record («Select all tracks»). All the tracks will be
in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the activated for recording and the parameter
End point. changes to «Deselect all tracks».

8. If necessary, 10. To change sounds, select the «Sound View»

modify the Start option by pressing F5.
and End locators. After assigning your Sounds, save the Per-
These parameters can be modified only if the formance with STORE PERFORMANCE.
Song contains recorded data (it will not be Press F6 («Rec View») to return to the «Rec
possible to specify the measures if no re- View» page.
corded events exist).
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metro-
nome»).
Song name locator
Tempo (measure
Song-Performance name
counter)

tracks menu

Song Mode - Record View display Song Mode - Sound View display
(record/play parameters display)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

11•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RECORDING UNDO

1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If If, during the recording phase, you want to can-
Countdown=ON wait for the countdown to fin- cel the last performed recording task, use UNDO
ish before playing (events are not recorded to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO
during the countdown phase). button is located to the right of the display, just
after the Contrast knob.
2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will
be recorded in the track or tracks active for For example, after adding new events to an ex-
recording. isting drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
3. When you have finished, stop the recording events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO.
with STOP. Just press UNDO and confirm the request with
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song
back to the beginning. 1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

to the previous situation, press UNDO.

4. To add additional events to the same tracks, UNDO
press STOP again to take the song pointer
to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track,

select the Overdub option. To substitute existing
notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the
Replace option.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
You are prompted with a request to confirm
the operation.
5. If you are satisfied with the recording, con-
firm the track or tracks by pressing the corre-
sponding Soft buttons. The recording will be
confirmed and the tracks set to «seq-play».
6. Repeat the recording procedures for other
tracks.
2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode. operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request
The LED of the RECORD button goes off and and retain the last operation.
the display returns to normal.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Recording a Song 11•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The «Record View» page in detail
MODE... (F1) Tempo - To record the Tempo variations.
Settings: On, Off.
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options. P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of
the instrument using the Volume pedal .
Replace - The new notes substitute “old” These events are recorded as CC07 (see Ap-
notes already present in the tracks being re- pendix). Settings: On, Off.
corded.
Effect - To record the changes of the effects
Overdub - New notes are merged with those
assigned to the Performance and respective
already present in the tracks being recorded.
effect volume levels. These events are cap-
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a cor- tured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see
rection without repeating a recording. Punch Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
recording is activated by pressing an appro-
priately programmed pedal (in «Controllers/
Pads» of «Edit Performance»). SELECT ALL TRACKS (F4)
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the

Select all tracks (F4)
song reaches a position just before the point
at which the correction must be inserted,
Once pressed, the option changes to «Deselect
press the pedal. At this point, the recording all tracks».
proceeds in “replace” mode. When the cor-
rection is complete, release the pedal to stop Activates all the tracks for recording. «Deselect
the replace recording. all tracks» resets all the tracks in «key-play» or
«seq-play» status.

OPTION... (F2)
SOUND VIEW (F5)
Metronome options.
Recalls the «Sound View» page in which it is
Countdown - A lead into the recording dur- possible to see and change the sounds assigned
ing which time no events can be captured.. to the Performance.
Settings: On, Off.
Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the met-
ronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127. REC VIEW (F6)
Recalls the «Record View» page in which it is
possible to control the record/play parameters.
CONTROLS REC... (F3)
Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume,
effects changes. These events are captured in
the Master Track.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

11•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ERASE... (F7) Loc and End indicators determine the start
and end point of the recording.
Cancellation of the track or Song.
Loop - Song playback or recording repeats
Track - Cancels the selected track. continuously. When the Song reaches the
Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song) end, it loops back to the beginning and starts
and leaves an “empty” Song, ready to cap- again and continues to repeat until stopped
ture recorded events. The Song Performance with STOP.
remains intact. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: The loop requires an additional memory

buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory
progress bar shows an increased amount of used
METRONOME (F8) memory.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Activates/deactivates the metronome.

START
LOC Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Locator. Indicates the current position of the Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at
Song, expressed in measures, beats and reso- which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter
lution (tick). can be modified with the DIAL.

END
measure (bar) beat resolution
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point
is not possible to select the next measure after at which the repeating song ends before looping
the Song end point. For example, if the recorded back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec
Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator can- Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the
not be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1. automatic Stop point.
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
PLAY/REC MODE
Recording and playback options for the Song. TIME SIGNATURE
The options are:
Metro. This parameter can be modified only be-
Linear - A linear recording or playback of the fore starting a recording. If the Song contains
Song, starting from the current locator to the recorded events, the parameter cannot be modi-
Song end. In record mode, new events are fied.
recorded as the recording proceeds.
Forced stop - The Song is played back or
recorded from the current Locator to a speci-
fied End locator. With Forced Stop active, the

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Recording a Song 11•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TEMPO MEMORY PROGRESS BAR
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter A bar graph which monitors the amount of
can be modified with the DIAL in the «Play View» memory being used up by the song as it is being
or «Record View» page, or in the Master Track. recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes
to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical
Tempo changes can be carried out during the
value and is independent of the total amount of
recording by using the DIAL. The events are
memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is lim-
captured in the Master Track, provided that the
ited to 400 kb.
appropriate option is active («Controls rec», dia-
log window F3). If the RAM already contains a large amount of
data, a dialog window may appear showing the
The Master Track always contains the initial
message «Memory full!», which indicates that the
Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified
recording cannot proceed further. The recording
but not cancelled.
is instantly interrupted.
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
QUANTIZE by deactivating the Undo function.
An auto-corrector of timing errors during the re-
cording phase. The selection values are normal,
triplets or swing.

Value Quantization
1/4

1/8 
1/12  triplet
1/16 
1/24  triplet
1/32 
1/48  triplet
1/64 (1/64)
1/96 (1/64 triplet)
free no quantization
1/8 B...F*
.  (swing)
1/16 B...F* .  (swing)
free no quantization

* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

11•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 12 User Style recording
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make
STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-pro- up a Style.
grammable Styles, or free locations that allow you
The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style
to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to
which repeats continually until stopped, or until it
32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each
is “broken” by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
User Group.
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by
A new Style can be created by recording every
pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING
part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an exist-
buttons.
ing Style. This second option is discussed in the
Edit Style chapter. A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen meas-
ures long.
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into
memory and user-programmed Styles can be Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum,
saved to disk, using the methods described in Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
the Disk chapter 6 of the User Guide.

THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE

Styles provide automatic accompaniments based
on the system of chords. In particular, the Major,
Minor and Seventh chords trigger three com- Var1 Var2 Var3 Var4
pletely different arrangement patterns.
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor
7th chords and each Variation breaks down into
Basic 7th Basic 7th Basic 7th Basic 7th
several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, End-
ing. These four elements form the basis of a Fill Major Fill Major Fill Major Fill Major
structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or Fill Minor Fill Minor Fill Minor Fill Minor
“Riffs”, for each Style. Fill 7th Fill 7th Fill 7th Fill 7th
Intro Major Intro Major Intro Major Intro Major
Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro Minor
WHAT IS A RIFF? Intro 7th Intro 7th Intro 7th Intro 7th
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (loop- End Major End Major End Major End Major
ing). It can also be expressed as a “phrase” or End Minor End Minor End Minor End Minor
“lick”, but it is important to understand that the
End 7th End 7th End 7th End 7th
Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when
you play with Styles, you will note that the pat-
terns are short repeating sequences. Riffs of a Style

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

User Styles 12•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Recording
PREPARATION
1. Select a USER Style. Select a free location environment
name locator
(##########) to create a new Style. Tempo (measure
Style name counter)
2. You are prompted to create a new style. Press
F1 («Ok»).

3. The Style «Record View» page activates and

the «Select Riff» dialog window is also shown:

tracks menu

Style Mode - Record View display

(record/play parameters display)
4. Select the Variation, element and chord with
the cursor buttons and press ENTER to con-
firm. The LED on the RECORD button lights
up and the «Record View» page is shown in
negative highlight.
5. Once the dialog window closes, press F1
(«Mode») to select the recording mode. The
«Record Mode» dialog window opens where
you can select the required mode.

Select the record mode and press ENTER to confirm.

Style Mode - Sound View display

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

12•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6. Select and program the basic Style param- After assigning the sounds, save the Perform-
eters: ance with STORE PERF. Return to the «Rec
View» page with Soft button F6.
• «Time Signa-
ture» to modify 11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metro-
the time signature. nome»).
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
• «Key note» to
specify the refer-
ence key. When a chord is played, WK4
transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, in-
dicate the key in which the riffs are pro-
grammed.
7. Set both
parts of
the «Scale conversion» parameter. The
Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two
chords starting from the complementary
chord. For example, you can program the
Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter en-
gages the task of reconstructing the Basic
Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale con-
verter table at the end of this chapter.
8. Select the
«Quantize» pa-
rameter to modify the pre-quantization set-
ting (auto-correction of the timing) during the
recording.
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and
set them in Record mode. Only Tracks show-
ing the record icon will capture events and
be heard during the recording:

10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open

the «Sound View» page with the F5 Soft but-
ton

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

User Styles 12•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RECORDING RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A If you have loaded disk-based Style or recorded
one-measure countdown with start. User Styles and used up all the memory dedi-
cated to the storage of Styles, a quick and easy
2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording
way of clearing User Style memory and making
proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of
room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles
the riff is reached, the recording starts again
operation.
from the beginning..
Naturally, you must remember to save the User
3. Stop the recording with START/STOP.
Style that you don’t want to lose to disk before
4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points proceeding with the restore procedure.
1 - 3.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ access to the «Edit General» environment.

Note: If the Overdub recording mode is
selected, new notes will be added to the tracks 2. Press F5 («Restore Styles») to cancel all the
each time the recording repeats. If Replace is User Styles (and relative User Style-Presets)
selected, new notes will cancel those already
existing on the next cycle. In Replace mode, the in RAM.
recording returns to Overdub mode at the end of
the first cycle. You are prompted with a request to recon-
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

firm your choice.

5. Select the tracks shown in «record» and set 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to can-
them in «seq-play». cel.
With ENTER, the User Styles are cancelled
from memory.
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other With ESCAPE, the User Styles are retained.
tracks. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a

7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode. single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

The LED on the RECORD button goes off.

UNDO
If, during the recording phase, you want to can-
cel the last performed recording task, use UNDO
to cancel the last performed task.
For example, after adding new events to an ex-
isting drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO.
Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to
return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to re-
tain the last task.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

12•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The «Record View» page in detail
MODE... (F1) REC VIEW (F6)
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where Recalls the «Record View» page where it is pos-
you can select various recording options. sible to control the record/play parameters.
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being re- ERASE... (F7)
corded.
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
Overdub - New notes are merged with those
already present on the tracks being recorded. Track - Cancels the selected track.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a cor- Riff - Cancels the selected riff.
rection without the necessity of repeating a Variation - Cancels the selected variation.
recording. Punch recording is activated by Style - Cancels the entire Style.
pressing an appropriately programmed pedal
(in «Edit Controllers/Pads»). METRONOME (F8)
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the Activates/deactivates the metronome.
song reaches the point at which the correc-
tion must be inserted, press the pedal. At
this point, the recording proceeds in “replace”
TIME SIGNATURE
mode. When the correction is complete, re- Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be
lease the pedal to stop the recording. modified only before starting a recording. If the
Style contains recorded events, this parameter
cannot be modified.
REC RIFF... (F2)
Opens a dialog window where you can select a
riff to record.
MEASURES
Determines the length of a riff expressed in meas-
ures (max 16).

TEMPO
Select the Variation, section and chord with the The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for
cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. the entire Style.

SOUND VIEW (F5) KEY NOTE

Recalls the «Sound View» page where you can Reference key. Indicates the key in which the
see and change the sounds assigned to the Per- original riff is recorded. When you play the indi-
formance. cated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the
same manner as recorded. If other chords are
played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

User Styles 12•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SCALE CONVERSION QUANTIZE
If you program a Style accompaniment based on An auto-corrector of timing during the recording
the Major scale, the WK4 arranger will automati- phase. The selection values are normal, triplets
cally convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. or swing.
This allows you to limit your User Style recording
times by, for example, recording only the Major
riff of Variation 1, in order that when you play with Value Quantization
the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be 1/4

automatically adjusted for the change. However, 1/8 
in harmonic terms, this type of ‘over-simplifica-
1/12  triplet
tion’ creates errors when using the more com-
plex chord structures. To overcome this prob- 1/16 
lem, the WK4 Scale Converter provides a selec- 1/24  triplet
tion of chord inversion systems, based on algo- 1/32 
rithms in order to render the conversion more
1/48  triplet
musical.
1/64 (1/64)
You can program the Major chord only and set
1/96 (1/64 triplet)
the scale converter for the other two chords (mi-
nor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish free no quantization
to program also the respective riffs, the relative 1/8 B...F*
  (swing)
Scale Conversion will be ignored. The param- 1/16 B...F*   (swing)
eter consists of two variable parts, corresponding
free no quantization
to the two complementary chords with respect to
the one being recorded.
If the “Off” setting is selected, the arranger car- * B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
ries out the simplified conversion referred to. The
tables at the end of this chapter show how the
scale converter operates, both in the off status, FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)
as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several
different solutions for each chord are provided The amount of memory remaining to record the
for. riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30
kilobytes).
The tables refer to chord and bass patterns played
in the key of C and shows which notes are con- If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a
verted. The changes are expressed in semitones, dialog window may appear showing the message
therefore, if the note C shows a conversion of – «Memory full!» indicating that the recording can-
2, the note is converted 2 semitones down (Bb). not proceed further. The recording is instantly in-
Notes not converted are shown blank. terrupted.
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

12•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SCALE CONVERSION TABLES

Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C 7th riff

C# D# F# G# A#
C D E F G A B
accomp. –2 +1 –1
bass +1 –1

Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C minor riff

C# D# F# G# A#
C D E F G A B
accomp. –1 +1 –1
bass –1 +1 –1

Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C 7th riff

C# D# F# G# A#
C D E F G A B
7th 1 accomp. –2
7th 1 bass
7th 2 accomp. –2 –1
7th 2 bass –1
7th 3 accomp. –2 +1
7th 3 bass +1
7th 4 accomp. –2
7th 4 bass

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

User Styles 12•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C minor riff
C# D# F# G# A#
C D E F G A B
min 1 accomp. –1
min 1 bass –1
min 2 accomp. –1 –1
min 2 bass –1 –1
min 3 accomp. –1 +1
min 3 bass –1 +1
min 4 accomp. –1 –1
min 4 bass –1 –1
min 5 accomp. –1 –1 –1
min 5 bass –1 –1 –1
min 6 accomp. –1 –1 +1
min 6 bass –1 –1 +1
min 7 accomp. –1 –1 –1 –1
min 7 bass –1 –1 –1 –1

Complex chords
The logic applied to the conversion of the more
complex chords follows similar lines to that used
for the standard Major, minor and 7th chords in-
dicated above. The user is invited to experiment
with the Scale Converter in order to discover the
most suitable conversion for the Style being pro-
grammed.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

12•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 13 Edit overview
EDIT / NUMBER

Edit section EFFECTS MIDI MIXER

1 2 3

The buttons of the EDIT/NUMBERS section gain

CNT / PADS T. SPLIT SOUND
access to a series of functions which determine
4 6
how the instrument works. Each button corre- 5

sponds to an edit environment. Most of the modi- ST. / SONG OPTION GENERAL

fications can be saved to the Performance asso- 7 8 9

ciated to the current mode (Style/RealTime or

Song), by pressing the STORE PERFORMANCE DEMO PRELOAD DISK

H. D.
_
button. 0 +

HOW TO NAVIGATE THROUGH THE EDIT THE STRUCTURE OF THE EDIT ENVIRON-
PAGES MENTS
The navigational tools are the directional arrows The Edit environments consist of pages which
[ / & / ] and the page scroll buttons. contain related parameters (example, a page can
The directional arrows [ / & / ] move the cur- contain a set of Effects parameters, or MIDI pa-
sor in all directions to select the parameter to edit. rameters, etc.).
To enter a value for a selected parameter, use The pages of the simple structure edit environ-
the DIAL or the numeric keypad (with the ments (Edit MIDI, Edit Effects, Edit Mixer, Edit
KEYPAD LED on). Controllers/Pads, Edit Tracks/Splits, Edit Perf
To confirm an entry, use the ENTER button; use Sound) are arranged on a single level. The list
the Escape button to exit from a parameter with- of functions shown in the right column of the dis-
out confirming a new entry. play contains the name of the pages which can
be recalled with the corresponding Soft button.

EDIT MIDI EDIT TRACKS/SPLITS

MENU MENU 1 MENU 2

MIDI Channels Transpose Harmony

Configuration Master transp. enable Delay
MIDI Filters Detune Key range
General settings F1...F8 Random Pitch F1...F8 F1...F8
Common/arrangement Aftertouch Create track...
MIDI Dump Mode/Priority Copy track...
Velocity curve Erase track...
Local On/Off Velocity range
MIDI ch. lock

Edit environments diagram with simple structure.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit overview 13•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 If an edit environment contains more than one In the «Disk» environment, each page corre-
menu (as in example, Edit Tracks/Splits) it is pos- sponds to a function. Pass from one page to
sible to pass from one menu to the other with the another with the page scroll buttons . The
page scroll buttons . Soft buttons are used to select the disk and acti-
vate various procedures.
You can escape a simple structure edit environ-
ment by pressing the respective edit button, or
ESCAPE. EDIT DISK

The complex structure edit environments (Edit

Style, Edit Song, Edit Sound, Edit General) con-
sist of a series of related editors (modules) which
can be directly accessed from the main menu. SAVE ERASE
Once entered, you can pass from one accessed Floppy disk Floppy disk
Hard disk Hard disk
editor to another by means of the page scroll Ram
buttons . New Disk
Free memory New Disk
Free memory
The functions of an editor are recalled with the
soft buttons F1…F8, as in the simple structure
environments.
«Edit Disk» diagram.
To escape an editor, press the button correspond-
ing to the edit environment, or press ESCAPE
twice (once to return to the main menu, once to
escape the edit).

Edit environments diagram with complex structure.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

13•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE EDIT PAGES k. Menu selector/indicator corresponding to the
buttons . When these arrows are not
Using the «Transpose» page of «Edit Tracks/ active for selection, it is an indication that
Splits» as an example: other menus are not available. Conversely,
when one or both are active for selection, they
indicate the presence of a menu before or
e g h f i j k after.

PASSING FROM ONE EDIT SECTION TO

ANOTHER
While you are inside an edit environment, it is
possible to pass to a different environment by
pressing the corresponding button in the EDIT
section. It is not necessary to escape an edit
environment to pass into another.

MOVING THE CURSOR

a b c d
The cursor is represented by the negative high-
light zone which indicates that a parameter is se-
lected and in a state to accept a modification.
a. Track status icons. Move the cursor with the directional arrows.
b. Sound zone (not always present).
c. Parameter zone. The parameters can ap- EDIT PROCEDURE FOR SIMPLE STRUC-
pear in numeric or graphic form. TURE EDIT ENVIRONMENTS
d. Functions. Contains three types of options 1. To modify the parameters of a Performance,
or commands: (a) items that alternate be- first select the Performance.
tween one another; selecting one deactivates
the other, (b) items that recall a dialog win- 2. Press the button corresponding to the re-
dow, (c) ON/OFF switches. quired edit environment in the EDIT section.

e. The icon identifying the Edit environment. 3. Select the editor required with the directional
arrows.
f. Status bar.
4. If you are not able to find the page required,
g. Name of the edit environment. select it with the corresponding Soft button.
h. Name of the edit page. If the required item does not appear in the
menu, use the buttons to select the next
i. Name of the current Performance in edit. or previous menu.
j. Name of the current track in edit (pages con-
taining parameters relating to single tracks).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit overview 13•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. If you wish to modify a single track of the 7. If necessary, pass on to another editor. You
Performance, select the track with the Soft can use the buttons , or return to the
buttons A...H. You can also select the track main menu with ESCAPE and select another
by moving the cursor to it relative parameter editor with DIAL+ENTER.
with the directional arrows / .
8. Press ESCAPE twice, or the corresponding
6. Select the parameter to modify with the di- edit button to return to the main display of
rectional arrows. the current operating mode.
7. Modify the parameter with the DIAL or the 9. If you have modified a Performance, save the
numeric keypad. modifications by pressing STORE PER-
FORMANCE. If you have modified a Sound,
8. Press ESCAPE or the button corresponding
save the Sound to the Sound Library.
to the edit environment to return to the main
display of the current operating mode.
9. If you have modified a Performance, save the ESCAPE THE EDIT ENVIRONMENT
modifications by pressing STORE PER-
FORMANCE. There are three ways of escaping from an edit
environment:
• press ESCAPE (as many times as neces-
EDIT PROCEDURE FOR COMPLEX STRUC- sary depending on the currently selected
TURE EDIT ENVIRONMENTS level).

1. Select the item that requires modifying (Per- • press the button corresponding to the func-
formance, Style, Song). tion in edit.

2. Press the button corresponding to the re- • press another button of the EDIT section to
quired edit environment in the EDIT. The pass to a different edit environment.
main menu containing a list of editors (mod-
ules) appears.
MEMORISING MODIFICATIONS TO A
3. Select the editor with the DIAL, or with the
directional arrows then press ENTER to gain
PERFORMANCE
access, or by specifying the editor number When you have completed your edit tasks, press
on the numerical keypad and confirming with STORE PERFORMANCE to save the modifica-
ENTER. tions to the current Performance. If you fail to
4. If you are not able to find the page you re- store your modifications, they will be irremedi-
quire, select it with the corresponding Soft ably lost when you select another Performance,
button. or reselect the same one. The modifications will
also be lost by pressing the START/STOP, PLAY
5. Select the parameter to modify with the di- , STOP, << or >> buttons.
rectional arrows.
In the case of Sound Editing (advanced feature),
6. Modify the parameter with the DIAL or the the tasks do not pertain to the Performances,
numerical keypad. therefore, you must remember to store the modi-
fied Sound to RAM.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

13•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 14 Edit Effects
Chapter 9 (The Digital Signal Processor) dis- EFFECTS

cusses how to assign the Effects to the Perform-

1
ances both for Style/RealTime mode and for Song
mode.
This chapter shows you how to edit the effect
parameters and save the modifications.
EFFECTS TYPE (F1)
Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section
to gain access to the «Edit Effects» environment. This function assigns the effects to the DSP. Each
Performance can have its own effect and the
The «Edit Effects» environment contains general general level (volume) can be regulated. The ef-
parameters that affect the instrument as a whole fect levels for each track are adjusted using the
(amount of general reverb), Performance param- «Send level» function.
eters (effects assigned to the DSPs), and track
parameters (amount of effects sends).
Group A & B
The Effects edit environment consists of only one Eff1. The Reverb selector. Rotating the Dial when
menu. this parameter is selected scrolls through the 24
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
available Reverb effects.

Note: Save the modifications Reverbs: refer to the table on page 5 for a de-
with STORE PERFORMANCE.
The parameter configurations tailed list of the Reverb effects.
that are memorized to the Per- Vol. General Reverb level (volume).
formances show the letter in
the top left hand corner of the Edit Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
I.D. Icon.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Group A & B
Eff2. The modulation effect selector (delay/cho-
Page stored in Performance Performance rus/flanger, etc). Rotating the Dial when this pa-
rameter is selected scrolls through the 32 avail-
able Modulation effects.
Effects: refer to the table on page 6 for a detailed
list of the modulation effects.
Vol. General Modulation effect Level (volume).
Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

Group A & B
Effect 2 to Effect 1: Determines the quantity of
feedback of Eff2 into Eff1.
Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maxi-
Edit Effects - Effects type selection mum feedback of the signal).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Effects 14•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SEND LEVEL (F2) GENERAL EFF1 BALANCE (F3)
This function controls the effects level (volume) Value added or subtracted from the general
for each track. The zero level corresponds to a reverb level, regardless of the selected Perform-
deactivated effect for the track. ance. Allows you to adapt the reverberation of
the WK4 to the natural reverb of the surround-
Grp (Group) ings.
In Style/RealTime mode, the Group parameter The reverb duration varies according to the di-
cannot be selected. The accompaniment tracks mensions and absorption characteristics of the
are processed by the Group B effects. The key- surroundings in which you play. You can pro-
board tracks are processed by the Group A ef- gram the WK4 reverb in order to obtain the best
fects. results over headphones, or for home listening,
and then regulate this parameter to adapt the
In Song mode, the Group parameter can be reverb to the surroundings in which you play in
switched from A to B and vice versa. public.

E1 (Effect 1 - Reverbs) The setting is not retained in memory at power

down.
Regulates the send level of Effect 1 (reverb) for
each track. Assignable values: 0% (all dry) ... 100% (all wet).
The value of 70% corresponds to the factory set
Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet). value.

E2 (Effects 2 - Modulations)
Regulates the send level of Effect 2 (modulations)
for each track.
Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet).

Track in edit

Edit Effects - Send level (Style/RealTime mode) Edit Effects - General Effect Balance

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

14•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EFFECTS PROGRAMMING (F4) Room Size

Editor of the currently selected effect. The pa- Dimensions of the simulated room. The time
rameter values and parameter configurations vary lapse between the first reflection and the remain-
according to the «Effect type» selected. der of the reverb.

The tables at the end of this chapter list the Ef-

Diffusion
fect types and relative values of the parameters.
Duration of the reverb (Early type reverbs).

L.P.Filter (Low Pass Filter)

Rev.Time (Reverb Time)
Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Decay time of the reverb.

Delay (delays)
Delay (reverbs)
Velocity of the delay repetition.
Initial delay between the emission of the original
sound (dry signal) and the reverb (wet signal).
Feedback (delays)
H.F.Decay (High Frequency Decay) Interaction of the delay with itself. Determines
the number of repetitions of the delay.
of the high frequencies. The parameter indicates
the final frequency of the filter. The decay of the
high frequencies has a longer duration than that Feedback (phasers and flangers)
of the low frequencies. Interaction of the phaser or flanger with itself.
Determines the harmonic amount of the effect.

DSP1 Parameters DSP3 Parameters

Freq.Modul. (Frequency Modulation)
(GrpA-Eff1) (GrpB-Eff1) Modulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects.
DSP2 Parameters DSP4 Parameters
(GrpA-Eff2) (GrpB-Eff2) Depth
Depth of the action of the effect.

Feedback (Distortion)
Saturation of the distortion.

Speed (rotary effects)

Time required to pass from slow to fast or vice
versa.

Rotary
Edit Effects - Effect programming
(Edit of the Effect assigned to the Performance) Slow/fast velocity.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Effects 14•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Semitone
Transposition in semitone steps.

Detune
Detuning over a range of ±100 Cents.

Low Gain
Enhancement of the low frequencies.

Medium Gain
Enhancement of the mid frequencies.

High Gain
Enhancement of the high frequencies.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

14•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Effect 1 - Reverb table

Effect 1 - Reverbs
1 Hall 1 Rev.Time [0-0.1s ... 99-10s] Delay [0ms ... 99ms] H.F.Decay [Ø-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
2 Hall 2 “ “ “
3 Hall 3 “ “ “
4 Warm Hall “ “ “
5 Long Hall “ “ “
6 Stereo Concert “ “ “
7 Chamber “ “ “
8 Studio Room 1 “ “ “
9 Studio Room 2 “ “ “
10 StudioRoom 3 “ “ “
11 Club Room 1 “ “ “
12 Club Room 2 “ “ “
13 Club Room 3 “ “ “
14 Vocal “ “ “
15 Metal Vocal “ “ “
16 Plate 1 “ “ “
17 Plate 2 “ “ “
18 Church “ “ “
19 Mountains “ “ “
20 Falling “ “ “
21 Early 1 Room Size [0 ... 64] Diffusion [0 ... 127] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
22 Early 2 Room Size [0 ... 64] Delay [0 ... 127] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
23 Early 3 Room Size [0 ... 64] Delay [0 ... 127] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
24 Stereo Room Size [0 ... 64] Rev.Time [0-0.1s ... 99-10s] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Effects 14•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Effect 2 - Modulation effects table

Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulations
1 Mono Delay 1 Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Feedback [0% ... 99%] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
2 Mono Delay 2 “ “ “
3 Stereo Delay 1 “ “ “
4 Stereo Delay 2 “ “ “
5 Multitap Delay 1 “ “ “
6 Multitap Delay 2 “ “ “
7 Ping-pong “ “ “
8 Panmix Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Freq.Mod. [0-bypass ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100]
9 Chorus 1 Freq.Mod. [0-0kHz ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
10 Chorus 2 “ “ “
11 Ensemble 1 “ “ “
12 Ensemble 2 “ “ “
13 Phaser 1 Freq.Mod. [0-0Hz ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100] Feedback [0% ... 99%]
14 Phaser 2
15 Flanger 1 Freq.Mod. [0-0kHz ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100] Feedback [0% ... 99%]
16 Flanger 2 “ “ “
17 ChorusDelay 1 Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Freq.Mod. [0-0Hz ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100]
18 ChorusDelay 2 “ “ “
19 FlangerDelay 1 Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Freq.Mod. [0-0Hz ... 30-6kHz] Depth [0 ... 100]
20 FlangerDelay 2 “ “ “
21 Dubbing Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Feedback [0% ... 99%] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
22 Distortion Depth [0% ... 100%] Feedback [0% ... 100%] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
23 DistortionDelay “ Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Feedback [0% ... 99%]
24 Pitch Shifter 1 Semitone [-12 ... +12] Detune [-100c ... _100c] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
25 Pitch Shifter 2 “ “ “
26 ShiftDelay Delay [0-0ms ... 125-500ms] Feedback [0% ... 99%] Detune [-100c ... _100c]
27 Rotary 1 Speed [1s ... 11s] Rotary [slow/fast] L.P.Filter [0-bypass ... 10-16kHz]
28 Rotary 2 “ “ “
29 EQ Jazz Low Gain Medium Gain High Gain
30 EQ Pop “ “ “
31 EQ Rock “ “ “
32 EQ Classic “ “ “

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

14•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 15 Edit MIDI
The «Edit MIDI» environment contains general MIDI

parameters and parameters pertaining to single

tracks. 2

Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section to gain

access to the «Edit MIDI» environment.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Save any modifications with STORE

PERFORMANCE. The Performance memorizes
pages whose icons shows the symbol .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Page memorized to Performance

the Performance Track in edit

MIDI CHANNELS (F1)

This parameter assigns the MIDI channel (1…16)
and MIDI port (A or B) to each track.
The Performances are independently program-
mable for a MIDI configuration.
The «MIDI Lock» option (soft button F8) locks
the current configuration for all Performances,
overriding the individual MIDI configurations of
the Performances when you change Style or
Performance. Edit MIDI - MIDI Channels
(MIDI Channels and ports for each track)

MIDI IN port MIDI OUT

(A or B) channel
(1...16)
MIDI OUT MIDI OUT
channel port (A or B)
(1...16)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit MIDI 15•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CONFIGURATION (F2) MIDI OUT icon

This function sets the track configuration which When on (icon showing), the events generated
determines how the tracks are connected to MIDI by the track are sent to an external MIDI device
IN, to the keyboard, to the sound generator and via the MIDI OUT port. When OFF, the track does
MIDI OUT. not transmit MIDI data to external units.

The keyboard icon also indicates the Common

Channel (equivalent to the incorporated keyboard
of the WK4).
Pass from one icon to another with the cursor
buttons. Modify the status of the icons with the
DIAL (when the icon shows, the parameter is on;
when the parameter is deactivated, the icon is
substituted by OFF).

MIDI IN icon
When on (icon showing), the track responds to
MIDI data received at the MIDI IN port. When
OFF, the track does not receive external MIDI
data.

Keyboard/Common Channel icon

When on (icon showing), the track can be played
from the keyboard. When OFF, the track cannot
be played from the keyboard, but can receive data
via MIDI, or it can be exploited by a Song or Style.
The icon also corresponds to a master keyboard
connected via the Common Channel, which simu-
lates the WK4 keyboard and on-board control- Edit MIDI - Configuration
lers (pedals, trackball). (track configuration - internal/external connections)

Internal sound generator icon

When on (icon showing), the events generated
by the track are sent to the internal sound en-
gine. When OFF, the track is not connected to
the internal sound engine, but can send data to MIDI keyboard/ internal sound MIDI
an expander via MIDI OUT. IN Common Channel generator OUT

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

15•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MIDI FILTERS (F3) GENERAL SETTINGS (F4)
This function programs MIDI Filters for data re- This function provides settings that influence the
ceived at MIDI IN and data sent via MIDI OUT. instrument as a whole (saved to the Setup).
It is possible to program up to 7 MIDI IN filters
and 7 MIDI OUT filters for each track. MIDI Clock

Options: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono A MIDI synchronizer to synchronize WK4 with ex-
touch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, ternal rhythm units and sequencers.
ControlChange 64...127. Setting “Internal” renders WK4 independent
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
from the Clock of external MIDI devices.

Hint: To avoid transmitting ProgramChange
data to an expander connected to the WK4 MIDI Setting “External” places WK4 on stand-by, wait-
OUT, activate the MIDI OUT ProgramChange filter ing to receive the PLAY, START or STOP com-
for the track. mand from the external device connected to the
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

instrument’s MIDI In port. The external device

also controls the tempo.
The Song Position Pointer is received and trans-
mitted with the same precision as MIDI (1 tic = 1/
24th of a beat). This parameter allows a Song to
be stopped at a precise point.
Options: Internal, External.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: WK4 receives or transmits MIDI Clock on

the same MIDI port (A or B) as the Common
Channel.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit MIDI - MIDI Filters Edit MIDI - General settings

(filters of data in reception and transmission for each track)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit MIDI 15•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clock send MIDI IN fix velocity
Determines whether or not the WK4 MIDI Clock Enables the Velocity switch. If this parameter is
is transmitted to external MIDI devices. If deac- set to OFF, notes are received via MIDI IN with
tivated, WK4 does cannot control the tempo and the correct velocity value. Other values set the
the Start/Stop of MIDI devices connected to the indicated value to the notes received.
WK4 MIDI OUT.
Options: Off, 1 ... 127.
Options: On, Off.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: Some accordions transmit velocity at a

MIDI Merge fixed level, not able to be regulated. With this
parameter, it is possible to modify the velocity value
Enables data received at MIDI IN to be merged received by the accordion.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

with data transmitted at MIDI OUT.

If Merge=Off, the data received at MIDI IN are
System Exclusive
directed to the internal sound engine and to MIDI
THRU. NB: Not enabled in the current version of the
WK4 software.
If Merge=On, the data received at MIDI IN are
directed to the internal sound engine, to MIDI
THRU and MIDI OUT. Unlike data sent from MIDI System Exclusive ID#
THRU, the data transmitted via MIDI OUT are NB: Not enabled in the current version of the
processed by the tracks (volume, pan, transpose, WK4 software.
velocity curve, MIDI filters).
Options: On, Off. Macro
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
NB: Not enabled in the current version of the

Note: The parameter cannot be programmed WK4 software.
with the COMPUTER port is active («Computer»
editor of «Edit General»).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MIDI IN Transpose
Enables the transposition of data received at MIDI
IN. Deactivating this parameter can be useful to
avoid unwanted transpositions when you program
Songs with a computer.
A computer operates as a THRU device. After
receiving data by a WK4 track which has been
transposed, the computer can return the notes
to the same track which will transpose them fur-
ther. This will not occur if MIDI IN Transpose is
deactivated.
Options: On, Off.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

15•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 General MIDI BankSelect
Represents the General MIDI compatibility switch Enables the reception and transmission of the
which requires setting when loading or saving BankSelect MSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB
MIDI files. (CC32) message.
Set this parameter to ON in the following situa- Options: On, Off.
tions:
• before loading a GM compatible MIDI file
which does not contain the GENERAL MIDI
ON flag.
• before saving a perfectly GM compatible MIDI
file (the General MIDI On flag is inserted in
the file and the Program Changes of the
drumkits are converted to Program Changes
compatible with General MIDI).
The table shows the drumkit Program Changes
according to the status of the parameter.
Options: On, Off.

MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic)

PC-GM PC-BS WK4 Drumkit GM Drumkit WK4
1…8 113-2 Standard DK-STAND1
9 … 16 114-2 Room DK-ROOM
17 … 24 115-2 Power DK-POWER
25 116-2 Electronic DK-ELECT
26 … 32 117-2 TR-808 DK-HOUSE
33 … 40 118-2 Jazz DK-JAZZ1
41 … 48 119-2 Brush DK-BRUSH
49 … 128 120-2 Orchestra DK-ORCH

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit MIDI 15•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 COMMON CHANNEL/ARRANGEMENT (F5) Chord to Arr.1 / Chord to Arr.2

This page presents parameters common to all Enables the parameters dedicated to the control
Performances. with a MIDI accordion. They are divided into two
parts:
The Common Channel is a MIDI channel dedi-
cated to special operations: Ch - MIDI channel.

• simulation of the keyboard and on-board con- In - MIDI IN port (A or B).

trollers (pedals). Chord to Arr.1 is dedicated to the chords, Chord
• transmission of Effects, Performance, Style to Arr.2 is dedicated to the Bass. The accordi-
and Song selected messages to WK4. onist can send notes for the automatic accompa-
niment from the chord section, from the bass
• transmission to WK4 of chord data for the section, or from both sections.
automatic accompaniment.
The Common Channel unites to these two chan-
As an alternative to the Common Channel, chord nels and their notes contribute to the formation
messages for the accompaniment can be re- of the chord for the automatic accompaniment.
ceived on the MIDI channels specified by Chord
to Arr.1 and Chord to Arr.2, conceived principally Options: Off, 1 ... 16.
for the connection of a MIDI accordion.

Common Channel
Enables the Common Channel. This parameter
is divided into three parts:
Ch - MIDI channel assigned to the Common
Channel (IN and OUT).
In - MIDI IN port (A or B).
Out - MIDI OUT port (A or B).
The channel assigned to the Common Channel
is no longer available for the tracks of the exter-
nal sequencer. The Common Channel is re-
served to special tracks dedicated to the control
of effects and other parameters.
ProgramChange and ControlChange data re-
ceived on the Common Channel select Style,
Song, Performance, Effects and other parameters
listed in the Appendix.
Options: Off, 1 ... 16.

Edit MIDI - Common/Arrangement

(Common Channel and arrangement control)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

15•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MIDI DUMP... (F6) MIDI LOCK (F8)
NB: Not enabled in the current version of the When this function is selected (shown in nega-
WK4 software. tive highlight), the current MIDI channel configu-
ration and filters of the tracks is locked for all
Performances. The individual situations of Per-
LOCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7) formances are overridden.
The Local On setting (the default status of the When the option is not selected, the tracks are
instrument) corresponds to the situation when the reset to the settings of the current Performance.
keyboard is connected to the internal sound en- The MIDI Lock setting is conserved in memory
gine. after power down. It is saved to the Setup.
Press F7 to set the instrument for Local Off op-
eration (shown in negative highlight). Local Off
operation disconnects the WK4 keyboard from
the internal sound generator. The keyboard
sends data from the Group A MIDI OUT on chan-
nel 1. In Local Off mode, the internal sound en-
gine responds only to data received at MIDI IN.
The keyboard cannot play the internal WK4
sounds directly.
Activate Local Off to program Songs on an ex-
ternal sequencer. WK4 transmits data to the ex-
ternal sequencer, and the sequencer returns the
data to the WK4 internal sound engine.

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit MIDI 15•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

15•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 16 Edit Mixer
«Edit Mixer» allows you to control volume, pan, MIXER

effect send and output assignment for each track.

3
Also included is an equalizer that is applied to all
tracks.
Press the MIXER button in the EDIT section to
gain access to the «EDIT MIXER» environment.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Save the changes with STORE

PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize
the pages whose icon shows the symbol .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

VOLUME (F1) PAN (F2)

You can regulate the track volume with the DIAL Track position in the stereo panorama. Moving
or the sliders A…H. the Pan all to the left or all to the right, you can
direct the sound to one output instead of both
In edit, each slider corresponds to a track (the outputs.
LED near the A ... H letters is on).
Value range: -31 (all to the left) ... 0 (center) ...+31
Value range: 0 ... 127. (all to the right).

Performance
Track in edit

Edit Mixer - Volume Edit Mixer - Pan

(track volume) (track position in the stereo panoramic)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Mixer 16•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 RANDOM PAN (F3) AUDIO OUT (F4)
Random changes of the sound position in the Routing of the tracks to the audio outputs. The
stereo panorama. This change renders the sound parameter is important only when the tracks are
more realistic. connected to the internal sound generation.
Value range: 0 (no effects) ... 7 (maximum ran- Normally the WK4 sends sounds to both LEFT
domness). and RIGHT outputs, but it is possible to send
some tracks to the auxiliary 1 and 2 outputs, for
an external mixing operation and a wider sound
‘opening’.
The outputs selection also affects the internal
amplification.
Options: Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2.

Edit Mixer - Random Pan Edit Mixer - Audio Outputs

(track audio outputs)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

16•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EQUALIZER (F5)
Two band general equalization, corresponding to
the Treble/Bass controls of stereo devices.
The graphic representation shows the level and
the intersection zone of the two bands.

Low Frequency
The highest limit of the Bass frequencies.
Value range: 100Hz ... 400Hz.

Low gain
Control of the Low frequencies.
Value range: -12dB ... +12dB.

High Frequency
The lowest limit of the High frequencies.
Value range: 3Hz ... 15Hz.

High gain
Control of the High frequencies.
Value range: 3Hz ... 15Hz.

Edit Mixer - Equalizer

(High/Low general equalization)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Mixer 16•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

16•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 17 Edit Controllers/Pads
In «Edit Controllers/Pads» you can program how CNT / PADS

the individual tracks of a Performance react to 4

the Trackball, the programmable Pedals and pro-
grammable Pads.
Press the CNT./PADS button in the EDIT section
to gain access to the «Edit Controller/Pads” en-
vironment.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Modulation 2

Note: Save the changes with STORE
PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize Modulation is applied by vertical (up/down) move-
the pages whose icon shows the symbol .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ments of the Trackball. The parameter can be
set to either On of Off.
The same control can be assigned to a switch
TRACKBALL (F1) action pedal. See “Pedals Programming (F2)”.
Activates the action of the Trackball for single Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12.
tracks. Modulation: Off, On.
Each track can be independently programmed
for the action of the preset Pitchbend and/or the
Modulation functions of the Trackball. This con-
trolling device is spring loaded to return it to the
central position.

PitchBend 1
Performance
Pitch Bend is applied by horizontal (left/right)
Track in edit
movements of the Trackball. The parameter of-
fers a maximum pitch excursion of 12 semitones
and Off.
The same control can be assigned to a continu-
ous control pedal. See “Pedals Programming
(F2)”.

Edit Controllers/Pads - Trackball

Pitch/Mod assignment for each track

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Controllers/Pads 17•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PEDALS PROGRAMMING (F2) • «CONTINUOUS»: Off, PitchBend, Pitch+,
Pitch–, Filter Cutoff Frequency (CC74), Reso-
Here you can assign a function to the pedals 1, 2 nance (CC71), Modulation (CC01), Breath
and 3. All three Pedals can be set to operate as controller (CC02), Volume (CC07), Pan
either Switch or Continuous controls. (CC10), Expression (CC11)
Switch action pedals control on/off functions such Refer to the Pedal function tables at the end of
as Soft, Sostenuto, Damper, Start/Stop, Fill, Ro- this chapter for brief explanations of each func-
tary Slow/Fast, etc. tion.
Continuous control pedals control functions such
as Volume, Expression, Pitch and Modulation.
PEDALS ASSIGNMENT (F3)
Type of pedal This parameter enables or disables the tracks for
The first column on the left of the display selects the action of pedals 1, 2 and 3.
the type of pedal (Switch or Continuous). Options: On, Off.
Options: Switch, or Continuous.

Parameters assignable to the pedals

The control functions assignable to the pedals
depend on the type of pedal.
• «SWITCH»: Off, Damper, Sostenuto, Soft,
Start/Stop, Key Start, Intro, Fill <, Fill =, Fill
>, Ending, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Var >,
Var <, Perf >, Perf <, Harmony, Bass to Low.,
Arrange On/Off, Fade In/Out, Tempo >, Tem-
po <, Punch, Rotary Slow/Fast, Minor, 7th,
Dim, Min 7th, Maj 7th, Freeze Chord.

Edit Controllers/Pads - Pedals programming Edit Controllers/Pads - Pedals assignment

(Function assignments for the Pedals) (pedal enable/disable)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

17•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PADS (F4) Dynamic - Note velocity. Range
The four PAD buttons are independently program- 0…127
mable. Each button can be configured to react Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary
according to the settings of various parameters. velocity from slow to fast or vice versa.
Pad # Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of
the current display (.BMP) into RAM.
Determines the Function to assign to the pad. The images can be saved to an MS-
Functions assignable: Off, KeyAssign, Rotary DOS disk and elaborated by a graphic
slow/fast, Hardcopy. program running on a personal
computer.
Off - pad deactivated.
KeyAssign - The pad plays the assigned
note. The Volume, Pan, Transposition
and MIDI OUT channel settings corre-
spond to those of track 6. The Note and
ProgramChange are defined by the fol-
lowing parameters which appear only
when this option is selected Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display.
Save (F2) - saves the captured image to an MS-DOS disk.
PC - Program Change. Range 1…128. Reset (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the
RAM. Each image uses approx. 6 KBytes of RAM.
C#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank Ignore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing
Select MSB). Range 1…128. the image.

C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank

Select LSB). This parameter does not re-
quire a setting to play an internal WK4 PED./PAD (PEDALS/PADS LOCK) (F8)
sound. Range 1…128. When selected, the Pedals/Pads Lock conserves
Note - Determines the note played. the current pedal and pad programmed status
Range: C-1 to G9 for all Performance and Style selections.
To enable the recall of the Pedal/Pads param-
eters, make sure the Padlock is open (unlocked).
The Pedals/Pads Lock remains in memory after
power down. It is saved to the Setup.

Edit Controllers/Pads - Pads

(pad programming tasks)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Controllers/Pads 17•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE SWITCH PEDAL FUNCTIONS Arrange On/Off Activates/deactivates the Arrange
(affect enabled tracks of the current Performance) On/Off button.
Fade In/Out Activates/deactivates the Fade In/
Off No effect
Out function.
Damper Applies the sustain effect to released
Tempo > Increases the Tempo setting by one
notes.
unit at a time.
Sostenuto Sustains only the notes played at the
Tempo < Decreases the Tempo setting by one
time of pressing the pedal; notes
unit at a time.
played after pressing the pedal are
not affected. Punch Activates/deactivates the Punch re-
cording function during recording
Soft Attenuates the sound.
operations.
Start/Stop Simulates the Start/Stop button.
Rotary s/f Changes the speed of the Rotary
Key Start Activates/deactivates the Key Start effect from Slow to Fast or vice versa.
function.
Minor Converts the currently held chord to
Intro Activates the Intro. the minor chord.
Fill < Activates the Fill< function. Dim Converts the currently held chord to
Fill = Actvates the Fill function. the diminished chord.

Fill > Activates the Fill> function. Min 7th Converts the currently held chord to
the minor 7th chord.
Ending Activates the Ending function.
Maj 7th Converts the currently held chord to
Variation 1 Switches to Variation 1. the Major 7th chord.
Variation 2 Switches to Variation 2.
Variation 3 Switches to Variation 3.
Variation 4 Switches to Variation 4.
Var. > Switches to the next Variation.
Var. < Switches to the previous Variation.
Perf. > Advances to the next Performance.
N.B. To select several Perform-
ances in increasing order, all the
Performances you intend to recall
must be programmed for the action
of the Perf > function.
Perf. < Returns to the previous Perform-
ance.
N.B. To select several Perform-
ances in decreasing order, all the
Performances you intend to recall
must be programmed for the action
of the Perf < function.
Harmony Activates/deactivates the Harmony
button.
Bass to Low. Activates/deactivate the Bass to
Lowest function.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

17•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE CONTINUOUS PEDAL FUNCTIONS
(affect enabled tracks of the current Performance)
Off No effect
Pitch Bend Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The
Pitch Bend sweeps from the maxi-
mum negative to maximum positive
value of the Pitch setting in the
Wheels Pit/Mod function. The cen-
tral position of the continuous pedal
corresponds to 0 pitch.
Pitch + Increases the Pitch up the value set
in the Pit/Mod parameter.
Pitch – Decreases the Pitch down the value
set in the Pit/Mod parameter.
Filter Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff pa-
rameter in Edit Perf Sound.
Resonance Affects the Resonance parameter
Modulation Applies Modulation (CC01) to tracks
activated for the effect (in Pit/Mod).
Breath Cnt. Generates Breath controller (CC02)
data (useful for external MIDI devices
capable of recognizing the control-
ler).
Volume Controls the general volume (CC07).
Pan Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to
right.
Expression Controls the volume from 0 level to
the maximum setting of the mixer
levels.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Controllers/Pads 17•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

17•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 18 Edit Tracks/Split
In «Edit Tracks/Splits» you can program param- T. SPLIT

eters that are exclusive to the tracks and the

5
Harmony function which is exploited by the Styles.
Press the T. SPLIT button in the EDIT section to
gain access to the «Edit Tracks/Split».
This section consists of two menus. Pass from
one to the other with the scroll menu buttons
( ).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Save the changes with STORE

PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize
the pages whose icon shows the symbol .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

TRANSPOSE (F1)
A track transposer which transposes in steps of
one semitone. The maximum transposition ob-
tainable is ±5 octaves.
Assignable values: –60…0…+60.

Edit Tracks/Split - Transpose (track transposition)

MASTER TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE

(F2)
Master Transpose (general transpose) enable/
disable for the track. Tracks set to Enable are
tuned to the scale selected in «Edit General».
Tracks set to Disable play with the Equal tem-
perament.
The Master Transpose parameter is disabled for
the drum track to avoid drum remappings due to
transpositions.

Edit Tracks/Split - Master Transpose enable/disable

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Tracks/Splits 18•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DETUNE (F3)
A fine tune function for single tracks. Each step
is equivalent to 1/64th semitone.
Assignable values: - 63…0…+63.

Edit Tracks/Split - Detune

(Track fine tuning operations)

RANDOM PITCH (F4)

Creates slight pitch variations freely and is use-
ful to simulate the pitch instability typical of acous-
tic instruments. It is advisable to assign a value
of 1 or 2 to wind instruments.
Assignable values: 0 (no effect) ... 7 (maximum
randomness).

Edit Tracks/Split - Random pitch

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

18•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MODE/PRIORITY (F5) VELOCITY CURVE (F6)
(1) Selects the polyphonic/monophonic mode for Provides a selection of Velocity response curves.
the tracks. (2) Activates/deactivates the Priority As well as modifying the velocity data, velocity
option (guaranteed minimum polyphony for the curves allow the creation of crossfade effects
track). between two tracks.
For example, it is possible to assign two tracks
Mode with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two
This parameter sets a track to play opposing linear curves [ex. 1 & 4], or two oppos-
monophonically (one note at a time) or ing exponential curves [ex. 2 & 5]. The resulting
polyphonically (two or more simultaneous notes). effect is one of hearing the sound of the second
Mono R gives priority to the right note, Mono L to track fade in by gradually increasing the keystrike
the left note, Mono T to the last note played. velocity while the sound of the first track fades
out. Playing softly triggers one sound and play-
Options: Poly, Mono L, Mono R, Mono T. ing hard triggers the second. Playing with “in be-
tween” values creates a blend of both sounds.
Priority
Priority guarantees a minimum polyphony to a

EFF
track with respect to others and avoids “note-
stealing”. In complex arrangements, a track set VEL 0 1 2 3
with Priority=Off can remain without notes, while
those with Priority=On will not be subjected to
“note-stealing”.
4 5 6 7
Options: On, Off.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Avoid assigning Priority=On to too many

tracks, as this will cancel the function due to
conflicts between the assigned tracks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Tracks/Split - Mode/Priority Edit Tracks/Split - Dynamic Curve

(polyphonic/monophonic Mode and Priority)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Tracks/Splits 18•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 VELOCITY RANGE (F7) HARMONY (F1)
Sets velocity limits for each track above and be- Allows you to choose from a selection of harmony
low which the sound will not play. These limits types. The Harmony function is enabled and disa-
allow the creation of cross-switching effects by bled by pressing the HARMONY button on the
assigning tracks different velocity ranges. control panel. Harmony is a function that affects
the instrument set to Styles/Performance mode
For example, to one track, assign a piano sound
when the keyboard is split (Upper/Lower and Multi
softened by a closed filter, while to another track,
modes). Songs are not affected.
assign the same piano sound with an open filter
to enhance the higher frequencies. Program the
first track to respond across a low velocity range Harmony type
and the second track across a higher range. The Provides a selection of harmony types (defined
result obtained is a piano which changes timbre by the tables at the end of the chapter)
depending on the velocity applied.
Close: the notes of a chord played be-
Assignable values: Low range 0…127 - High low the Split Point harmonize the melody of
range: 127…0. the right hand. The harmonizing chord is a
closed (or tight) position and the notes of the
Press the right button to pass to the sec- left hand are copied to the right hand (see
ond page of options. table).
Open 1: an open chord (see table).
Open 2: similar to Open 1 (see table).
Smart: similar to Close, but based on the
harmonizing tables.
Duet: similar to Smart, but limited to two
notes.
Block: based on the harmonizing tables.

Edit Tracks/Split - Velocity Range Edit Tracks/Split - Harmony

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

18•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Octave 1: doubles the note of the right hand
by playing an octave higher. No left hand
chord required.
Octave 2: doubles the note of the right
hand, one octave above as well as one oc-
tave below. No left hand chord required.
Peterson: doubles the note of the right hand
with a note two octaves below. No left hand
chord required.
Jazz: adds two notes above the note played
by the right hand, at intervals of a fourth and
a minor seventh. No left hand chord required.
Rock: adds three notes of the perfect chord
below the note played with the right hand.
No left hand chord required.

Track
Selects the track to which the harmony type is
assigned.
Options: tracks 3…8

HARMONY TYPE STRUCTURES

Close Open 1 Open 2 Smart

Duet Block Jazz Rock

Harmony example. The left hand plays a chord in C Major. The black notes represent the melody, the white note the
harmony added by the Harmony option.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Tracks/Splits 18•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DELAY (F2)
Allows to program a delayed entry for a sound
after striking a key and is valid for tracks set for
key-play. After striking the keys, the sound is
reproduced after the time indicated by this pa-
rameter. The value is expressed in 1/192nds of
a quarter note (crotchet) and the [+] sign appears
when the value exceeds that of the indicated
musical note.
Delay is synchronized with the Clock and affects
the internal generation as well as MIDI OUT.
Assignable values: 0 (off)…192 (1
) … 384 (2
) Edit Tracks/Split - Delay
… 576 (3
) … 768 (4
).

KEY RANGE (F3)

This parameter is valid only when the instrument
is set to Song Mode.
Assigns a keyboard extension (highest and low-
est notes) to a track.
Assignable values: A0) … C8.

Edit Tracks/Split - Key Range

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

18•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CREATE TRACK (F5) COPY TRACK (F6)
This parameter is valid only when the instrument Copies one track to another. The destination track
is set to Song Mode. assumes all the programmed settings of the
source track.
Creates a track with default values. Pressing the
Soft button F6 opens the «Create Track» dialog Press the corresponding Soft button to open the
window: «Copy track» dialog window.

Procedure: Procedure:
1. Press F5 (Create track). 1. Select the track to copy.
2. Specify the number of the track to create with 2. Press F6 (Copy track).
the DIAL or numeric keypad. If the track that 3. Specify the number of the track to copy with
you specify already exists, the relative pa- the DIAL or numeric keypad.
rameters are assigned default values.
4. Press ENTER to confirm the copy or ES-
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to can- CAPE to cancel the operation. The settings
cel. of the source track are copied to the destina-
tion track.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: This operation does not copy the notes

captured by the sequencer but only the settings
such as sound, transposition, pan. To copy the
notes, use the «Copy events» function (in «Edit
Style» or «Edit Song»).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Tracks/Splits 18•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ERASE TRACK (F7)
This parameter is valid only when the instrument
is set to Song Mode.
Cancels the selected track.
Procedure:
1. Select the track to cancel. A track engaged
by the sequencer cannot be erased.
2. Press F7 to cancel the track.
You are prompted to confirm the operation:

3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to can-

cel.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: This command is valid for Song mode.

In Style/RealTime mode, it is not possible to cancel
tracks.

Note: It is not possible to cancel track that
contains note information. If a track shows the
seq-play or mute icon with notes, it cannot be
cancelled.

Hint: Cancel Song tracks that are not used.
The resulting Song file will occupy less memory on
disk.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

18•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 19 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch
«Edit Perf Sound» and «Edit Sound Patch» are This section discusses SOUNDS in detail.
both edit facilities which permit the rapid modifi-
For details regarding Sound Patch editing, go to
cation of a Sound or a Sound Patch by means of
page 5 of this chapter.
‘macro’ edit parameters.
The modifications are associated to the tracks
and not to the Sound or Sound Patch, therefore,
THE GENERAL EDIT PROCEDURE:
any WK4 Sound that you assign to the edited
track will inherit the same modifications. If the 1. Select or create a Performance containing
same Sound/Sound Patch is recalled by a differ- the Sound or Drumkit/Sound Patch that re-
ent track or Performance, it will not play with the quires editing.
same modifications. Modified Sounds are iden-
2. Select the track to which the Sound/S.Patch
tified by the symbol . to be edited is assigned.
In Performances and Style-Performances, the 3. Press SOUND in the EDIT section to enter
Drumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accom- the «Edit Perf Sound» or «Edit Sound Patch»
paniment tracks. When you change Style or editor.
Performance and cause a change in the accom-
paniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also 4. Modify the parameters according to your re-
changes. Performances which contain a modi- quirements.
fied Drumkit/Sound Patch are identified by the 5. Press SOUND or ESCAPE to exit the editor.
symbol . 6. Save the modifications to the current Perform-
Advanced Edit Sound ance by pressing STORE PERFORMANCE
then ENTER.
A disk-based Operating System update can be
loaded into the WK4 which features an advanced During the editing tasks, you can periodically
Edit Sound facility. This User Program, accessed store to the current Performance by pressing
via the Option button, allows you to intervene di- STORE PERFORMANCE + ENTER.
rectly on the sound parameters, not on track pa- 7. Save the Performance to disk for future use.
rameters as in «Edit Perf Sound». For more in-
formation about the advanced «Edit Sound» pro- ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: If you fail to store your modifications,

gram, contact your local Generalmusic dealer. they will be irremediably lost when you select
another Performance, or reselect the same one.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sound and Sound Patch

The term “Sound” refers to all the WK4 Sounds
that are not Drumkits, nor contain a dynamic
switch. “Sound Patch” is a generic term used to
describe a Drumkit or a Sound containing a dy-
namic switch.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Perf Sound 19•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Edit Perf Sound

In «Edit Perf Sound», you can program the pa- SOUND

rameters that are exclusive to the tracks. Any

6
Sound, therefore, that you assign to the track will
inherit the modifications applied.
Select a track containing the Sound that you wish
to modify and press the SOUND button in the
EDIT section to gain access to the «Edit Perf
Sound» environment.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: Save the changes with STORE ous oscillators.

PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize
the page whose icon shows the symbol . Given that the higher number of oscillators per
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

voice the lower the overall polyphony of the in-

strument, most of the WK4 Sounds comprise one
or two oscillators.
OSCILLATORS AND LAYERS
The structure of the Sounds is represented in the
The WK4 Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or 3 layers. diagram below. The «Edit Perf Sound» tasks
The layers are sound generating units consisting modify all layers and all oscillators simultaneously.
of 1 or 2 oscillators and each oscillator elabo- This allows all the parameters of a Sound to be
rates a Wave sample. Consequently, each poly- edited by means of a few, simple operations.
phonic voice can be generated by 6 simultane-

SOUND
Performance
Track in edit Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Oscillator 2
Oscillator 1

Wave Filter Envelope

Sound structure. The number of layers and oscillators can

Edit Perf Sound: the edit parameters change from a Sound to another.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

19•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE PERF SOUND PARAMETERS Low-pass - Cuts into the higher frequen-
cies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a
Attack low harmonic content, the notes at the higher
end will be cut. This parameter regulates the
Represents the attack phase of the sound. This “brilliance” of the Sound. Lowering the cutoff
parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the frequency produces a mellow sound while an
sound to pass from the silent state to maximum increase produces a bright sound.
volume when a note is pressed. The modifica-
tions are expressed in relative values, subtract- High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies,
ing or adding them to the normal attack of the making the sound brighter. The higher the
Sound. value, the “lighter” the sound.

Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (un- Band-pass - Allows the entire band to pass.
changed) ... +63 (minimum rate). Modifies the phase of the Sound and is use-
ful when two oscillators that read the same
Wave are used.
Decay
Parametric boost - Enhances the frequen-
Represents the decay phase of the Sound. This
cies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a
parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the
sound brighter and stronger at the higher end.
sound to pass from its maximum volume level to
silence after the attack phase. The modifications Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies
are expressed in relative values, subtracting or around the cutoff frequency. Higher values
adding them to the normal decay of the Sound. renders the sound weaker at the high end.
Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (un- Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of
changed) ... +63 (minimum rate). the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63
(maximum increase of the cutoff frequency).
Release
Resonance
Represents the release phase of the Sound. This
parameter modifies the time taken (rate) for the Resonance creates a peak of emphasis at the
sound to pass to total silence after note release. cutoff frequency to the point of sending it in “auto-
The modifications are expressed in relative val- oscillation”. The higher values of resonance pro-
ues, subtracting or adding them to the normal duced effects that were common in the analog
release of the Sound. synths.
Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (un- Assignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 (un-
changed) ... +63 (minimum rate). changed) ... +63 (highest intensity).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Filter Cutoff
Note: The higher values of resonance causes

the filter to enter into “auto-oscillation”. If used
Modifies the cutoff frequency. Changes the fre- wisely, the auto-oscillation can create very
quency at which the filter intervenes on the sound. suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase
the output level excessively causing disturbing
The action of the filter varies according to the fil- distortion.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ter:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Perf Sound 19•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LFO Rate THE PERF SOUND OPTIONS
The Low Frequency Oscillator is normally used to
Copy to... (F6)
produce vibrato. In the WK4, the LFO can also
create a cyclic variation of the parameters of the Copies the modifications applied to the Sound of
filter. a track to a different Track of the same Perform-
ance. The parameter values are copied, NOT
The «LFO Rate» parameter determines the ve- the Sound, therefore, if a Piano sound is at the
locity of the oscillation. source and a Bass is at the destination, the Bass
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (un- sound will inherit the parameter modifications.
changed) ... +63 (maximum rate).

LFO Depth
«LFO Depth» determines the depth of the action
of the LFO, and, therefore, its audibility. Track - Select the track with the DIAL.
In Style/RealTime mode, the maximum
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (un-
number of tracks is 16, in Song mode, 32.
changed) ... +63 (maximum rate).
Restore track (F7)
LFO Delay Cancels the modifications of the selected track.
Determines the delay of the entry of the LFO. In 1. Press F7 to cancel. You are prompted to
acoustic instruments, vibrato generally enters af- reconfirm the operation.
ter the attack phase, and mainly forms part of
the sustain phase of the sound.
Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (un-
changed) ... +63 (maximum rate)..

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE

to cancel.

Restore all tracks (F8)

Cancels the modifications applied to all the tracks
of the Performance.
1. Press F8 to cancel. You are prompted to
reconfirm the operation.

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE

to cancel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

19•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Edit Sound Patch
SOUND
In «Edit Sound Patch», you can program the pa-
rameters that are exclusive to the tracks. Any 6
Drumkit or Sound Patch, therefore, that you as-
sign to the track will inherit the modifications ap-
plied.
Select a track containing the Drumkit or Sound
Patch that you wish to modify and press SOUND • In a Sound Patch, two different sounds are
in the EDIT section to gain access to the «Edit separated by a dynamic threshold in order that
Sound Patch» environment. playing harder recalls the sound at the higher dy-
namic level. Try playing, for example, the sound


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ORCHESTRA 48-3; play softly first, then harder
Note: Save the changes with STORE
PERFORMANCE. The Performances memorize and listen to the change in timbre.
the page whose icon shows the symbol .
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the
timbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike veloc-
The parameters in «Edit Sound Patch» differ to ity.
those of «Edit Perf Sound».
Although structurally identical, Drumkits and
Sound Patches differ as described:
SELECTING/MUTING THE DYNAMIC
LAYER
• In a Drumkit, a percussive instrument is as-
signed to each note of the keyboard. This allows Drumkits and Sound Patches have two dynamic
a Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI Layers. Normally, Sound Patches exploit both
channel. Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to
Layer 1. The soft buttons A and B select and
mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows
Track in edit you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound
Performance on the other layer. Once you enter into «Edit
Sound Patch» to select the Layers, it is not pos-
sible to select the tracks of the current Perform-
ance.

Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press

Edit Sound Patch: the parameters. the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit SoundPatch 19•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 THE EDIT SOUND PATCH PARAMETERS Tuning
Fine tune control, in steps of 1/64 of a semitone.
Edit note Assignable values: -64 ... +63.
Determines the note to edit.
Filter
Assignable values: A0 ... C8 (respectively the low-
est and highest note in an 88 note master key- Regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter.
board). Assignable values: -64 (maximum decrease) ...
0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase).
Sound
Determines the Sound assigned to the note. It is Exclude
possible to select any sound from the ROM- A linking number between two notes that exclude
Sounds, RAM-Sounds or RAM -Sounds. each other. Playing a note will interrupt another
note with the same exclude number. For exam-
Volume ple, if a Closed Hi-Hat and an Open Hi-Hat have
Determines the volume of the note in edit. This the same exclude number, they interrupt each
parameter can be useful to balance Sounds which other, exactly as occurs in reality.
differ greatly in volume. You can create as many linked percussive instru-
ment groups as there are Exclude numbers as-
Assignable values: 0 ... 127. signable.
Assignable values: Off, 1, 2, 3.
Pan
Determines the position of the note in the stereo Eff. 1 (Reverb)
panorama. In Drumkits, it is important to pan sin-
gle percussive instrument correctly. For exam- Effects send for the reverbs. The maximum value
ple, the toms are normally positioned in order that corresponds to a perfect balance between the
a snare drifts from one stereo channel to the other. original sound and the processed one.

Assignable values: -32 (all left) ... 0 (balanced) Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
... +32 (all right).
Eff 2 (Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation)
Transpose Effect sends for the modulation effects. The maxi-
Transposes the Sound assigned to the note. At mum value corresponds to a perfect balance be-
the zero value, a percussive instrument can be tween the original sound and the processed one.
distant from the sampled note, which is normally Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
around note C4. If the note in edit is below C4,
the Sound will require transposing upwards (posi- Audio Out
tive), while if above will require transposing down
(negative). Allows you to direct the sound assigned to the
note in edit to a preferred output.
Assignable values -64 ... +63.
Assignable values: Main, Left+Right, Out1+Out2,
Out1, Out2.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

19•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Dynamic switch THE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS
Threshold that divides Layer 1 from Layer 2.
When you play with a low velocity, the Sound Catch note... (F1)
assigned to Layer 1 is triggered. By playing Selects the note to place in edit by playing it on
harder, the Sound assigned to Layer 2 is trig- the keyboard.
gered. The value “0” causes the Sound assigned
to Layer 2 while the value “127” causes the Sound 1. Press F1 («Catch note...»).
assigned to Layer 1.
The following message appears.
Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

2. Play the note to place in edit.

The dialog window closes and the «Edit note»
parameter is modified.

Copy to Layer... (F2)

Copies an entire Layer to the other.

1. Select the Layer to copy with the soft buttons A

and B.
2. Press F2 («Copy to Layer...»). You are prompted
to reconfirm the operation.

3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - The copy will cancel the

programmed data in the destination Layer.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit SoundPatch 19•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Expand... (F3) Compare... (F4)
Extends the programmed parameters of the note ON/OFF switch. When active, the original pa-
in edit to a specified keyboard zone. rameter values of the Drumkit/Sound Patch in edit
are temporarily recalled in order to compare them
1. Select the note whose parameters require copy- with the current edited ones.
ing.
Restore (F6)
2. Press F3 («Expand...»).
This option restores the original Sound Patch or
The «Expand» dialog window opens:
cancels the last modifications applied after sav-
ing to the Performance.

1. Press F6 to open the following dialog window:

3. With the «From» parameter selected, rotate the

DIAL, or play a note to specify the lowest note of
the required keyboard zone.
2. Select the function required with the directional
4. Pass to the «To» parameter with the cursor but- arrows and press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to
ton . Rotate the DIAL, or play a note to specify cancel to abort.
the highest note of the required keyboard zone.
S.P. Performance - Restores the Drumkit/
Sound Patch in edit to its original status (can-
cels all editing operations applied to all notes).
Current edit - Cancels the current modifica-
tions and recalls the last saved parameter
settings of the Drumkit memorized in the
Performance.
5. Press ENTER to confirm the Expand command,
or ESCAPE to cancel. Store... (F8)
Confirming extends the programmed param- This option allows you to save the modifications
eters of the original note to the specified key- to a Performance or creates a new Drumkit/
board zone. Sound Patch file that can be used by any Per-
formance.
To conserve the modifications, save them before
selecting a Performance. Selecting a Perform-
ance before saving cancels all modifications ap-
plied.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

19•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Save the modifications as a new Drumkit/Sound 6. Press ENTER to save the new file to the selected
Patch file location.
1. Press F8 («Store...»). The new Drumkit/SoundPatch is now avail-
able as a RAM-Sound.
The «Store» dialog window opens:
As any new RAM-Sound, the new Drumkit/
SoundPatch will remain in memory after
power down. To conserve it and safeguard it
against future cancellation, save it to disk
using the Save Single Sound, Save All Sound
or Save All procedures.
2. The “File” option is shown selected. Press EN-
TER to confirm.
Save the modifications to a Performance
An insertion zone appears:
1. Press F8 («Store...»). The «Store» dialog win-
dow appears:

The insertion zone shows the Program-

Change and BankSelect MSB (CC00) to
which the new Drumkit/SoundPatch will be 2. Select the Performance option with the cursor
saved. button and press ENTER to confirm.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, or The «Drumkit store» dialog window opens:
use the DIAL or numeric keypad if you wish to
select a different location.
4. If you want to change the name of the file, press
the soft button F7 or F8.

3. Select the Performance or Style-Performance

option with the / cursor arrows.
4. Rotate the DIAL to select the Performance or Style
Performance Group to store to.

5. Insert a name using the method described in the 5. Move down to the Perf option with the cursor
Data Entry chapter of the User Guide. Press button and select the Performance to save to with
ENTER to confirm the name and return to the the DIAL.
Store window. 6. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit SoundPatch 19•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

19•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 20 Option
Option
The OPTION button is at the disposal of func-
tions implemented by future software updates.
In the software version on which your owner’s
manual is based, no software updates are imple-
mented through the OPTION function.
When you press this button, the following mes-
sage appears:

Press ESCAPE to close the window.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Option 20•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

20•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 21 Edit General
«Edit General» is where you can modify global GENERAL

parameters that affect the instrument as a whole

9
and which are not memorized to a Performance.
A part of the general parameter settings are con-
served in RAM and saved to disk as a Setup.
Press the GENERAL button in the EDIT section
to gain access to the «Edit General» environment.
«Edit General» is a complex structure environ- DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU PAGE
ment. When you press GENERAL for the first
The menu page shows 6 editors at the centre:
time, the main menu page appears where you
General Controls, Tuning/Scale, Pedalboard/
can access one of the 6 editors using one of the
Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and
following methods:
Mic/Line In.
a) rotate the DIAL to select the editor and
On the right hand side are 8 options which can
press ENTER;
be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons
b) use the directional arrows to select the F1…F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System
editor and press ENTER; Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore Per-
c) use the page scroll buttons to pass formances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Per-
directly from one editor to another; formances.

d) specify the editor number on the keypad After entering the editors, the options shown in
(with the KEY PAD LED on) and press EN- the options column change according to the edi-
TER. tor.
The description of the main menu options is at
the end of this chapter.

Edit General - Main menu

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit General 21•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 General Controls Tuning/Scale
KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MASTER PITCH
Determines the response of the keyboard to ve- Fine tunes the instrument as a whole in fractions
locity changes. of 1/64 of a semitone.
Assignable values: Soft, Medium soft, Medium, Assignable values: -63...+63.
Medium hard, Hard.

KEYBOARD SCALE
FOOTSWITCH POLARITY
Provides a selection of Temperaments (Scales).
Footswitch 1, 2, 3 Options: Equal, Inverse, Meantone, Werkmeister
Sets the polarity of the programmable pedals 1, III, Arabian 1, Arabian 2, User1 ... User8.
2, 3. Generalmusic pedals are of the NC type.
Options: NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally USER PROGRAMMABLE SCALES
Open).
You can program your own scale using the key-
board map shown at the bottom of the display.
This graphical representation shows the current
pitch of the notes of an octave. The octave cur-
rently in edit is shown in the title bar directly above
the keyboard (e.g. Octave C-1/B-1). Each note
shows the coarse tune and fine tune status. The

Actual note Octave (select F5 for «Octave Up»

Coarse tuning or F6 for «Octave Down»).

Fine tuning in 64ths of a semitone

Edit General: General controls Edit General: Master pitch & Keyboard Scale

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

21•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 programming tasks allow you to alter the pitch of Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned
one or more notes by modifying the coarse and notes as well as the fine..
fine tuning parameters of the current scale. The
Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes.
final configuration can then be copied to selected
octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves. Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning.

Example - to program a scale by fine tuning one To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Se-
or more notes: lect the ALL option to copy a programmed oc-
tave to the entire keyboard.
1. With the “Octave Up” function (F5), select the
octave to program. Octave Up (F5)
2. Use the directional arrows to select the fine Selects the next highest octave to edit.
tune parameter (in this case “0”) and rotate
the dial to fine tune the note according to your Octave Down (F6)
requirements. While tuning, play the note re-
peatedly. Sets the next lowest octave to edit.

3. Repeat the microtuning operation for other Catch Note... (F7)

notes.
Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following
4. Select the “Copy to oct.” function (F3), select message appears:
“Fine Tune” in the “Copy” parameter and
“ALL” in the “to octave” parameter, then press
ENTER to confirm.
5. When the scale has been programmed, save
it to the Setup by pressing F7 («Save»). You
will be prompted to select a User location.
Play the note to edit.
THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS
Save... (F8)
Copy to octave... (F3) Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup.
The «Save» dialog window is opened where you
Copies the current setting to another octave. The
can choose from 8 User scale destinations.
«Copy to octave» dialog window is opened where
you can specify the elements to copy and the
octave to copy the user programmed data to.

Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or
ESCAPE to cancel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit General 21•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Note Function Note Function
Pedalboard / Computer
C2 Start/Stop C#2 Tempo –

The PEDALBOARD and COMPUTER connec- D2 Intro D#2 Tempo +

tors cannot operate at the same time. Selecting E2 Ending F2 Var 1
one renders the other inoperative. F#2 Fill < G2 Var 2
To activate one of the two connectors, select the G#2 Fill = A2 Var 3
corresponding option («Pedalboard» or «Com- A#2 Fill > B2 Var 4
puter») with the cursor buttons.
C3 Key Start

PEDALBOARD
Bass Sustain (F1)
If you have purchased Generalmusic’s optional
Sustain for the notes of the pedalboard.
13-note pedalboard, connect it to the Pedalboard
connector and program the unit for how it will be
used by pressing F8 («Mode»).
COMPUTER
Mode (F8) for Pedalboard options Instead of using the MIDI interface, you can con-
Options for the pedalboard. nect via a single serial cable to a computer. Pro-
gram the connector for the type of computer used
by pressing F8 («Mode»).

Off - Pedalboard deactivated.

Pedalbass - The automatic bass of the auto-ac-
companiments is deactivated and the BASS track
is assigned to the Pedalboard, allowing you to
play the bass with the pedalboard.
Pedalchord - Chord recognition on the keyboard
is disabled and passed over to the pedalboard.
To play minor and sevenths, play two bass notes
at the same time. Alternatively, you can program
the Pedals 1, 2, or 3 to select minor and sev-
enths.
Multifunction - Each note of the pedalboard re-
calls a function associated to the Styles:

Edit General: PedalBoard/Computer

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

21•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Mode (F8) Computer options
Date & Time
Options to communicate with a computer
Sets the internal calendar and clock.

SET DATE (F1)

Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day,
Off - Connection deactivated. month and year and specify the value of each
parameter with the DIAL.
Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh™
computer. A standard Mac serial cable is required Confirm with ENTER or F1.
to connect to the Modem port. In the computer
software, set a communication velocity of 1 MHz.
SET TIME (F2)
PC1 - Allows serial connection with an IBM PC™
computer or compatible, with a communication Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour,
velocity of 31250 baud. A standard PC serial minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and
cable must be connected to the RS-232 port of specify the value of each parameter with the
the computer. DIAL.
PC2 - As above, but with a communication ve- Confirm with ENTER or F2.
locity of 38400 baud.

Edit General; Date & Time

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit General 21•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Display controls Mic/Line Input
Viewing controls for the display. The settings are This page contains bar graphs to monitor the level
conserved to memory after power down. They of signals fed into the Mic/Line inputs 1 and 2.
cannot be saved to disk.
The contents of the display change according to
the absence or presence of the optional Audio
CHORD LANGUAGE Video card.

Determines the viewing language (English/Ital-

ian) of the chord notation in the Score.. AV CARD NOT INSTALLED
You can plug a microphone or musical instrument
HELP LANGUAGE (or other audio source) into the Mic/Line jacks
(IN1, IN2) to play through the instrument’s inter-
Selects the language for the Help file. nal pre-amplifier. The input signals are directed
Your model may not contain a file in a different to the instrument’s internal speakers and to the
language. LEFT and RIGHT audio outputs, but are not proc-
essed by the on-board Digital Effects processor.
You can regulate the signal gain with the twin
DISPLAY MODE GAIN knob located to the left of the Mic/Line jacks.
An optimum signal level can be obtained when
Offers the choice of viewing black text on a white
the input signal, at maximum volume, almost
background (Positive) or white texts on a black
reaches the extreme right of the VU bar graph
background (Negative).
(the clipping zone).
Regulate the volume of the signal at the LEFT
and RIGHT outputs with the MIC/LINE front panel
slider. The M. VOL slider will have no effect on
the MIC/LINE signal.

Edit General - Display controls Edit General - Mic/Line In (AV interface not installed)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

21•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 A/V INTERFACE INSTALLED PARAMETERS WITH OPTIONAL AV IN-
By installing the Audio/Video Interface (available TERFACE
as an optional accessory), the page shows a com-
pletely different picture with several parameters Input VU
to control the input signals. Monitors the level of the input signal. Controls
The input signal is directed to the internal sound the signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/
generator and effects processor before being di- Line IN1 and IN2 jacks with the twin knob 1 and
rected to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the 2 located to the left of the inputs.
speaker system. Maximum volume levels can produce “clipping”,
You can regulate the signal gain with the twin a distortion which can be eliminated by control-
GAIN knob located to the left of the Mic/Line jacks. ling the gain.
An optimum signal level can be obtained when
the input signal, at maximum volume, almost clipping
touches the extreme right of the VU bar graph
(the clipping zone).
Regulate the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE
The VU-meter indicates the level of the input signal. The dark
panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum zone to the extreme right represents clipping (distortion).
of the internal sound generator output level (WK4
sounds and signal of the MIC/LINE IN inputs).

Volume
Separate volume control for each input. Assign-
able values: 0 ... 127.

Pan
Determines the position of the input signal within
the stereo panorama. Assignable values: -32
(all to the left) ... 0 (centre) ... +31 (all to the right).

Eff Group
Selects the Group of effects A or B.

E1 Send
Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply
to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

E2 Send
Determines the amount of modulation effect to
apply to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.
Edit General - Mic/Line In (AV interface installed)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit General 21•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Filter
Selects a filter type. Assignable values: Off, LP
(Low Pass), HP (High Pass), BP (Band Pass),
PB (Parametric Boost), PC (Parametric Cut).

Cutoff
Sets the cutoff frequency. Assignable values: 0
... 191.

Resonance
Sets the filter resonance. Assignable values: 0
... 127.

Audio Out
Directs the signal to the audio output or outputs.
Assignable values: L+R (Left+Right), L, R.

MIC/LINE ON/OFF (F1)

Switch to activate/deactivate the Mic/Line IN1 and
IN2 jacks. When the inputs are active, the over-
all polyphony is reduced by two voices; if you do
not intend using the Mic/Line inputs, deactivate
them in order to direct the two voices to the inter-
nal WK4 sounds.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

21•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The Edit General Main Menu Options

BATTERY & RE.... (F1) AUTO HELP (F2)

This option shows the date and time of the latest When this option is active, an error message is
release of the operating system and the charge displayed when you attempt to select a Perform-
level of the rechargeable backing battery. ance or a Style while the instrument is in Song
mode, or when you attempt to select a Song-
Press F1 once to show the release date and bat- Performance while the instrument is set to Style/
tery charge level: RealTime mode.

SYSTEM INFO (F3)

This option displays information regarding the
presence or absence of the various accessories
that can be installed in WK4.
Press F1 once again to show the date and time
of the release:

If the battery charge level is low, leave the instru-

ment turned on for at least 15 hours to recharge
the battery completely.
RESTORE
The «Edit General» environment offers several
dedicated RESTORE commands which are use-
ful to restore part or all the instrument’s RAM to
the factory set status..
User-programmed data (Performances, User
Styles, Songs, Performance-Sounds) can be can-
celled, either as an individual block (Perform-
ances, Style-Performances, User Styles, Songs)
or entirely (All) by means of a single command.
Cancelling user programmed data from memory
restores the instrument’s original default param-
eter status.
Edit General main menu options column

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit General 21•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 For example, if you use the Restore Perform- RESTORE SONGS (F7)
ance command, you will cancel all user-pro-
grammed Performances and restore the origi- This operation cancels all Song in RAM. The
nal factory settings. Songs memory is restored to the factory-set sta-
tus (empty ##########).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING: use the RESTORE commands

Pressing F7 prompts a request to confirm the
with caution because user-programmed data is operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
irremediably lost. Make sure that you have saved
any data you so not wish to cancel to disk or Hard
disk before proceeding with a restore operation.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RESTORE STYLE-PERFORMANCE (F8)

This operation cancels all user-programmed
RESTORE ALL (F4) Style-Performances associated to the ROM
This operation cancels all user programmed data STYLES. The status of the Style-Performance
currently in RAM (Performances, User Styles, parameters are restored to the factory-set val-
Style-Performances, Songs) and restores the in- ues. ROM Styles associated to modified Style-
strument to its factory-set status (RAM empty). Performances are identified by an asterisk (*) after
the Style name.
Pressing F4 prompts a request to confirm the
operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. Pressing F8 prompts a request to confirm the
operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE STYLES (F5)

This operation cancels all User Styles in RAM
(including User Style-Performances) residing in
the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons of the STYLE
GROUPS. The User slots are restored to the
factory-set conditions (empty ##########).
Pressing F5 prompts a request to confirm the
operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE PERFORMANCE (F6)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Per-
formances in RAM residing in the 8 buttons of
the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. The status of
the Performance parameters are restored to the
factory-set values.
Pressing F6 prompts a request to confirm the
operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

21•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 22 Edit Song
After recording a Song using either the «Record» ST. / SONG

method or the «QuickRec» method, it can be ed-

7
ited by entering «Edit Song».

HOW TO ENTER «EDIT SONG»

Select the Song that requires editing.
THE EDIT PROCEDURE
The name of the Song will appear in the title bar
1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter «Edit
of the display.
Song». The main menu appears.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
Song name the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also pos-
sible to enter an editor by specifying the rela-
tive number on the numeric keypad.
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Song». 4. Select the desired option with the soft but-
tons.
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, 5. Select the parameters with the directional
the last page selected is recalled. arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL
or the numeric keypad.
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
page name 7. Pass to another editor with the buttons .
Editors Locator Otherwise, return to the main menu with ES-
CAPE and select another editor.

ESCAPE «EDIT SONG»

To escape from «Edit Song» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently se-
lected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the correspond-
ing button in the EDIT section.

Edit Song: Main menu

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EDIT SCORE (F6)
The main Menu Options
Opens the Score Edit function.
Score Edit is described separately in detail in the
UNDO (F2) «Score & Edit Score» section towards the end of
When this parameter is selected (shown in nega- this chapter.
tive highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of op-
erations carried out. This function consumes ex- SONG NAME (F8)
actly the same amount of RAM memory as the Modifies the name of the Song.
Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM,
it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
UNDO

The method used to insert characters is described

in the «Data Entry» chapter. You can move the
cursor with the Soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert
You will be prompted with a request to confirm the characters with the keys of the keyboard.
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ES- Name - Name of the Song which appears in the
CAPE. WK4 file selector. This name does not appear
when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum
character length: 10.
Title - Full name of the Song.
Author - Name of the composer.
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button Pub - Song Publisher.
and confirming with ENTER activates the follow-
ing user message:

Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat

the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO ena-
bled.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Erase
Cancels the events from a single track or from all
tracks.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.

SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be cancelled. Depending
on the type of track selected, the following pa-
rameters may or may not appear.

Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track

with the Soft buttons A...H.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord sym-
bols inserted in the score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
All tracks (F8) .

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ERASE PARAMETERS

Event type
(Only for tracks which capture note events). Se-
lects the type of event to cancel.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the low-
est velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.

Note range from... to...

The highest and lowest limits of the note range
to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instru-
ment from the Drum track, assign the same value
to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example,
to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

From locator... To locator...

Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify
the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in oth-
ers, only the measure.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Move
Shifts events from one point of the selected track
to another.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the movement.

PARAMETERS

From locator... To locator...

Determines the start and end point of the part to
move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution (tick).
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.

Start locator
Determines the new position of the part that is to
be moved.
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Copy
Copies events from a single track or from all
tracks.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the copy.

SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be copied. Depending on
the type of track selected, the following param-
eters may or may not appear.

Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track

with the Soft buttons A...H.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord sym-
bols inserted in the score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
All tracks (F8) .

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PARAMETERS value to the “from” and “to” parameters. For ex-
ample, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter
Copy mode as «Note range from D2 to D2».
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
copied events to those already present at the des-
tination. «Replace» substitutes the events From locator... To locator...
present at the destination with those copied. Determines the start measure and end measure
Options: Merge, Replace. of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot
be specified.
From track... to track... Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
Specifies the source and destination track of the It is not possible to specify a measure after the
copy. The «From track...» part is selected with end of the Song.
the Soft buttons A ... H. The «To track...» part is
modified with the DIAL. Start locator

Assignable values: any track (1...32). Determines the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
To Song... point of the Song.
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If
the selected Song is non existent, it will be cre- Copy times
ated by the act of confirming the copy command. Specifies the number of consecutive copies.
Assignable values: any Song (1...16). Each copy starts exactly where the previous one
ends.
Note range from... to... Assignable values: 1...998.
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the
note range to copy. To copy a single percussive
instrument from the Drum track, assign the same

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quantize
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes tri-
plet and swing quantize values.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the quantization.

SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2

These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.

Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note

On event.
Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note
Off event. After a Note On quantization, a
Note Off quantization affects the duration of
the notes, adapting them to the quantization
grid.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PARAMETERS Note Off quantization
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
Note On quantization as Note On.
Determines the Note On quantize values.
Note range from... to...
Determines the highest and lowest note range to
Value Quantization
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instru-
1/4
ment of the Drum track, assign the same note to
1/8  the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
1/12  triplet quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
1/16 
1/24  triplet Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
1/32 
From locator... To locator...
1/48  triplet
Determines the start and end point of the part
1/64 (1/64)
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
1/96 (1/64 triplet) selected.
free no quantization
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
1/8 B...F*
  (swing) It is not possible to specify a point after the end
1/16 B...F*   (swing) of the Song.
free no quantization

* B … F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Insert measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward
the same number of bars as those inserted.
Given that the Time Signature of the inserted
measures can differ to the Time Signature of the
Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the
creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the insertion.

PARAMETERS

Measures to insert a b
Specifies the number of measures to insert. As-
signable values: 1...999.

Time Signature 1 2 3 4
Determines the Time Signature of the measures
to insert.

Insert from locator

1 2 3 4 5 6
Specifies the measure at which the new meas- (1) (2) (a) (b) (3) (4)
ures will be inserted.
Assignable values: from the first measure of the Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved
Song, to the first measure after the end measure forward.
of the Song (coda insertion).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Song and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those

after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

PARAMETERS

Measures to delete
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
Assignable values: any number that does not ex-
ceed the total number of measures in the Song. 1 2 3 4 5 6
For example, if the Song is 50 measures long,
the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.

Delete from locator

1 2 3 4
This parameter indicates the first measure of (1) (2) (5) (6)
those to be deleted.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 and
Song. The parameter is linked to the previous cancelled. All the measures shift towards the beginning of the
one, which can be modified if the measures be- song.
tween the deletion start point and the end of the
Song are less than those shown in «Measures».

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter repre-
sents the speed with which a note is played, or
its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity
the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the
filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with
increased velocity.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the dynamic changes.

PARAMETERS

Velocity mode
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” func-
tion operates.

Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity From locator... To locator...

change» is added to or subtracted from the
Determines the start and end point of the part to
key Velocity values.
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the Beat and ‘tick’.
value specified in the «Change Velocity» pa-
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
rameter.
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Change Velocity
Specifies the amount by which the velocity val-
ues can be changed. This depends on the option
selected in «Velocity Mode».

Note range from... to...

Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single
percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign
the same note to the highest and lowest limit.
For example, to change the snare (D2) set the
parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•12 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Transpose
Transposition by semitones.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation.

Transpose value
Determines the value of the transposition (in
semitones).

Note range from... to...

Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To transpose a single percussive
instrument of the Drum track, assign the same
note to the highest and lowest limit. For exam-
ple, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter
to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

From locator... To locator...

Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Event List track in edit
Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every sin-
gle event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
at the centre of the display shows all the events
recorded.

ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE

1. Select the track whose events you wish to
see in the Event List.
2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the measure Value 1
events. The selected notes are played auto-
beat Value 2
matically.
resolution Value 3
3. Select the parameter to modify using the cur-
event type Gate
sor buttons / . (Status)
4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected param-
eter.

EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN SHOW... (F2)

BE CHANGED
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
The «Status» column shows the type of event. select the events that will be displayed in the
One or more parameters can be modified for each Event List.
event.
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
Refer to the events table on the following page
for an explanation of each event.

Set the parameters and press ENTER.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•14 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 STATUS VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 GATE
Note Note name Key On Velocity Key Off Note length
[C-1...G9] [1...127] Velocity. expressed as
[0...127] the Sequencer
resolution
(q=192).
[0...65535]
Program Program change Bank Select Bank Select
Change message. The MSB message. LSB message.
PC contained in To select the Not necessary
the tracks and WK4 banks, use to select the
shown in the numbers 1...16. WK4 sounds.
Microscope has [1...128] [1...128]
priority over the
PC recorded in
the
Performance.
[1...128]
Control Type of Control Control Change
Change Change (or MIDI value.
Controller).
Example: CC00
= Bank Select
MSB, CC32 =
Bank Select
LSB, CC01 =
Modulation,
CC07 = Volume.
[1...128]
Pitchbend Value of LSB Value of MSB
(Least (Most
Significant Significant
Byte). Byte). Effective
[0 = Off, 1...127 value of
= On] bending.
[0...63 = down
64 = neutral,
65...127 = up]
Mono touch Channel
Aftertouch
intensity.
[0...127]
Poly touch Note to which Note Aftertouch
Aftertouch is intensity.
applied [0...127]
[C-1...G9]

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INS: (X) (F3) DELETE (F6)
Inserts the event specified in the “INS. TYPE” Cancels the selected event.
function at the current cursor position. To posi-
tion the inserted event precisely, modify its locator
accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Sta- CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
tus).
Selects the event currently playing, or the event
The events are inserted with the following de- immediately after the current Song position.
fault parameter values:

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Status 1V 2V 3V Gate
Note: C4 64 64 128 Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
specified locator (measure). The number can be
P. Ch 1 1 1
specified with the DIAL.
Contr. 1 0 ----
P.Bend 0 64 ----
M.Tch 0 ----
P.Tch C4 0 ----
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.

After inserting the desired event, modify its pa-

rameters accordingly.

INS TYPE... (F4)

Recalls a dialog window where you can select
the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.

Select the event type and press ENTER.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•16 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Initial parameters Event List
Master Track
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the
events recorded in the Master track which con-
tains events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song. This Track records changes in Perform-
ance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect
Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes,
initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
The structure of the page is analogous to the Mi-
croscope. The events are shown in the Event List
at the center of the display.
bar
Accessing the Event Edit Mode beat value
1. Use the cursor buttons / to scroll through resolution
the events. event type
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cur- (Status)
sor buttons / .
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify
the selected parameter.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the

INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact
that commercially available MIDI files contain
The events that define the Song at the start point initializing events at the start of each track
can be modified but not deleted. To access and ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

modify the events press F1 («Start param»).

VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the
Damper pedal set for continuous control and as-
signed the Volume function.
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the
score. Alters the score according to the speci-
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial val- fied key (inserts the correct accidentals), render-
ues of some of the track parameters (Program ing the score easier to read. For example, if the
Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same pa- score was captured in the key of C, you can dis-
rameters are also found at the beginning of each play the score in the key of F# with all the correct
track, sound, volume and pan settings are se- accidentals shown in the initial key signature by
lected and controlled by the events contained in setting the Key parameter to F#.
the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Per- «Play View» or «Record View» pages.
formances..

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAM- STATUS VALUE
TEMPO Metronomic Tempo.
ETERS If the Tempo Rec
The «Status» column shows the type of event. option is active
during the recording
One or more parameters can be modified for each tempo variations
event. The table shown opposite lists the events are recorded.
and parameters which can be modified. [20...250]
PERFORMANCE Change of
Performance.
[1...8]
START PARAMETERS (F1) VOLUME Volume variation
via MIDI (through
Enters the edit of the Song’s start parameters.
the Common
Press F1 again to return to the edit of the suc- channel) or by
cessive parameters. means of the
Volume Pedal.
Does not record
volume changes
SHOW... (F2) effected with the
M.VOL control.
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to [0...127]
select the events that will be displayed by the EFF. DEVICE Selection of a
Event List. SEL. (DSP).
Corresponds to
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF. CC18. The table of
the available DSPs
is in the Edit
Effects chapter
EFF. TYPE Type of effect
assigned to the
selected DSP.
Corresponds to
CC48. The table of
the assignable
effects is in the
Appendix.
EFF. DEVICE General Volume of
VOLUME the selected DSP.
The Effect Sends
for each track is
regulated in the
microscope be
means of the
INS: (X) (F3) control changes
Inserts the specified event type at the cursor po- CC91 & CC93.
sition. To position the inserted event precisely,
modify its locator (the parameters to the left of
the Status).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•18 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The events are inserted with the following de-
fault parameter values:

Status Value
Tempo 120
Performance 1
Volume 64
Select the type of event and press ENTER.
Eff. Dv. Sel 0
Status Value
DELETE (F6)
Eff. Type 0
Eff. Vol 0 Cancels the selected event.
RotaryA Slw/Fst
RotaryB Slw/Fst CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
Scale 1 Selects the event currently playing, or the event
Key Sign C immediately after the current Song position.

After inserting the desired event, modify its pa- GO TO LOC... (F8)
rameters accordingly.
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
selected measure. The number can be specified
with the DIAL.
INS TYPE... (F4)
Recalls a dialog window from which you can se-
lect the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.

Press the cursor arrow to bring other events

into view.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Song 22•19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Score & Edit Score

THE SCORE BUTTON THE SCORE TRACK

Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord The Score track is a “ghost” track that is added
symbols on the display and/or on an external to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the
monitor. insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words
(Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords).
SCORE

The Score displays a melody line and not chords.

A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes
are extracted and a melody line is generated.
The score can be viewed on the instrument’s dis-
play, or projected onto an external monitor by
Press F8 («Score controls...») to select the view- pressing SCORE. To view on an external moni-
ing options and the video standard. tor, the WK4 must be fitted with Generalmusic’s
When a Song containing a Score is in playback, optional Audio/Video card.
an indicator ( ) monitors the position of the The Score is created in «Edit Song».
score.
Press ESCAPE to exit Score.

Score page - All mode Score page - Lyrics 1 mode

(notes, lyrics and chord symbols) (lyrics in large type)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•20 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Score Controls
In the «Score» page, press F8 to open the «Score VIDEO CONTROLS
Control» dialog window.
Viewing options for an external monitor.

F4
Echo LCD
F5

F6 ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is

F7 shown on the WK4 display.
F8

OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts

(music, lyrics, chords).
Options: On, Off.

View mode
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the back-
ground. This option is valid for the external moni-
tor only.
Options: 1…16.
Score control dialog window
(viewing options for external monitor) Video mode
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ES- RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Compos-
CAPE to cancel. ite Video signals.
CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video sig-
nals. For a correct Composite Video image, this
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE option is recommended.

Select the parts of the Score to display with the Options: RGB, CV.
cursor buttons / .
Y shift
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
Controls the vertical alignment.
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display,
with characters or various dimensions.
Score split
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes.
This option refreshes the display very quickly ON: the notes are displayed on a staff.
which can be useful for guitarists and bassists. OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef
only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef
are shown with the symbol « » (bass 8va).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Score/Edit Score 22•21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chords on lyrics
If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4, the
external monitor shows chord symbols together
with lyrics.

SPECIAL SYMBOLS
At times, the music score will show special sym-
bols.
The «octave lower» symbol.
The displayed note or notes
are in reality one octave
lower.
The «note too high» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the dis-
played symbol is too high to
appear in the staff.
The «note too low» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the dis-
played symbol is too low to
appear in the staff. This
symbol rarely appears with a
standard music staff («Score
split» option in the «Score
controls” window set to ON).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•22 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Edit Score
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE INSERTING NOTES
1. Press SONG and select a Song. To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a
Song track.
2. Press ST./SONG in the EDIT section to en-
ter «Edit Song». 1. Press F4 («Get Score»):
3. Press F5 («Edit Score») in the main menu of
«Edit Song» to open Edit Score.
If the Song does not contain a score, select
the «Get Score» command (F4) to create one
(this procedure is explained afterwards). 2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe.
3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few sec-
onds for the score to be generated.
HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE
Press ESCAPE to return to «Edit Song». Press
ESCAPE once again to return to the «Play View» INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS
or «Record View» page.
Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI ‘Text’
event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI
files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new
Song using the procedure explained on the next
page.

Score Edit - Chord mode Score Edit - Lyrics mode

(chord symbol edit)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Score/Edit Score 22•23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Press F5 («Chords») to take the cursor to 6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a
the chord line (above the staff). pedal note, press the function button F («Ex-
tension») and play the alternative chord. The
2. Press the soft button G («Go to loc...») to go
bass extension will appear in the following
to a specific measure:
form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G...
Press the soft buttons D («Next event» or E
(«Previous event») to pass to another event.
7. You can modify the selected symbol by play-
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to ing a different chord.
confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
8. You can modify a chord by transforming it,
for example, from a major to minor chord to
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or
seventh. Press F7 («Root») repeatedly to
next note using the soft buttons D («Next
alternate between the bass of the chord (the
event») and E («Previous event»).
root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a
note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to The entire symbol is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
open the symbol insertion zone:

Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th The root note is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th

The chord abbreviation is selected.

Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th Press F7 («Root»).

The number shown on the left of the inser-

tion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To The entire symbol is selected again.
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»). Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to
To escape and return to the note, press the modify the selected element (the root or ab-
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape breviation).
and pass to the next note press the soft but-
ton D («Next event»).
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The
chord symbol appears, in the following form:
CMaj, Dmin, E7th...

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•24 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INSERTING LYRICS To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This and pass to the next note press the soft but-
type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files. ton D («Next event»).
Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the
following manner: At this point, «Next event» and «previous
event» pass from 16th to 16th instead of from
1. Press F6 («Lyrics») to take the cursor to the note to note.
lyrics line (below the staff).
5. In this operating mode, the keyboard trans-
2. Press soft button G («Go to loc...») to go to a forms into a source of alphabetic data (see
specific measure (bar): the «Data Entry» chapter). Write the required
syllable using the keys of the keyboard.
6. Press soft button F («End phrase») to termi-
nate the verse. The end of the verse is indi-
cated by the “end phrase” symbol ‘I’.
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm
or ESCAPE to cancel. Do not write lines consisting of more than 20
characters. This is to avoid the incorrect
3. Move the insertion point to the previous note syllabisation of words when you are viewing
or the next note with the soft buttons D («Next lyrics in large type. For example, the word
event») and E («Previous event»). “Ballgame” may syllabize to “Bal-lgame”, or
“Ballg-ame” or other, instead of “Ball-game”.
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to syllables at the beginning of the 7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewrit-
note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in ing it entirely or partially.
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to To replace one character with another, remain
open the syllable insertion zone. in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you
are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th vertical line), press note D#2 («INS/OVER»)
to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor
with the DIAL, then insert the new character.
Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th
To insert a character without cancelling an-
other, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2
Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th («INS/OVER»); the cursor will take the form
of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the
The number shown on the left of the inser- DIAL, then insert the new character. Press
tion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Score/Edit Score 22•25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The «Edit Score» page in detail
CHORDS (F5) >> 1/16 (F8)
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemi-
staff). quaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this
button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For
example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/
LYRICS (F6) 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..
The edit takes place in an active zone:
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).

To escape and return to the normal edit of the

NEXT EVENT (D) note, press soft button E (“Previous event»). To
escape and pass to the next note, press soft but-
Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause). ton D («Next event»).

PREV. EVENT (E) << 1/16 (H)

«Previous event». Takes the cursor to the previ- See above. Takes the cursor to the previous six-
ous event (note or pause). teenth

GO TO LOC... (G) GET SCORE... (F4)

Takes the cursor to the beginning of the speci- Creates a score from the selected track from
fied measure. Press soft button G to open the which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open
dialog window: the dialog window:

Specify the measure with the DIAL. Specify the track with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

If the track contains chords, the analyser with-

draws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate
notes not related to the melody. A score is ob-
tained with excellent results from a track contain-
ing a melody line only.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•26 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EXTENSION (F) END PHRASE (F)
This command allows you to add an alternative This command inserts an ‘End phrase’ symbol
bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and (‘I’) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes
press soft button F, then play a complete chord Lyrics 1 … Lyrics 4, the verses end with the “End
which contains the alternative bass root required phrase” symbol is reached and the next verse
to insert. starts on a new line.
We recommend that you write lines using not
more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying in-
You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or correctly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 op-
play a different chord. tion (large types) is used.
Play the chords below the Split Point. This symbol can be cancelled as any other char-
acter by selecting the syllable with D («Next
event») or E («Previous event»). Select the sym-
ROOT (F7) bol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note
F2 (DELETE).
This command allows you to modify the root note
of a chord and its related abbreviation separately.
Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place
the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the
abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the en-
tire chord symbol.

You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,

or by playing a different chord.
Play the chords below the Split Point.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Score/Edit Score 22•27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

22•28 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 23 Edit Style
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be ST. / SONG

modified in «Edit Style».

7

ENTERING «EDIT STYLE»

In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish
to modify. EDIT PROCEDURE
If you select a ROM Style, only the Copy func- 1. Press ST./SONG to enter «Edit Style». The
tion if Edit Style can be used. main menu appears.
If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style func- 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
tions will be available. The Style name appears the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also pos-
in the status bar of the display. sible to enter an editor by specifying the rela-
tive number on the numeric keypad.
Style name
3. Press ENTER to enter the editor.
4. Select the desired option with the soft but-
tons.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section 5. Select the parameters with the cursor but-
to enter «Edit Style». tons and modify their value with the DIAL or
Entering this section the first time opens the main the numeric keypad.
menu page. On all successive occasions, the 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
last page selected is recalled.
7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ES-
page name Editors
CAPE and select another editor.

ESCAPE FROM «EDIT STYLE»

To escape from «Edit Style» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently se-
lected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the correspond-
ing button in the EDIT section.

Edit Style - Main menu

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 UNDO (F2) STYLE NAME (F8)
When this parameter is selected (shown in nega- Changes the name of a Style. This function only
tive highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM
Undo cancels the last operation or series of op- Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.
erations carried out. This function consumes ex-
actly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it
is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
UNDO
The method used to insert characters is described
in the «Data Entry» chapter. You can move the
cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert
the characters with the keys of the keyboard.

You will be prompted with a request to confirm «EMPTY TRACK» INDICATION - NOTES
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ES- PRESENT IN THE TRACK
CAPE. The presence of notes in a track is indicated by
the seq-play icon:

In play mode, this status icon indicates the pres-

ence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff
of the track does not contain notes, the «empty
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
track» message is displayed at the bottom of the
and confirming with ENTER activates the follow-
Edit Style page:
ing user message:

In record mode, tasks are performed directly on

a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes
in the track and in the riff being recorded.

Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat

the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO ena-
bled.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Erase
Cancellation of events.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.

SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8

Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of
the Style to cancel the events from. Depending
on the part selected, the following parameters
may or may not appear.

Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.

Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).

PARAMETERS

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations
that contain at least one recorded riff can be se-
lected.

Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Event type
Determines the type of event to be erased.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the low-
est velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.

Note range from... to...

Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to
cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument
of the Drum track, assign the same note to the
highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel
the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range
from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

From locator... To locator...

Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.

Erase Variation
Selects the Style Variation to cancel [«Var (all
riffs)» option].

Erase Style
Selects the Style to cancel [«Style (all Vars)» op-
tion].

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Move
Shifts events from one point to another within the
selected track.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation.

PARAMETERS

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Vari-
ations that contain at least one recorded riff can
be selected.

Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty the phrase «No Riff» appears.

From locator... To locator...

Sets the start and end points of the part to be
moved. The measure, beat and resolution can
be specified.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.

Start locator
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Copy
Copies events from a single tracks or from all the
tracks.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation

SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8

Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the type of
track to copy events from. Depending on the type
of track selected, the following parameters may
or may not appear.

Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.

Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).

PARAMETERS

Current Style... to Style...

Selects the source Style to copy from and the
destination Style to copy to.
Assignable values: any USER Style.

From var... to var...

Selects the source and destination Variations for
the part to be copied.
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 From riff... to riff... Copy Variation... to Variation...
Selects the source and destination riffs for the The source and destination of the copied Varia-
part to be copied. For example, it is possible to tion («Var (all riffs)» option).
copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
Fill riff.
Assignable values: any riff. To Style...
The destination Style of the copy.
Track... to track...
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
Specifies the source and destination tracks for
the copied elements. «From track» shows the
Copy current Style to Style
track selected using soft buttons A...H. «To
track...» can be modified using the DIAL. Selects the USER location where the entire cur-
rent Style is to be copied to («Style (all Vars)»
Assignable values: any accompaniment track option).
(9...16).

From locator... To locator...

Sets the start and end point of the part to be cop-
ied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff..

Start locator
Sets the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
destination riff.

Copy times
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each
copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Assignable values: depends of the length of the
riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.

Copy mode
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the des-
tination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Options: Merge, Replace.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quantize
The Quantize function is an auto-corrector of tim-
ing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize
values.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the quantize operation.

SOFT BUTTONS F1...F2

These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
Note On Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note On event.
Note Off Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note Off event. After a Note On quantization,
a Note Off quantization affects the duration
of the notes, adapting them to a quantization
grid.

PARAMETERS

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one riff recorded).

Riff
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varia-
tion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Note On quantize Note Off quantize
Specifies the Note On quantize values. Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.

Value Quantization Note range from... to...

1/4

Sets the highest and lowest note range to
1/8  quantize. To quantize a single percussive instru-
1/12  triplet ment of the Drum track, assign the same note to
1/16  the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
1/24  triplet
«Note range from D2 to D2».
1/32 
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
1/48  triplet
1/64 (1/64) From locator... To locator...
1/96 (1/64 triplet) Determines the start and end point of the part
free no quantization that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
1/8 B...F
  (swing) selected.
1/16 B...F   (swing) Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
free no quantization Riff.

*B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Insert Measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts
forward the same number of measures as those
inserted. The length of the Riff changes.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the insertion.

PARAMETERS

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).

Riff
a b
Selects one of the riffs from the selected Varia-
tion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.

Measures to insert 1 2 3 4
Specifies the number of measures to insert.
Assignable values: depends on the length of the
riff (max 16 measures).
1 2 3 4 5 6
Insert from locator (1) (2) (a) (b) (3) (4)

Specifies the measure at which the new meas- Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
ures will be inserted. measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved
forward.
Assignable values. from the first measure (bar)
of the Riff, to the first measure after the end meas-
ure of the Riff (coda insertion).

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Style and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those

after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

PARAMETERS

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).

Riff 1 2 3 4 5 6
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varia-
tion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
1 2 3 4
(1) (2) (5) (6)
Measures to delete
Specifies the number of measures to delete. Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All
the measures shift towards the beginning of the Style.
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed
the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4
measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.

Delete from locator

This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter
represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity.
Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the
volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many
sounds, making them brighter with increased ve-
locity.

Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the dynamic changes.

PARAMETERS Change Velocity

Variation Specifies the amount by which the velocity val-

ues can be changed. This depends on the op-
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing tion selected in «Velocity Mode».
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff). Note range from... to...

Riff Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be

affected. To modify the velocity of a single per-
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varia- cussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the
tion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears. example, to change the snare (D2) set the pa-
rameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Velocity mode
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” func- From locator... To locator...
tion operates.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify measure,
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity beat and resolution.
change» is added to or subtracted from the
Velocity values of the notes. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the
value specified in «Velocity change»

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•12 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Transpose
Transposition in semitone steps.

Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).

Riff
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varia-
tion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.

Transpose
Determines the value of the transposition (in semi-
tones).
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.

Note range from... to...

Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To transpose a single percussive in-
strument of the Drum track, assign the same note
to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note
range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9

From locator... To locator...

Defines the start and end point of the part to be
affected. It is possible to specify the measure,
beat and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Event List track in edit
Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every sin-
gle event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
shown at the center of the display shows all the
events recorded.

ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT

1. Select the track where you want to edit the
events in the Event List.
2. Use the / cursor buttons to scroll through measure Value 1
the events. The selected notes are played
beat Value 2
automatically.
resolution Value 3
3. Select the parameter to be changed using
event type Gate
the / cursor buttons. (Status)
4. Use the DIAL to change the selected param-
eters.

PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAM- SHOW... (F2)

ETERS Opens a dialog window where it is possible to
The «Status» column shows the type of event. select the events that will be displayed in the
One or more parameters can be changed for each Event List.
event. See the following page for a table of events Set the events to mask to «Off»
and their parameters.

SELECT RIFF... (F1)

Selects the riff to edit. Select the variation and
the riff in the dialog window

Set the parameters and press ENTER.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•14 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 STATUS VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 GATE
Note Note name Key On Velocity Key Off Note length
[C-1...G9] [1...127] Velocity. expressed as
[0...127] the Sequencer
resolution
(q=192).
[0...65535]
Program Program change Bank Select Bank Select
Change message. The MSB message. LSB message.
PC contained in To select the Not necessary
the tracks and WK4 banks, use to select the
shown in the numbers 1...16. WK4 sounds.
Microscope has [1...128] [1...128]
priority over the
PC recorded in
the
Performance.
[1...128]
Control Type of Control Control Change
Change Change (or MIDI value.
Controller).
Example: CC00
= Bank Select
MSB, CC32 =
Bank Select
LSB, CC01 =
Modulation,
CC07 = Volume.
[1...128]
Pitchbend Value of LSB Value of MSB
(Least (Most
Significant Significant
Byte). Byte). Effective
[0 = Off, 1...127 value of
= On] bending.
[0...63 = down
64 = neutral,
65...127 = up]
Mono touch Channel
Aftertouch
intensity.
[0...127]
Poly touch Note to which Note Aftertouch
Aftertouch is intensity.
applied [0...127]
[C-1...G9]

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 INS: (X) (F3) DELETE (F6)
Inserts the event specified in the “INS. TYPE” Deletes the selected event.
function at the current cursor position. To posi-
tion the inserted event precisely, modify its locator
(the parameters to the left of the «Status» col- CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
umn).
Selects the event currently playing, or the event
The events are inserted with the following de- immediately after the current riff position.
fault parameter values:

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Status 1V 2V 3V Gate
Note: C4 64 64 128 Takes the cursor directly to the first event in the
specified measure. The number can be entered
P. Ch 1 1 1
using the DIAL.
Contr. 1 0 ----
P.Bend 0 64 ----
M.Tch 0 ----
P.Tch C4 0 ----
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.

After inserting the desired event, modify its pa-

rameters accordingly.

INS TYPE... (F4)

Opens a dialog window where you can select the
type of event to insert manually with the «Ins:
(x)» function.

Select the type of event and press ENTER.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•16 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Mask
The Mask function allows you to program the Ba-
sic elements of two Variations (Var 2 and 4) in
order to automatically obtain the Basic elements
of the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3).
The Basic Variation 2 generates the Basics of
Variations 1 and 2. The Basic Variation 4 gener-
ates the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain
the best results, program your Variations with all
6 accompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well
as Drums and Bass.
The idea is to reduce your Style recording times
by recording 2 Variations and exploit the auto-
matic features to create a Style with 4 Variations.
Then, using the Arranger Tracks function, mask
one or two accompaniment sections in one or
two Variation to reduce the instrumental content
of the respective accompaniments.
The Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be
altered.
Program the Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Varia-
tions to create a complete Style.

PARAMETERS

Mask Arranger tracks

Activates the Mask function. Deactivates the individual Arrangement parts
(A1...A6) of each Variation.
When the Mask parameter is enabled (ON), the
Basic Variation 2 automatically generates Basic For example, if you have programmed tracks
Variation 1, while Basic Variation 4 generates the A1...A6 of Variation 2 and you want to mask A4,
Basic Variation 3. A5 and A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation
2, program the first two lines as follows:
Options: On, Off.

V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6
V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Style 23•17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 DRUM MASK (F7/F8)
Opens the «Drum mask» dialog window.
As in the Mask function for the Arrangement
tracks, the Drum Mask excludes individual per-
cussive sounds from the Drum tracks of the Vari-
ations.
Four keyboards (or drumkits) appear in the dia-
log window, each representing the Drum track
(DR) of the four different variations.
Select the variation with the cursor buttons / .
Play the notes corresponding to the percussion
instruments to exclude them from the selected
variation.
The excluded notes are denoted by a small black
line on white notes and a white line on the black
notes.
Play the same note to cancel the line and to play
Drum track of Variation 1 showing masked Percussive
the sound in the selected variation.
instruments
Press ENTER to confirm the programming, or
ESCAPE to cancel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

23•18 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 24 Preload
THE PRELOAD FUNCTION PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI
The Preload function is a background loading FILES ON DISK
facility which allows you to playback all the Songs If you have a WK4 Songs disk, or have purchased
and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk contains
Hard disk with a single command, without hav- Song files, you can playback all the files in a Block
ing to load all the data to memory beforehand. with a single command, without having to load
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
them to memory beforehand. Preload plays back

Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after the other.
than one Block, only the songs contained in the
first Block will be played while those of other Blocks 1. Press PRELOAD.
are ignored.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

After a short scanning period, the Preload

window shows Songs or MIDI files present
Furthermore, if the «Auto Preload» option is ena- on disk on the left, and the Preload list on the
bled, Preload loads a Song together with all as- right.
sociated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds to
ensure the correct playback. If your instrument is fitted with a Hard disk,
pressing PRELOAD (without inserting a
It is also possible to prepare a “Preload” list con- floppy into the drive) shows the Preload win-
sisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both dow with a list of Blocks in the Hard disk on
files types are present on the source device the left and the Preload list on the right.
(floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from
different Blocks. 2. If necessary, select the device containing the
required file with the soft buttons F1 («Floppy
disk») and F2 («Hard disk»).
3. Select the type of file to view with soft but-
tons F5 («SONG») and F6 («SMF», Stand-
ard MIDI File).
4. If the source device contains more than one
Block, select the Block or directory and press
ENTER to open it.
5. Press F7 («Select all») to select all the Song
or MIDI files shown in the left part of the dis-
play. The files are added to the Preload list
on the right.
The Preload list can contain a maximum of
16 files.

Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Preload 24•1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7. Press F8 («Play») to playback the Songs in
the Preload list. The PRELOAD led starts to Create a Preload list
flash and during the preloading operation, the
message «Preloading Song» is shown. 1. If the Preload window is not showing, press
Playback continues non-stop until all the PRELOAD with a disk inserted in the drive
Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been (or without if you are using the Hard disk).
played. The Preload window shows the Songs or
MIDI files disk directory on the left, and the
Playback stops automatically when the last destination directory on the right, represented
Song or MIDI File reaches the end. by the Preload list.
8. During playback, press ESCAPE or Press RESET LIST (F4) to cancel the previ-
PRELOAD to return to the Song View page. ous list if present.
You can select a track and set it to key-play
in order to play along with the Song. Use the 2. If necessary select the source device using
<< and >> buttons to advance or rewind the the Soft buttons F1 («Floppy disk») and F2
Song at will. («Hard disk»).
If you press STOP, you will stop the playback 3. Select the type of file to include in the list us-
and cancel the Preload operation. You can- ing the soft buttons F5 («SONG») and F6
not select Song-Performances during a («SMF», Standard MIDI File).
Preload playback. 4. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or
9. Press STOP at any time during playback to MIDI file to include in the list and press EN-
stop the current song and return to the Song TER. The selected file is added to the first
Play view page. This will, however, cancel available space in the list and the destination
the Preload operation. frame moves one step forward.
If the disk contains more than one Block,
press ESCAPE to exit from the current direc-
tory, select another block and press ENTER
to gain access.

Preload display showing a list of 8 Song files

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

24•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Select other files and press ENTER each time
to include them in the list. The Preload functions

IMPORTANT: If you are working from
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
Floppy disk, do not extract the disk dur-
ing the file insertion procedure; doing so Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corre-
will provoke the cancellation of the list. sponds to the disk directory showing the files con-
tained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files).
6. If you want to change an inserted file, take
The files that appear depend on whether the
the cursor over to the right of the display,
SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
select the file that needs replacing, return the
cursor over to the left, select the file to insert
and press ENTER.
HARD DISK (F2)
Return the cursor to the right again and se-
lect an empty location for the next file on the Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on
list. Return the cursor to the left to select the the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory
next file and continue as before until your list showing the files contained in the disk (Block files
is complete. or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend
on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is
You can fill the list in a single step using the selected.
«Select All” function (F7).
7. Press F8 («Play») to start the playback of the
Songs in the list. AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
During playback, the Song View page is When this option is selected (negative highlight),
shown. You can select a track and set it to Songs are loaded into memory together with all
key-play in order to play along with the Song. associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If
Use the << and >> buttons to advance or re- there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept
wind the Song at will. the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used
instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
Press STOP only if you want to stop play-
back, otherwise you will cancel the Preload If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the
operation. Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM
Sounds will not be loaded.

RESET LIST (F4)

Cancels the current list and stops the playback
instantly.

SONG (F5)
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows WK4 or WX/SX format Songs only.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Preload 24•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SMF (F6) If the «Auto Preload» option is selected, a Song
will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
When this option is selected, the left part of the RAM Sounds contained in the Block housing
display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk, the Song. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM
identified by the extension ‘.MID’, together with for the operation, the Song will play incorrectly
any other sub-directories present (shown with the using ROM-Sounds.
.<DIR> extension).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hint: When the samples of a Song are loaded,

SELECT ALL (F7) the Auto Preload utilizes the free Sample-RAM,
then starts to substitute the samples of the Song in
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the playback with the samples of the new Song. At a
certain point, the Song in playback will start to play
display and inserts them directly into the list. The incorrectly. It is advisable, therefore, to avoid using
list can contain a maximum of 16 files. an excessive amount of samples (not more than
half the available Sample-RAM).
If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

all MIDI files present in the current directory. The

list will show the Song names without the .MID
extension.

PLAY (F8)
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the
list, after a short period. If the songs shown origi-
nate from Midi files, the preloading period takes
more time due to the conversion process.
During playback, you can advance or rewind the
Song using the << and >> buttons. You can se-
lect one or more tracks, set them to key-play and
play along with the Song. It is not possible, how-
ever, to select the Song-Performances.
To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
The instant you start the playback, all Songs cur-
rently residing in memory are cancelled, except
the one currently playing.
Preload exploits locations 1 and 2 for playback
and stand-by of the background loaded files.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

24•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • 25 Edit Disk & Hard Disk
This chapter discusses the file handling opera-
tions not discussed in the Disk & Hard Disk chap-
ter 6 of the User Guide (Erase, Copy, Move, and
Utility), the disk (Refresh disk, Free Memory,
Sample RAM, etc.), and provides information re-
garding the optional Hard disk.

ERASE, COPY, MOVE AND UTILITY COM-

MANDS
Erase, Copy and Move commands are executed
with the same procedures as those used for the
Load and Save commands.
In this chapter, you’ll find general information re-
lating to Erase, Copy and Move operations - the
user is encouraged to apply the same logic to
these operations as that applied to the Load and
Save operations already discussed.
Refer to the Disk & Hard disk chapter 6 for de-
tailed information regarding the Load and Save
commands.

Utility operations (disk initializing procedures) are

an exception and are discussed separately on
page 8.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Erase
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer
needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard
Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
When you pass to the Erase page, you can
choose the device to erase data from with the
corresponding soft buttons:
• Floppy disk = F1
• Hard Disk = F2
• RAM = F3
The Erase File Selector does not operate be-
tween source and destination directories as in
the load and save file selector, but on a single
directory contained in the device you are cancel-
ling files from.
The example which follows shows how to Erase
a single Song from RAM.
1/2
DISK

H. D
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page. +

If the main Erase page is not shown, use the

page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.

2. Select the ERASE command required from the

main page.
3. Select the source device to erase from.
In this case, select the RAM option with soft
button F3.
If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert
the disk into the drive and check that the
“Floppy Disk” option is selected (soft button 3/4
F1).
F1

If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select F2

the “Hard Disk” option with soft button F2. F3

ENTER TEMPO

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•2 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file
to erase then press ENTER to access the Block. 5
6. Select the file to erase. ENTER TEM

7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the di-

rectory.
ESCAPE

6/7

ENTER TEM

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Copy
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. The source file remains intact.
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy
to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
The example which follows shows how to copy a 1/2 DISK

H. D
single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk, +

and provides sufficient information which you can

apply to all Copy situations.

1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.

If the main Copy page is not shown, use the
page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.

2. Select the COPY command required from the

main page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
In this case, use the button to pass to the 3/4
source directory and, if necessary, select
Floppy Disk (F1).
Then use the button to pass to the destina-
tion directory and select the Hard disk (F2) F1

as the destination. Entering the Hard disk F2

F3

for the first time takes some time, depending F4

on the number of files already present. A F5

“Please Wait” message appears during the

F6

F7

scanning period. F8

Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automati- ENTER TEMPO / DATA

cally assigns the same device to source and

destination.

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector. ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•4 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. If necessary, select the source Block containing
the desired file and press ENTER to gain access. 5
6. Select the File to Copy from the source directory.
7. Pass into the destination directory to select the
destination ENTER TEM

If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk

and press ENTER to access then select a
destination. ESCAPE

8. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destina-

tion.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6/7
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the win-

dow and repeat the operation by copying to
8
a different destination. ENTER TEM

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Move
Use the Move command to shift a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. This option cancels the file at the
source.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - Use the Move function only in

cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Models without a Hard disk can move files from

within the same floppy or within RAM.
To move a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
The example which follows shows how to use
the Move operation within RAM (Move Single
Sound), and provides sufficient information which
you can apply to all Move situations.
1/2 DISK

H. D
+

1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.

If the main Move page is not shown, use the
page scroll ( ) buttons to open it.

2. Select the MOVE command required from the

main page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work
in. Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» auto-
matically assigns the same device to source
3/4
and destination. F1
ENTER TEM

F2

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector. F3

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•6 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. If necessary, select a Block containing the de-
sired file then press ENTER to access the Block. 5
6. Select the File to Move from the source direc- ENTER TEM

tory.
7. Pass into the destination directory and select the
destination. ESCAPE

In this case, use the Page scroll but-

tons to scroll through the Sound Groups and
the / directional arrows to scroll through
the individual Sound Group locations. 6/7
8. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the
selected destination.
The file at the original location (in this case,
19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new lo-
cation (in this case, 17-8).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself.

Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the win-

dow and repeat the operation by moving to a
different destination. 8 ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Utility

After pressing DISK, use the page button to pass NAVIGATING IN THE UTILITY PAGE
to the last Disk page: Utility.
Move around in the Disk pages with the naviga-
This page provides useful functions for disk for- tional tools which are;
matting and servicing.
• the directional arrows [ / - / ]:
The UTILITY page options include:
• Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
• Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);
• Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)
• Change Disk Name
Hard Disk operations
• the page selector buttons:
• Format Hard Disk
• Hard Disk Check-Recovery
• Hard Disk Sleep Time
• Hard Disk protection
Execute the Disk commands with the ENTER
button or abort with the ESCAPE button:

ENTER TEMPO / DATA

ESCAPE

The cursor is represented by a negative high-

light zone which moves vertically and serves to
identify which display operation is selected.

Utility page

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•8 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB) FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)
This operation force-formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk This operation formats a 3.5” DD floppy disk in
for WK4 use. MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilo-
This extended format procedure prepares the disk bytes), suitable in particular for MIDI file ex-
with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with changes.
the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format The procedure is identical to that described for
cannot be read by computers. the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
You can also use a formatted disk, provided CHANGE DISK NAME
that you are not interested in conserving its
contents. Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy
disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows
2. Select «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)». quick recognition of the contents during a search
through disks without labels. If you write the disk’s
The following dialog window appears: name on the index label, you can reduce the
search times even further.
WK4 assigns a generic code name to disks for-
matted with the Utility formatting procedures - the
name depending on the size.
For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned
a code name such as the one shown below:

3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING: All the Disk initializing procedures

cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be
absolutely sure that the contents include files that
you don’t mind losing.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Use the standard name entry procedure to give

FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB) your disks a name.
This operation formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk in Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with
MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). Escape.
This format permits file exchange with comput-
ers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macin-
tosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of
reading MS-DOS format disks.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FORMAT HARD DISK HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY
This operation formats the Hard disk and is used This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk
in two cases: to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk
can be caused by:
1) as an essential operation after installing a
new Hard disk kit (if you install a Hard Disk • a power failure during a Save operation;
supplied by Generalmusic, do not format the • physical defects of the disk.
unit as it will contain factory loaded files); If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to ac-
2) when a rapid cancellation of the HD con- cess it prompts a message similar to the follow-
tents is required. ing:

1. Enter «Edit Disk» and go to the «Utility» page.

2. Select the «Format hard disk» function.
The following dialog window appears:

Use the following recovery procedure as soon

as possible.

1. Enter «Edit Disk» and go to the «Utility» page.

2. Select «Hard disk check/recovery» .
The following dialog window appears:
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
As a security measure, a second confirmation re-
quest appears (for security reasons):

3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.

Shortly after, another dialog window appears
similar to the one below:

4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the

hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to can-
cel.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Note: A hard disk can be installed with an IDE In this case, the message shows no errors.
interface with a capacity not greater than 500 Mb. In cases where errors exist, make a note of
The installation requires the Generalmusic HD kit.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ the numbers shown in the dialog window as

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•10 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 they are useful to provide information for tech- HARD DISK PROTECTION (F8)
nical assistance.
As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file
• Check version - Version of the test pro- loss, all WK4 instruments with factory fitted Hard
gram and data recovery. Disks leave the factory with the Hard Disk Pro-
• Error found - Code relating to the error tection active (shown in negative highlight).
found. “None” appears in cases where no
errors are encountered.

Backup copies In order to use the Save, Erase or Move opera-

At the end of a work session, always remember tions on the Hard Disk, the protection must be
to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard removed.
disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer Simply press the soft button F8 to deactivate the
damage and data loss, you will always be able to protection. The option turns positive.
recuperate the data from disks.
If you work with floppy disks only, it is a good
idea to prepare a second copy of the disk at the
end of your work session. To copy data from one
disk to another, you must first copy the original
data to RAM then save (or copy) to the backup
copy disk.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while

the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save,
Copy, Move, Erase operations).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

HARD DISK SLEEP TIME

To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rota-
tion of the hard disk, you can set this parameter
to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Additional functions
This section explains the various options found SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector,
some of which are permanent, others specific to This option is active only if the instrument has
a particular command or disk page. been installed with one or both optional Sample
RAM kits.
The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all
NEW FL. DISK (F5) the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the
type of Sample-RAM required to access.
Updates the current directory after changing a
disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument
to recognize the disk change.
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following
dialog window:

Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor

buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a
‘flag’ is applied to it to indicate which Sample-
You can also see the new directory by closing RAM contains the sound’s associated sample.
the «Edit Disk» environment with ESCAPE then
re-entering «Edit Disk». When you save the RAM -Sound, the ‘flag’ is
retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds
again with the Load All Sound or Load Single
FREE MEMORY (F6) Block operations, the RAM -Sounds are di-
rected to the Sample-RAM indicated by the ‘flag’.
This option displays the amount of memory re-
maining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, System- ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed
Note - The samples saved in a Block with
Sample-RAM. successive Save Single Sound operations may be
too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this
case, the instrument attempts to load all the
samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case
also the samples are too large for the available
memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•12 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 BLOCK RENAME (F7) SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)
This option, which appears in all File Selectors, This option appears in all second level pages of
allows you to modify the name of the selected all Single File operations. The second level pages
Block. Use the standard method of name entry are those that appear after confirming a File Se-
as described in the Data Entry chapter. lector selection.
The Search Resource function is particularly use-
ful if your instrument is fitted with a Hard Disk
BLOCK SIZE (F8) containing a large number of files.
This option, which appears in all File selectors, For example, if you do not remember in which
determines the dimensions of the currently se- Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-pro-
lected Block. The information appears under the grammed Sound, or you want to go directly to a
directory of the active File Selector. Block name without scrolling through the entire
The dimensions of the same Block residing in Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search op-
RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes, tion to open an insertion window where you can
due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is specify a name.
not saved to disk.

The name can be of the particular file you are

looking for, or part of the entire name. For exam-
ple, if your Sound name includes the word “or-
gan” or a Block contains a particular sequence
of letters, you can search for all files which in-
clude the inserted name.
Press ENTER to start the search and the first
Sound which includes the written name will ap-
pear, showing its location:

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 If the displayed file is not the one you are looking SEARCH NEXT (F8)
for, use the “F7 to Previous” and “F8 to Next op-
tions” are required. This option recalls the next Sound on the search
list containing the string of characters specified
When you find the file you are looking for, press in the Sound Search option.
ENTER to pass directly to the file location or
ESCAPE to abort the search operation.
Sound Search will also inform you of the absence
a specified name by showing “Not Found”.

SOUND SEARCH... (F7)

The Sound Search function appears in the third
level directory displays for the following opera-
tions:
• Load Single Sound;
• Save Single Sound;
• Erase Single Sound;
• Copy Single Sound;:
• Move Single Sound.
The function recalls the nearest Sound having
the string of characters specified in the active
zone.

1. Press Soft button F7.

The following dialog window appears:

2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the

Sound you are looking for.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.

3. Press ENTER.
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound
found containing the specified characters.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•14 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE WHEN US- Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MS-
ING WK4 DISKS WITH A COMPUTER DOS, Windows 3.1, Atari it is essential to bear in
mind the following advice:
In name write situations, the WK4 allows you to
assign names of up to 10 characters for all files, • do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.:
except the Block, which cannot contain more than «MY FILE.BLK»). MS-DOS is not able to
8 characters, in compatibility with the MS-DOS handle file names containing spaces. To
and Windows 3.1 operating systems. Further- separate a name into two parts while retain-
more, Block files include the extension «.BLK» ing the MS-DOS compatibility, you have a
after the name. If your files are to be used in choice of two methods:
MS-DOS devices (IBM PC’s and compatibles), 1) separate two parts by the “underscore”
bear in mind the 8 character limit of these sys- symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK»).
tems when giving your files a name.
2) Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first
In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems, letters of both parts of the name, lowercase
file names can include more that 8 characters. for the others (e.g.: «MyFile.BLK»).
When a name is modified on a computer, the fol-
• do not assign two files the same name, one
lowing rules should be remembered:
with uppercase letters and the other with
• do not change the Block file extension be- lowercase (e.g. «MYFILE» and «myfile»).
cause it identifies the file type and therefore, MS-DOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari make no
the structure of the WK4 Block. distinctions between uppercase and
• do not write Block names longer that 8 char- lowercase characters, regardless of the fact
acters (excluding the extension). that MS-DOS and Windows are able to read
both types.
• the maximum number of files in a Block can-
not exceed the limit imposed by the WK4
RAM. The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macin-
• do not change the names of the permanent tosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Win-
files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM dows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can
Style Group names). WK4 requires stand- be found in a Block.
ard names to recognize the structure of the
data.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25•15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

25•16 Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix
• Sound tables
• Drum tables
• Style tables
• Performance tables
• Effects tables
• MIDI Implementation
• MIDI Controllers
• Glossary
• Index (alphabetical)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PIANO group
1 Piano12 PianoMk12 PickPiano2 PianoStage2
2 Piano22 PianoW22 Pianoctave2
3 Piano32 E.G.Piano12 E.G.Piano22
4 HonkyTonk2 DetPiano2 Western2
5 E.Piano12 ThinRhodx2 E.Piano42 RhodxFilt2 E.PianoMk2 E.PianoX2
6 E.Piano22 E.Piano32 E.Piano52 E.PianoSft2 DetuneE.P.2 DynE.P.2
7 Harpsichor2 Harpsich22 Harpsich32
8 Clavinet2 SynClav2 WowClav2
CHROM PERC. group
9 Celesta2 CelestaPlk2 ToyPiano2
10 Glockenspl2 GlockVibes2 GlockChoir2
11 MusicBox2 WineGls12 MusicBell2
12 Vibraphone2 Vibes22 SynVibes2
13 Marimba2 Marimba22 Mallet2
14 Xylophone2 Xylophone22 XyloTribal2
15 TubularBel2 SoftBell2 Oohlalaa2
16 Santur2 BarChimes2 Climbing2
ORGAN group
17 Organ12 16’1’Draw2 Organ1WX2 OrgTheatre2 16’1’Vib32
18 Organ22 16’8’5’Drw2 JazzOrgan32 Organ3W2
19 Organ32 SwOrgan2 SynOrg12 OrganC32
20 ChurchOrg12 Church22 Organ3WX2 Organ1W2 PipeOrg32
21 ReedOrgan2 PipeOrgan2 Organ42 PipeChiff2
22 Musette2 Accord12 Accord22 Accord32
23 Harmonica2 Blusette2 WestHarmon2
24 Bandoneon2 Cassotto2 OrganLfo2
GUITAR group
25 NylonGtr2 SoloGtr2 VocalGtr2 PedalSteel
26 SteelGtr2 12StrGtr2 SteelGtr12 SteelGtr22 Mandolin2 Mandolin22
27 JazzGtr12 OctJzGtr2 Hawaiian2 JazzGtr22 Pedal Steel
28 CleanGtr2 ElGuitar12 ChorusGtr2 ElGuitar22 Dyn.Clean2
29 MutedGtr2 Muted22 Dyn.Muted2 MutedWha2
30 Overdrive2 WhaGtr12 5thOverdr2
31 DistGtr2 FuzzGtr2 HeavyGt2 LeadDist2
32 HarmonxGtr2 SlowHarmx2 HarmGtr32

[GrandPiano2W] means: 2 = 2 oscillators per voice. W = compatible with WX sounds.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•2 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Tables A•3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BASS group
33 AcoustcBs12 AcoustcBs22 AcousticBs32 Dyn.AcoBs2 HarmAcBs2
34 FingeredBs2 Dyn.Fingrd2 Dyn.Bass12 Dyn.Baxx’2
35 PickBass2 Dyn.Bass22 PckBass22 PkBsMute2 HarmElBs2
36 Fretless2 AcidBass12 Flanged2
37 SlapBass12 Dyn.Bass32 SlapSynBs2
38 SlapBass22 WXBass2 StopBass2 ThumBass2
39 SynBass12 SynBass32 TecknoBass2
40 SynBass22 SynBass42 RaveBass2 SynthBass22
STRINGS group
41 Violin2 SlowViolin2 ViolinOrch2 Violin 2
42 Viola2 BowedViola2 ViolaPad2
43 Cello2 SlowCello2 CelloEns2
44 Contrabass2 BowedBass2 Staccato2
45 TremoloStr2 OctTremolo2 Plectra2
46 Pizzicato2 OctPizz2 EchoPizz2
47 Harp2 HarpDelay2 Spacehar2
48 Timpani2 TimpaniEFX2 Dyn.Orch I’I2
ENSEMBLE group
49 Strings2 StereoStrg2 StrgGlock2 DualStrgs2 Strings 2
50 SlwStrings2 StrgOrch2 St.SlwStrg2
51 SynStrg12 SynStrg32 SynStrg52
52 SynStrg22 SynStrg42 Strings32
53 Choir2 VoiceUuh2 SlowUuh2
54 VoiceOohs2 VoiceAah2 SlowAah2
55 SynVox2 SkatVoices2 Vocoder2
56 OrchHits2 Rave2 Dyn.St.Hit2 HitsRev2
BRASS group
57 Trumpet2 FlugelAttk2 FlugelHorn2
58 Trombone2 Trombone32 WowTromb22 TrombSwell2
59 Tuba2 ShortTuba2 WowTuba2
60 MutedTrp12 MutedTrp22 Dyn.MtTrp2
61 FrenchHorn2 Dyn.FrHorn2 TotoHorns2 FrHrnSwell2
62 Brass2 Brass22 BrassRips2 BrassFall2 BrassTrp2
63 SynBrass12 SynBras22 SyntHorn2 SynBrass32
64 SynBrass22 SlowHorn2 AttkHorn2 SynBrass42 SynBrass52

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•4 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Tables A•5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REED group
65 Soprano2 Soprano22 SoprFilter2
66 SoftSax2 SaxNoise2 SoftFilt2 AltoSax2
67 TenorSax2 OctaveSax2 TenFilter2
68 BaritonSax2 BaritDet2 BariFilter2
69 Oboe2 OboeChiff2 OboeFilter2
70 EnglisHorn2 EngHorn22 HornFilter2
71 Bassoon2 Bassoon22 BassoonFlt2
72 Clarinet2 ClarSolo2 ClarFilter2 LiscioClar2
PIPE group
73 Piccolo2 HardFlute12 HardFlt22
74 Flute2 Dyn.Flute12 DynHiFlute2
75 Recorder2 HardFlute22 Bubbler2
76 PanFlute2 PanFlute22 Dyn.Pan2
77 BottleBlow2 BottleNois2 Tube2
78 Shakuhachi2 Shakupad2 ShakuVoice2
79 Whistle2 Whistle1WX2 Whistle3WX2
80 Ocarina2 OcarinaPan2 OcarinaSyn2
SYNTH LEAD group
81 SquareWave2 Pulse12 Pulse22
82 SawWave2 ObxFilter2 Lyle2
83 SynCalliop2 Azimut2 SynLead12
84 ChiffLead2 Chopper2 Digital2
85 Charang2 Jump2 SoundTrk2
86 SoloVox2 FiltRes12 FiltRes22
87 5thSawWave2 Decay12 Decay22
88 BassLead2 Obx22 Obx32
SYNTH PAD group
89 Fantasia2 NewAge2 PPG2 Fantasy12
90 WarmPad Obx12 AnlgPad2 Waveaura2
91 Polysynth2 Fantasy22 Fantasy32
92 SpaceVoice2 VocBells2 Angels2 OcBreath2
93 BowedGlass2 Prophet12 Prophet22
94 MetalPad2 Bright22 Analogic2 Bright32
95 HaloPad2 Slave2 Atmosphere2
96 SweepPad2 Machiner2 Decay32 Waiting2 Budweis2 Tibet2

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•6 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Tables A•7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SYN SFX group
97 IceRain2 Noiseres2 BigRoom2 Submarin2
98 Soundtrack2 MoonWind2 Slope2 Ekoendls2 SynRain2
99 Crystal2 Wind2 SynLead22 Jets2
100 Atmosphere2 Arp260002 GlockAthm2 Smak2
101 Brightness2 WithGas2 PopUp2 OnOff2
102 Goblin2 Resonance2 NoGravity2 Synthex32
103 EchoDrops2 Synthex12 Synthex22 Synthex42 Synthex52 Synthex62
104 StarTheme2 StarTheme22 PowerBad2 StarTheme32
ETHNIC group
105 Sitar2 SitarDet2 SynSitar2
106 Banjo2 BanjoOct2 EthnicGtr2
107 Shamisen2 ShamSitar2 SynSham2
108 Koto2 Kanoun2 TrpClarin2
109 Kalimba2 ShrtKalimb2 SaxTrumpt2
110 Bagpipe2 BagpipeEns2 BrassEns2
111 Fiddle2 Hukin2 FiddleBell2
112 Shanai2 BacktoWS2 VoiceSpect2
PERCUSSIVE group
113 TinkleBell2 DK_STAND.12 DK_STAND.22 DK_STAND.32 DK_STD.2WX 2
114 Agogo2 DK_ROOM2 DK_WS2 DK_ROOM1WX2 DK_ROOM2WX2
115 SteelDrums2 DK_POWER2 DK_STD.1WX2 DK_POWER1WX2 DKPOWER2WX 2
116 Woodblock2 DK_ELECT.2 DK_DANCE2 DK_ELECT1WX2 DKELECT2WX2
117 Taiko2 DK_HOUSE2 DK_TECHNO2 DK_HOUSE1WX2 DKHOUSE2WX 2
118 Melo.Tom12 DK_JAZZ12 DK_JAZZ22 DK_JAZZ_WX2
119 SynthDrum2 DK_BRUSH2 DK_M12 DK_BRUSHWX2
120 ReverseCym2 DK_ORCH2 DK_SY772 DK_ORCH_WX2
SFX group
121 GtFretNois2 Gtr.WhaWha |’|2 GtrNoise2
122 BreathNois2 Zapp2 KeyClick2
123 Seashore2 TickTack2 Drop2
124 Bird2 Scratch1 2
Water2
125 Telephone12 Telephone22 Door2
126 Helicopter2 SynPerc32 Clackson2
127 Applause2 HeartBeat2 PickScrape2
128 GunShot2 Explosion 2
Bomb2

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•8 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ROM-Sounds
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

97 BDHOUSE12 BDHOUSE22 BDELECT12 BDJAZZ2 BDROOM12 BDSTD12 BDSTD22 BDSTD32

98 BDTEKNO2 BDORCH2 BDPOWER2
99 RIMSHOT12 RIMSHOT22 HOUSERIM2 STICK2
100 SDELECT2 DYNSDJAZZ2 SDJAZZ22 SDJAZZ32 SDORCH2 SDROOM12 SDROOM22 SDSTD12
101 SDSTD22 SDSTD32 SDSTD42 HOUSSD12 HOUSESD22
102 HOUSECLAP2
103 ROLLSNARE2 BRUSREV2 BRUSRIG2 BRUSHSLP2 BRUSHTAP2
104 TOMELEC2 TOMHIGH2 TOMJAZZ2 TOMROOM2 TOMLOW2 TIMPANI2 OPSURDO22

105 HHCLO1L2 HHCLO1S2 HHOPEN12 HHPEDAL2 HHTGHT12 HHTGHT22 HOUSEHH2 HHCLO22

2
106 HHOPEN2
107 CRASHORC2 CRASH2 HOUSERIDE2 RIDECUP2 RIDECYM2 SPLASH2 CHINA2 SMASH2
2 2
108 TAMBOURINE TAMBSLP COWBELL2 2
VIBRASLAP HOUSECOWB 2

109 BONGOHISL2 CONGALSLAP2 BONGOLOW2 CONGAHSLAP2CONGALSLAP2 CONGAHIGH2 CONGALOW2 HOUSETCON2

110 TIMBALES2 TIMBLOW2 AGOGO2 CABASA2 CABASAL2 MARACAS2 WHISTLE2 MUTBELL2
111 GUIROLONG GUIROSHORT CLAVES2
2 2
WOODBLOCK QUICAHIGH QUICALOW2
2 2
TRIANLONG2 TRIANSHORT2
112 SHAKER2 JNGLEBELL2 WINDCHIMES 2 CASTANETS2 MTSURDO2 OPSURDO12 DARBKHIGH2 DARBKLOW2

113 FINGERSNAP2 DROP2 NOISE22 WATER2 DOOR2 KITCHEN2 LOGDRUM2 CLAKSON2

114 VOICES12 VOICES2 2
VOICES32 VOXHHCL2 VOXTAP 2
VOXTIP2 DOLLYVOX2 BABYVOX2
115 FINGBELL2 ZAPP2 SCRATCH12 SCRATCH22 TOMBRUSH2 SQCLICK2
116 NOISEPERC2 RASPYRIDE 2

117
118
119
120

121 WhaWha12 WhaWha22 WhaWha32 WhaWha42

122
123
124
125
126
127 Sinus
128 Empty0

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Tables A•9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ○

C5 72 WHISTLE 110-15 < < < < <

GUIROSHORT 111-10 < < < < <
○

73
74 GUIROLONG 111-9 < < < < <
○

75 CLAVES 111-11 < < < < <

○

76 WOODBLOCK 111-12 < < < < <

○

77 WOODBLOCK 111-12 < < < < <

○

78 QUICAHIGH 111-13 < < < < <

○

79 QUICALOW 111-14 < < < < <

○

80 TRIANSHORT 111-16 < < < < <

○

81 TRIANLONG 111-15 < < < < <

82
○

SHAKER 112-9 < < < < <

83
○

JINGLEBELL 112-10 < < < < <

WINDCHIMES 112-11 < < < < <
○

C6 84
85 CASTANETS 112-12 < < < < <
○

86 MTSURDO 112-13 < < < < <

○

87 OPSURDO 112-14 < < < < <

○

88
○

89
○

90
○

91
○

92
93
○

94
○

95
○

C7 96
○

97
○

98

○
99

○
100

○
○
101
102

○
103

○
104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○
105
106

○
107

○
○
C8 108

○
○

A•10 Appendix
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkits

○
○
○
“<“ = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

○
○
Drumkits

Tables A•11
○
○
DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 DK_ROOM 114-2-1 DK_POWER 115-2-1 DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 DK_JAZZ 118-2-1

○
25 ROLLSNARE 103-9 < < < < <

○
26 FINGERSNAP 113-9 < < < < <

○
27 ZAPP 115-10 < < < < <

○
28 GunShot 128-1 < < < < <

○
29 SCRATCH2 115-12 < < < < <

○
30 SCRATCH1 115-11 < < < < <

○
31 STICK 99-12 < < < < <

○
32 SQCLICK 115-15 < < < < <
33

○
HOUSERIM 99-11 < < < < <
34 MUTBELL 110-16 < < < < <

○
35
BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE2 97-10 <

○
C2 36 BDSTD1 97-14 BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE BDJAZZ 97-12

○
37 RIMSHOT1 99-9 < < < HOUSERIM 99-11 <

○
38 SDSTD1 100-16 SDROOM1 100-14 SDROOM2 100-15 SDELECT 100-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12

○
39 HOUSECLAP 102-9 < < < < <

○
40 SDSTD4 101-11 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 SDROOM1 100-14 HOUSESD2 101-13 SDSTD3 101-10

○
41 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11

○
42 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHTGHT1 105-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 < HOUSEHH 105-15 HHTGHT1 105-13

○
43 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11
44 HHPEDAL 105-12 < < < HOUSEHH 105-15 <

○
45 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11

○
46
○

HHOPEN2 106-9 < < HHOPEN1 105-11 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN1 105-11
47
○

TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11
○

C3 48 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11
CRASH 107-10 < < < HOUSERIDE 107-11 <
○

49
50 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMELEC 104-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11
○

51 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < <

○

52 CHINA 107-15 < < ReverseCym 120-1 < <

○

53 RIDECUP 107-12 < < < < <

○

54 TAMBSLP 108-10 < < < < <

○

55 SPLASH 107-14 < < < < <

○

56 COWBELL 108-11 < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 <

57
○

CRASH 107-10 < < < < <

58
○

VIBRASLAP 108-12 < < < < <

59
RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < <
○

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CONGASLAP 109-10 < < < < <
○

C4 60
61 BONGOLOW 109-11 < < < < <
○

62 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 <

○

63 CONGAHIGH 109-14 < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 <

○

64 CONGALOW 109-15 < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 <

○

65 TIMBALES 110-9 < < < < <

○

66 TIMBLOW 110-10 < < < < <

○

67 AGOGO 110-11 < < < < <

68 AGOGO 110-11 < < < < <
○

69 CABASA 110-12 < < < < <

○

70 MARACAS 110-14 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

○

71
WHISTLE 110-15 < < < < <
○
 < < < BONGOLOW 109-11 < <
○

C5 72
73 < < < BONGOLOW 109-11 < <
○

74 < < < CONGASLAP 109-12 < <

○

75 < < < CONGAHIGH 109-14 < <

○

76 < < < CONGALOW 109-15 < <

○

77 < < < GUIROLONG 111-9 < <

○

78 < < < QUICALOW 111-14 < <

○

79 < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < <

○

80 < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < <

81
○

< < < AGOGO 110-11 < <

82 < < < TRIANLONG 111-15 < <
○

83
< < < WHISTLE 110-15 < <
○

C6 84 < < < BDHOUSE1 97-9 < <

○

85 < < < NOISEPERC 116-9 < <

○

86 < < < HOUSSD1 101-12 < <

○

87 < < < VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

88 Applause 127-1 VOICES 3 114-11

○

VOICES2 114-10
89
○

90 VOXHHCL 114-12
VOICES2 114-10
○

91
92 VOXHHCL 114-12
○

93 VOXTIP 114-14
○

94 VOXTAP 114-13
○

95 CLAKSON 113-16
○

C7 96 DOLLYVOX 114-15
○

97 TAMBSLP 108-10
○

98 ROLLSNARE 103-9

○
99 SDORCH 100-13

○
100 HHCLO1S 105-10

○
CLAVES 111-11
101

○
102 CONGALOW 109-15

○
103 QUICAHIGH 111-13

○
104 AGOGO 110-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

105

○
STICK 99-12
106 STICK 99-12

○
107 STICK 99-12

○
STICK 99-12

○
C8 108

○
○

A•12 Appendix
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkits

○
○
○
“<“ = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

○
○
Drumkits

Tables A•13
○
○
DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 DK_WS 114-3-1 DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 DK_DANCE 116-3-1

○
25 < < < < <

○
26 < < < < <

○
27 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < <

○
28 < HHPEDAL 105-12 < < <

○
29 < HHOPEN2 106-9 < < <

○
30 < RIDECYM 107-13 < < <

○
31 < < < < <
32

○
< < < < <
33 < < < < <

○
34 < < < < <

○
35
< BDSTD3 97-16 BDSTD3 97-16 BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11

○
C2 36 BDJAZZ 97-12 BDORCH 98-10 < BDPOWER 98-11 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11

○
37 < < < SDELECT 100-9 < <

○
38 BRUSHTAP 103-13 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD4 101-11 SDROOM2 100-15 SDROOM2 100-15 SDELECT 100-9

○
39 BRUSHSLP 103-12 CASTANETS 112-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 < <
40

○
BRUSREV 103-10 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 SDSTD3 101-10 SDROOM1 100-14

○
41 TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMELEC 104-9

○
42 HHTGHT1 105-13 TIMPANI 104-15 HHCLO2 105-16 CABASA 110-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 <
43 TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < TOMELEC 104-9

○
44 < TIMPANI 104-15 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < <

○
45 TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < TOMELEC 104-9

○
46
○

< TIMPANI 104-15 < COWBELL 108-11 < HHOPEN1 105-11

47
○

TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < RIMSHOT2 99-10 < TOMELEC 104-9
TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < TOMELEC 104-9
○

C3 48
49 < TIMPANI 104-15 < BRUSRIG 103-11 < <
○

50 TOMBRUSH 115-13 TIMPANI 104-15 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 < TOMELEC 104-9
○

51 < TIMPANI 104-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 < <

○

52 < TIMPANI 104-15 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < ReverseCym 120-1

○

53 < TIMPANI 104-15 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < <

○

54 < < < HHCLO1S 105-10 < <

○

55 < < < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < <

○

56 < < < HHPEDAL 105-12 < <

57
○

< < < WOODBLOCK 111-12 < <

58 < < < HHOPEN2 106-9 < <
○

59
< CRASHORCH 107-9 < HOUSCLAP 102-9 < <
○

< < < BDSTD1 97-14 < <

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

C4 60
○

61 < < < RIDECYM 107-13 < <

○

62 < < < SDSTD1 100-16 < <

○

63 < < < RIDECUP 107-12 < <

64
○

< < < TOMROOM 104-12 < <

○

65 < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < <

○

66 < < < SPLASH 107-14 < <

67 < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < <
○

68 < < < CRASH 107-10 < <

○

69 < < < VIBRASLAP 108-12 < <

○

70 < < < CHINA 107-15 < <

○

71
< < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 < <
○
 ○

C5 72 < < CONGAHIGH 109-14 BreathNois 122-1 < <

< < TIMBALES 110-9 VIBRASLAP 108-12 < GUIRLONG 111-9
○

73
74 < < TRIANSHORT 111-16 VOICES1 114-9 < <
○

75 < < TIMBALES 110-9 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

76 < < TRIANLONG 111-15 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

77 < < NOISEPERC 116-9 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

78 < < NOISEPERC 116-9 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

79 < < DOOR 113-13 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

80 < < NOISEPERC 116-9 VOICES1 114-9 < <

○

81 < < SDSTD2 101-9 VOICES1 114-9 < <

82
○

< < ROLLSNARE 103-9 VOICES1 114-9 < FINGERSNAP 113-9

83
○

< < SDSTD3 101-10 VOICES1 114-9 < CELESTA 9-1-9

< < VOICES1 114-9 < BARCHIMES 16-2-1
○

C6 84
85 < < VOICES1 114-9 < <
○

86 < < VOICES1 114-9 < DARBKHIGH 112-15

○

87 < < VOICES1 114-9 < DARBKLOW 112-16

○

88 VOICES1 114-9 DROP 113-13

○

VOICES1 114-9 WATER 113-12

89
○

90 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9

○

91 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13

○

92 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTIP 114-14

93 VOICES1 114-9 CLACKSON 113-16
○

94 VOICES1 114-9 DOOR 113-13

○

95 VOICES1 114-9 RASPY RIDE 116-10

○

C7 96 VOICES1 114-9 BABYVOX 114-16

○

97 EMPTY
○

98

○
99

○
100

○
○
101
102

○
103

○
104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○
105
106

○
107

○
○
C8 108

○
○

A•14 Appendix
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkits

○
○
○
“<“ = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

○
○
Drumkits

Tables A•15
○
○
DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 DK_M1 119-3-1 DK_SY77. 120-3-1 DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1

○
25 < < < ZAPP 115-10

○
26 < < ZAPP 115-10

○
27 < < < <

○
28 < < < KITCHEN 113-14

○
29 < < < SCRATCH1 115-12

○
30 < < < <

○
31 < < < <

○
32 < < < <
33

○
< < < RIMSHOT1 99-9
34 < < < BABYVOX 114-16

○
35
BDTEKNO 98-9 < BDSTD1 97-14 <

○
C2 36 BDJAZZ 97-12 BDJAZZ 97-12 < BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD2 97-15 <

○
37 HOUSERIM 99-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 RIMSHOT1 99-9 <

○
38 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDJAZZ3 100-12 BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD2 101-9

○
39 < < BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 < <

○
40 HOUSESD2 101-13 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 SDJAZZ3 100-12 SCSTS3 101-10

○
41 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMLOW 104-14 < TOMROOM 104-12

○
42 HHCLO2 105-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 SDORCH 100-13 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHTGHT1 105-13 <

○
43 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMROOM 104-12
44 HHTGHT1 105-13 < HOUSSD1 101-12 BDHOUSE1 97-9 < <

○
45 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 SDROOM2 100-15 BDSTD2 97-15 < TOMROOM 104-12

○
46
○

HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HHOPEN1 105-11 <
47
○

HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12
○

C3 48 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12
HHOPEN2 106-9 < TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 < <
○

49
50 HOUSETCON 109-16 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12
○

51 ReverseCym 120-1 < TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 < <

○

52 < < TOMHIGH 104-10 SDELECT 100-9 < <

○

53 < < HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < <

○

54 < < HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSECLAP 102-9 < <

○

55 < < HHPEDAL 105-12 COWBELL 108-11 < <

○

56 HOUSECOWB 108-13 < HOUSERIDE 107-11 CABASA 110-12 < <

57
○

< < HHOPEN2 106-9 HHCLO1S 105-10 < <

58
○

< < TAMBOURINE 108-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 < <

59
< < HOUSEHH 105-15 HHOPEN2 106-9 < <
○

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

< < CRASH 107-10 CRASH 107-10 < <
○

C4 60
61 < < CHINA 107-15 ROLLSNARE 103-9 < <
○

62 HOUSETCON 109-16 < RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECYM 107-13 < <

○

63 HOUSETCON 109-16 < RIDECUP 107-12 RIDECUP 107-12 < <

○

64 HOUSETCON 109-16 < CABASA 110-12 TubularBel 15-1 < <

○

65 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 < VOXHHCL 114-12 TubularBel 15-1 < <

○

66 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < HOUSCLAP 102-9 TubularBel 15-1 < TIMBALES 110-9
○

67 < < BONGOLOW 109-11 KITCHEN 113-14 < <

68 < < BONGOLOW 109-11 KITCHEN 113-14 < <
○

69 < < DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 < <

○

70 VOXHHCL 114-12 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 < VOXHHCL 114-12
○

71
< < CONGALOW 109-15 BreathNois 122-1 < <
○
 ○

C5 72 < < < < < <

GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9
○

73
74 < < < < < <
○

75 < < < < < <

○

76 < < < < < <

○

77 < < < < < <

○

78 < < < < < <

○

79 < < < < < <

○

80 < < < < < <

○

81 < < < < < <

82
○

FINGERSNAP 113-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 CABASAL 110-13 FINGERSNAP 113-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9
83
CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1
○

BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2
○

C6 84
85 < < < < < <
○

86 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15
○

87 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16
○

88 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10
○

WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12
89
○

90 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9
○

91 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13
○

92 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14
93 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16
○

94 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13
○

95 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10
○

C7 96 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16
○

97 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16
○

98

○
99

○
100

○
○
101
102

○
103

○
104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○
105
106

○
107

○
○
C8 108

○
○

A•16 Appendix
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkits

○
○
○
“<“ = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

○
○
Drumkits

Tables A•17
○
○
DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1

○
25 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10

○
26 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10

○
27 < < < < < HHCLO1S 105-10

○
28 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 HHCLO1L 105-9

○
SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 HHOPEN2 106-9
29

○
30 < < < < < RIDECYMB 107-13

○
31 < < < < < <

○
32 < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11
33 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9

○
34 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16

○
35 BDSTD1 97-11 BDSTD1 97-11 < < < <

○
C2 36 BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE 97-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 BDSTD2 97-15 TIMPANI 48-1

○
37 < < HOUSERIM 99-11 < < <

○
38 SDROOM2 110-15 SDROOM2 110-15 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDJAZZ2 100-11 BRUSHTAP 103-13 SDJAZZ3 100-12

○
39 < < < < BRUSHSLAP FINGERSNAP 113-8

○
40 SDSTD3 101-10 SDROOM2 110-15 SDSTD2 101-9 SDJAZZ3 100-12 BRUSHREV 103-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12

○
TOMROOM 104-12 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1
41

○
42 < < HOUSEHH 105-15 < < TIMPANI 48-1
TOMROOM 104-12 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1

○
43
44 < < HOUSEHH 105-15 < < TIMPANI 48-1

○
45 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1

○
46
○

< < HOUSERIDE 107-11 < < TIMPANI 48-1

47
○

TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1
TOMROOM 104-12 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1
○

C3 48
< < < < < TIMPANI 48-1
○

49
50 TOMROOM 104-12 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < TIMPANI 48-1
○

51 < < < < < TIMPANI 48-1

○

52 < < < < < TIMPANI 48-1

○

< < < < < TIMPANI 48-1

53
○

54 < < < < < <

○

55 < < < < < <

○

56 < < < < < <

57
○

< < < < < <

58 < < < < < <
○

59 < < < < < <

○

< < < < < <

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○

C4 60
61 < < < < < <
○

62 < < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < <

○

63 < < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < <

○

64 < < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < <

○

< < < < < <

65
○

66 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9
< < COWBELL 108-11 < < <
○

67
68 < < < < < <
○

69 < < < < < <

○

70 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12
○

71 < < < < < <

○
 ○

C5 72 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 GUIROLONG 113-9 RIDECYM 107-13
○

73
74 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
○

75 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

76 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

77 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

78 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

79 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

80 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

81 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

82
○

FINGERSNAP 113-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 CABASAL 110-13 FINGERSNAP 113-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 RIDECYM 107-13
83
CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 CELESTA 9-1 RIDECYM 107-13
○

BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 BARCHIMES 16-2 RIDECYM 107-13
○

C6 84
85 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
○

86 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKHIGH 112-15 RIDECYM 107-13
○

87 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKLOW 112-16 RIDECYM 107-13
○

88 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 DROP 113-10 RIDECYM 107-13
○

WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 WATER 113-12 RIDECYM 107-13
89
○

90 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 RIDECYM 107-13
○

91 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTAP 114-13 RIDECYM 107-13
○

92 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTIP 114-14 RIDECYM 107-13
93 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 CLAKSON 113-16 RIDECYM 107-13
○

94 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 DOOR 113-13 <
○

95 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 RASPYRIDE 116-10 <
○

C7 96 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 <
○

97 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 EMPTY 128-16 <
○

98

○
99

○
100

○
○
101
102

○
103

○
104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○
105
106

○
107

○
○
C8 108

○
○

A•18 Appendix
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkits

○
○
○
“<“ = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

○
○
Drumkits

Tables A•19
○
○
DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1

○
25 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 RIDECYM 107-13

○
26 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 RIDECYM 107-13

○
27 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
28 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 RIDECYM 107-13

○
29 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-12 RIDECYM 107-13

○
30 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
31 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
32 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
33

○
RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIMSHOT1 99-9 RIDECYM 107-13
34 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 BABYVOX 114-16 RIDECYM 107-13

○
35
< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
C2 36 < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE2 97-10 RIDECYM 107-13

○
37 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
38 SDSTD2 101-9 SDSTD3 101-10 SDROOM1 100-14 < SDSTD2 101-9 RIDECYM 107-13

○
39 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○
40 SDSTD3 101-10 SDROOM2 110-15 SDELECT 100-9 SDSTD3 101-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 RIDECYM 107-13

○
41 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13

○
42 < < < HOUSEHH 105-15 < RIDECYM 107-13

○
43 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13
44 < < < HOUSEHH 105-15 < RIDECYM 107-13

○
45 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13

○
46
○

< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

47
○

TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13
○

C3 48 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < RIDECYM 107-13

< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
○

49
50 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < < RIDECYM 107-13
○

51 < < < < <

○

52 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

53 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

54 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

55 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

56 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

57
○

< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

58
○

< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

59
< < < < <
○

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

< < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 RIDECYM 107-13
○

C4 60
61 < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 RIDECYM 107-13
○

62 < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 RIDECYM 107-13

○

63 < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 RIDECYM 107-13

○

64 < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 RIDECYM 107-13

○

65 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

66 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 RIDECYM 107-13
○

67 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

68 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
○

69 < < < < < RIDECYM 107-13

○

70 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 RIDECYM 107-13
○

71
< < < < < RIDECYM 107-13
○
 Styles
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style †

8 BEAT DANCE2 LATIN 1 PROG 4
32 1 8bt Std 32 41 Open Disco 32 81 Bossa Nova 44 25
2 8bt Ballad 42 70’ Disco 82 Samba 26
3 8bt Folk 43 80’ Disco 83 Cha Cha 27
4 8bt Hit 44 Soul B.B. 84 Rhumba 1 28
5 8bt Medium 45 SynthDance 85 Tango 29
6 8bt Funky 46 Rap 86 Bolero T. 30
7 8bt Modern 47 Euro Pop 87 Rhumba 2 31
8 8bt Swing 48 Party Pop 88 Beguine 32
16 BEAT JAZZ LATIN 2
32 9 16bt Std 32 49 Swing 32 89 Mambo CC00 PC Song †
10 16bt Ballad 50 Mid Swing 90 Salsa 55 0
11 16bt Folk 51 Slow Swing 91 Merengue 1
12 16bt Pop 52 Big Band 1 92 Meneito 2
13 16bt Funky 53 Big Band 2 93 Cumbia 3
14 16bt Hit 54 Dixieland 94 Gipsy 4
15 16btMedium 55 Broadway 95 Guaracha 5
16 16bt Swing 56 Foxtrot 96 Calypso 6
ROCK U.S. TRAD PROG 1 7
32 17 Open Rock 32 57 Blues 44 1 8
18 Metal Rock 58 Slow Blues 2 9
19 Hard Rock 59 Gospel 3 10
20 Slow Rock 60 Western 4 11
21 Soft Rock 61 Bluegrass1 5 12
22 Boogie W. 62 Bluegrass2 6 13
23 Shuffle R. 63 Country 7 14
24 LovelyRock 64 March USA 8 15
FUNK TRAD 1 PROG 2 CC00 PC Song-Perf. †
32 25 Funky Fun 32 65 Slow Waltz 44 9 64 0
26 FunkyElect 66 Wien Waltz 10 1
27 Funky Pop 67 Waltz 11 2
28 Funky Std 68 Romagna 12 3
29 Acid Funk 69 Mazurka 13 4
30 New Age 70 Folk 2_4 14 5
31 Funky Soul 71 Polka 6_8 15 6
32 FunkySwing 72 ItalyMarch 16 7
DANCE1 TRAD 2 PROG 3
32 33 HeavyDance 32 73 Paso Doble 44 17
34 Disco Hit 74 Germ.Polka 18
35 Dance Pop 75 Tarantella 19
36 Down Beat 76 Bajon 20
37 Disco Pop 77 HullyGully 21
38 Disco Fun 78 Twist 22
39 Techno 79 Charleston 23 † On MIDI Common
40 House 80 Reggae 24 channel only

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•20 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performances/Effects
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

CC00 PC Performances† CC00 PC Performances† CC16 PC DSP Effects † CC16 PC DSP Effects †
Group 1 Group 5 0=Eff1 (Reverbs GrpA) 64=Eff2 (Mod. GrpA)
48 1 GrandPiano 48 33 E.G.Piano 1=Eff1 (Reverbs GrpB) 65=Eff2 (Mod. GrpB)

2 St.E.Piano 34 OntheRhodx 48 1 Hall 1 48 1 Mono Delay 1

3 NightSax 35 E.L.P. 2 Hall 2 2 Mono Delay 2

4 SlowToFast 36 Jazzzzz 3 Hall 3 3 Stereo Delay 1

5 St.Guitar 37 Accordion 4 Warm Hall 4 Stereo Delay 2

6 GaryOnVibe 38 Carribean 5 Long Hall 5 Multitap Delay 1

7 MileStone 39 Choir 6 St. Concert 6 Multitap Delay 2

8 Duet 40 ChinaTea 7 Chamber 7 Ping Pong

Group 2 Group 6 8 Studio Room 1 8 Pan Mix

48 9 OscarClub 48 41 EineKleine 9 Studio Room 2 9 Chorus 1

10 Elektric 42 ChromaBell 10 Studio Room 3 10 Chorus 2

11 WinSoprano 43 FanfareUSA 11 Club Room 1 11 Ensemble 1

12 ToneWheel 44 EndTitles 12 Club Room2 12 Ensemble 2

13 W.E.inL.A. 45 SlavetoGTR 13 Club Room3 13 Phaser 1

14 TooFunky 46 TheTemple 14 Vocal 14 Phaser 2

15 Toto_IV 47 Tutti 15 Metal Vocal 15 Flanger 1

16 Mr.Pad 48 Shine You 16 Plate 1 16 Flanger 2

Group 3 Group 7 17 Plate 2 17 Chorus Delay 1

48 17 BigStrings 48 49 Drawbars 1 18 Church 18 Chorus Delay 2

18 E.W.Brass 50 Drawbars 2 19 Mountains 19 Flanger Delay 1

19 BlockBand 51 Drawbars 3 20 Falling 20 Flanger Delay 2

20 Dr.Lead 52 Drawbars 4 21 Early 1 21 Dubbing

21 HeavyFuzz 53 Drawbars 5 22 Early 2 22 Distortion

22 PolyMatrix 54 Drawbars 6 23 Early 3 23 Distortion Delay

23 Church 55 Drawbars 7 24 Stereo 24 Pitch Shifter 1

24 InToDeep 56 Drawbars 8 25 Pitch Shifter 2

Group 4 Group 8 26 Shift Delay

48 25 H.T.Barrel 48 57 27 Rotary 1

26 SilkyStrg 58 28 Rotary 2

27 St.Horns 59 29 EQ Jazz

28 HI.Weather 60 30 EQ Pops

29 PizzaXprs 61 31 EQ Rock

30 BrassMatch 62 32 EQ Classic

31 Coupled 63
32 Antarctica 64

† On MIDI Common
channel only

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Tables A•21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cntrl 80 (ONE SHOT):
○
○

0† Fill>< 0 = Fill>< Off, 64 = Fill>< On

○

1† Fill< 1 = Fill< Off, 65 = Fill< On

○

2† Fill> 2 = Fill> Off, 66 = Fill> On

○

8† Intro
○

16† End
○

24-27† Variations 0-1-2-3

○

40† Key start

○

61† Rotary 1 slow/fast [GrpA] 61 = Rotary 1 Slow, 125 = Rotary Fast

○

62† Rotary 2 slow/fast [GrpB] 62 = Rotary 2 Slow, 126 = Rotary 2 Fast

○

64 Start/Stop
○

66,67† Tempo inc. dec.

○

68,69† Preset inc. dec.

○
○

Cntrl 81
○

OFF [0,63] ON[64,127]

○

0,1,2† Fill><-Fill<-Fill>
○

61† Rotary 1 (Off=slow) [GrpA]

○

62† Rotary 2 (Off=slow) [GrpB]

○

Program 0-127 0-127 0-127

○

Change True number *****

○
○

System Exclusive x x
○

○
System Song Position o o

○
Song Select o o

○
Common Tune o o

○
○
System Clock o o Start, Stop

○
Real Time Commands o o Continue

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○
Aux Active sensing o o

○
Messages All Sound Off o o

○
Reset All Contr. o o

○
Local ON OFF o o

○
All Note Off o o

A•22 Appendix
○
Notes † These messages are available on the Common channel only o: YES x: NO

○
○
○
Mode 1 OMNI ON - POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON - MONO

○
Mode 3 OMNI OFF - POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF - MONO

○
○
○
○
○
 Tables A•23
○
○
MIDI Implementation Chart

○
○
Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A. Model: WK4 World Keyboard Version: 1.00

○
○
FUNCTION Transmitted Recognized Remarks

○
Basic Default 1-16 1-16 2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT

○
Channel Changed 1-16 1-16 EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.

○
○
Mode Default Multimode Multimode

○
Messages X X

○
Altered X X

○
Note 0-127 0-127 true voice depends on

○
Number True voice ***** selected sound

○
○
Velocity Note ON o o

○
Note OFF o o

○
○
After Key’s x o

○
Touch Ch’s o o

○
Pitch Bender o o

○
○

Control 0,32 Bank change 0,32 Bank change Bank change recognized on
○

Change 1 Modulation 1 Modulation common channel, only in reception:

○

6,38 Data Entry 6,38 Data Entry

○

7 Volume 7 Volume Bank P.change

○

10 Pan 10 Pan 1st 2nd Value

○

11 Expression Contr. 11 Expression Controller C#0 C#32† 0-95 Internal styles.

○

18,50† Tuning control 16,48† Effects selection C#0 C#44† 0-31 User Styles
○

64 Damper Pedal 17,49† Effects volume C#0 C#48† 0-63 Programmable Performances
○

66 Sustain (Sostenuto) 18,50† Tuning control C#0 C#55† 0-15 Songs

○

67 Soft pedal 64 Damper Pedal C#0 C#64† 0-7 Song-Performances

○
○

91 Reverb depth 66 Sustain (Sostenuto)

○

93 Chorus depth 67 Soft pedal

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

○

98,99 NRPN 71 Resonance

○

100,101 RPN 72 Release time

○

73 Attack time
○

74 Filter 1 cut-off freq.

○

91 Reverb depth (send)

○

93 Chorus depth (send)

○

98,99 NRPN
○

100,101 RPN
○
○
○
 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RECOGNIZED CONTROL CHANGE MES- CONTROL CHANGE ON TRACKS

SAGES (MIDI CONTROLLERS) CC00,32 Bank change.
A ControlChange message activates a Controlller, CC01 Modulation.
determined by the first ControlChange value.
CC06,38 Data Entry.
The ControlChange consists of three parts: CC07 Main Volume.
• status byte - (status) determines the status of CC10 Pan (panorama).
the ControlChange message.
CC11 Expression.
• data byte 1 - (value 1) MIDI Controller acti-
CC16,48† Effects selection
vated by the ControlChange message. This
is the number by which the ControlChanges CC17,49† Effects volume
are identified in the following tables. CC18,50† General Purpose (Tuning control)
• data byte 2 - (value 2) value of the activated CC32 BankSelect LSB.
MIDI Controller.
CC64 Damper pedal.
CC66 Sostenuto (sustain) pedal.
CC67 Soft pedal.
CC71 Resonance.
CC72 Release Time.
CC73 Attack Time.
CC74 Filter Cutoff Frequency.
CC80 One Shot control
CC81 On/Off control
CC91 Effect 1 send (E1, reverb depth).
CC93 Effect 2 send (E2, modulation depth).
CC98,99 NRPN
CC100-101 RPN

† = travels on MiIDI Common channel only

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•24 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Glossary Destination: Refers to all that to which a MIDI
message generated by a Track can be di-
After Touch: MIDI message activated by ap- rected. The WK4 can direct MIDI messages to
plying pressure after a note on event. The WK4 the internal Sound Generation, to MIDI Out and
keyboard generates Channel Aftertouch mes- to the Sequencer. In the Disk environment, the
sages and recognizes Channel and Polyphonic Destination refers to the device to which data
Aftertouch via MIDI. The relative events also can be saved.
can be manually inserted in the Microscope Dial: The Data Entry wheel located under the
function in Edit Song. Aftertouch is extensively Display, active for Tempo changes in normal
used in Edit Sound to control various sound playing conditions and a Data Entry device in
parameters. Via MIDI, this message can con- Edit situations.
trol modulation or volume in an external MIDI Directory: “Catalogue” of the contents of a
device. floppy disk, the hard disk or RAM.
Block. Organization of data similar to compu- Disk Drive: Device that “reads” a floppy disk.
ter directories or folders. The Block corre- The WK4 disk drive reads 3.5” HD and DD
sponds to the entire contents of the instru- disks. Recognizes the following formats: WK4
ment’s RAM. A floppy disk can contain several (1.6 Mb), Ms-Dos (1.44 Mb), Ms-Dos/Atari ST
Blocks. (720 kb).
Bypass: To ignore, “go around”. ‘Effect by- Display: The 1/4 VGA monitor incorporated in
pass’ refers to the deactivation of the effects. the front panel of the WK4. Permits you view
The EFFECTS OFF LED is on, the sounds parameters, score and lyrics as well as all
bypass the four DSPs and is emitted without information relating to the instrument’s opera-
reverbs or modulations. tion
Common Channel: A programmed MIDI channel Drum Kit: Refers to the layout of the percus-
to, (1) simulate the WK4 keyboard on a con- sive sounds across the keyboard. A Drum Kit
nected Master Keyboard, (2) send control mes- permits you to use a single Track for all the
sages (Bank change, Preset change, Style drum sounds. Each note of the scale corre-
change, Effect change...) from an WK4-Series sponds to a percussive instrument sound. The
instrument to another instrument of the same WK4 ROM Drum Kits are in banks 2,3,4 and 5
series. of the Percussive Group. Each Preset can
Control Change: See MIDI Controllers. contain a user-programmed RAM Drum kit cre-
Controllers: Controlling devices (Pedals), which ated in «Edit Perf Sound».
control the values of various Control Change Dry: commonly used expression related to a
messages. sound not processed by the DSPs.
Cutoff Frequency: Central Frequency of the DSP: (Digital Signal Processor). The effects
intervention band of a Filter. Around the vicin- processor - the WK4 incorporates 4 DSPs: two
ity of the Cutoff Frequency, the action of a Filter reverbs and two modulations or chorus/delay.
gradually becomes less marked, creating a Dynamic: See Velocity.
“bell” in the audio band. Edit: Modify. A section of the operating system
Data Entry: Groups of controls used to inert or capable of modifying the instrument’s param-
specify data and for editing. The Data Entry eters. Each button of the EDIT section gains
controls include: Dial, Cursor buttons, the nu- access to an edit environment.
merical Keypad and the Keyboard (name writ- Envelope: Term that represents (graphically)
ing). the change in the characteristics and quality of
a Sound with time.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Glossary A•25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Filter: A device used to modify a sound by the dial or the numeric keypad.
intervening on the harmonic content. The WK4 Merge: See MIDI Merge.
can control up to 6 filters per sound. In «Edit Microscope: A page in «Edit Song» or «Edit
Perf Sound», it is possible to modify the filter’s Style» where every recorded MIDI event can
cutoff frequency, resonance and other param- be individually modified in terms of position as
eters via macro edit parameters. well as value.
Flash ROM: Up-dateable ROM (“Read only MIDI: (Musical Instrument Digital Interface). A
memory”) which contains the instrument’s op- system of communication between different
erating system and the factory-programmed digital musical instruments. MIDI is based on
data which cannot be destroyed, other than by the connection via three types of ports: IN,
updating the contents with data contained in OUT, THRU. The MIDI system renders all elec-
special OS disks. tronic digital instruments completely program-
Floppy Disk: A magnetic Data support, pro- mable at a distance (e.g. from a computer).
tected by a plastic container, in which WK4 MIDI data provides the receiving instrument
data can be memorized. The data handling with all information necessary to produce sounds.
operations are in «Edit Disk». MIDI Common: See Common channel.
Footswitch: A “physical” switch-action con- MIDI Controllers: MIDI messages which transmit
trolling device. The WK4 can accept 3 function information relating to performance parameters
assignable pedals which can be programmed (Modulation, Main Volume, Damper Pedal...).
to operate as switch action or continuous con- MIDI Merge: The fusion of MIDI events origi-
trol devices. There is also a facility to change nating from the keyboard or MIDI IN and trans-
the pedal switch polarity. mitted together with MIDI OUT data after being
Hard disk: Data storage device capable of high processed by the WK4 tracks. Without MIDI
access speeds and available for the WK4 as an Merge, MIDI IN data are directed to the internal
optional accessory. sound engine and to MIDI THRU, not to MIDI
Headphones: Stereo listening devices used OUT.
for private listening. MIOS: (Musical Instrument Operating Sys-
Loop: Cyclic repetition. A function found in tem). Refers to the WK4 Operating System, the
«Edit Song» used to repeat a specified number program that makes the instrument work. MIOS
of measures (bars) and in “Edit Sound”, used to is resident in FLASH ROM which can be up-
loop an envelope. Also the essential requisite dated with newer versions of the operating
for all Style patterns (riffs) which are short system via floppy disks.
repeating sequences. Modulation: Dynamic modification over time.
Master Keyboard: A controlling device (key- Activated by up/down movements of the Trackball
board). Usually, a MK is a generator of MIDI or by an appropriately programmed pedal.
events, incapable of generating Sounds. It is Multitasking: The operating system’s ability of
connected to the MIDI IN of an Expander, or running several different operating modes at
another MIDI compatible musical instrument. the same time.
The WK4 can operate as an advanced Master Oscillator: The fundamental element that pro-
Keyboard, with functions such as Split, Merge, duces the sound. The WK4 utilizes one or two
various programmable controls including Sys- oscillators per polyphonic voice.
tem Exclusive. Pan: Abbreviation for Panorama. The Pan is
Menu: List of items. A menu appears in most the position of the Sound between the Stereo
edit displays and consists of several items audio channels.
which can be selected with the cursor buttons, Pedal: A switch or continuous physical con-

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•26 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 trolling device which can be assigned a control- the ROM is a flash-ROM, up-dateable with OS-
ling function (start/stop, fill, modulation, damper, disks containing later versions of the operating
etc.). The WK4 can accept three switch action system. ROM memory is not cancelled when
or continuous control pedals. the instrument is switched off.
Performance: A configuration of tracks used Sample: Refers to a portion of the sound
to recall a sound combination for the keyboard recorded in numeric form. The combination of
(Performance Groups), a sound combination several samples along the music scale is called
for the accompaniments (Style-Performance) a multi-sample. In the WK4 multi-samples are
and a sound combination for the Songs (Song- called Waveforms which constitute the princi-
Performance). pal element of the Sound.
Physical Controllers: On-board Sound con- Scart: The connector through which a domes-
trolling devices (Trackball, Pedals, etc.). See tic TV or colour computer monitor can receive
also Controllers. the WK4 display data, including the Lyrics and
Pitch: Intonation, frequency. Music Score of the WK4 Songs.
Pitch Bend: Dynamic modification of the pitch. Score: The WK4 function which permits you to
Activated by left/right movements of the Trackball see the Lyrics and Music Score across the
or by an appropriately programmed pedal, or a display. The WK4 can also transmit the data to
MIDI message. an externally connected domestic TV or colour
Playback: The term that describes the Se- computer monitor, both fitted with the SCART
quencer’s capability of reproducing a Song. connector.
Preload: “Background” Song loading while the Search: The function found in Edit Disk (Sin-
Sequencer is playing another Song. gle Sound operations) which permits you to
Program Change: A MIDI Message used to look for a Sound in a long list by specifying two
change a Sound, Performance, Style or Song. or more letters that are contained in the Sounds
Frequently used in combination with the name. Also found in Edit Sound to permit the
BankSelect (ControlChange 00) message. search of the Wave samples.
Quantize: Correction of imperfect timing er- Sequencer: A system of recording MIDI data.
rors committed during Song and Style record- The Sequencer permits you to record a poly-
ings (including Rhythm patterns). phonic song sound by sound, and reproduce
RAM: (Random Access Memory). A type of the song after applying eventual corrections.
Memory which can be updated with new data. The quality of a sequencer recording is main-
The WK4 can be fitted with three types of RAM: tained and does not decay, even after many
System-RAM, Volatile Sample-RAM, battery- recordings and modifications. The Sequencer
backed Sample-RAM. RAM memory does not does not record sounds, it records MIDI data
retain data after turning off, unless backed by a (events). The WK4 incorporates a powerful 32-
special battery. track sequencer with extensive edit functions.
RGB: (Red, Green, Blue) The signal emitted Song: A piece of music, recorded or repro-
by the output of the same name and generated duced (played back) by the Sequencer.
by the WK4 for the purpose of projecting the Sound: In the WK4, the Sound is the basic
display images and Song lyrics to an external source, based on samples elaborated by enve-
monitor (a colour computer or domestic TV). lopes and filters. The Sounds, assigned to
ROM: (Read Only Memory). A part of the WK4 Tracks, make up the Performances.
memory which cannot be modified, and in which Sound Patch: A Sound consisting of several
factory programmed data is conserved, includ- other sounds. The Sound Patch can assign
ing the Operating System MIOS. In the WK4, two different sounds separated by a dynamic

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Glossary A•27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 threshold, or a different sound to each key of
the keyboard (in this case called a Drumkit).
Source: A provider of MIDI events that can be
directed to the WK4 Tracks. In the WK4, the
sources of MIDI events are; the keyboard (lo-
cal), the MIDI In and the Sequencer. In the
Disk environment, the Source refers to the data
storage device which contains File to select
and load or save to a Destination.
Track: A single timbre part of a Performance
or single instrumental part of a Song or Style.
Each Track is individually programmable for
the assigned Sound, volume settings, pan,
MIDI channel, etc..
Transpose: The change in pitch of a note with
respect to a standard value.
Tweak: A term that describes the slight modi-
fication of one or more of a Sound’s param-
eters. You can tweak a sound in real time, for
example, using the programmable pedals to
which the Edit Sound parameters have been
assigned (Filter, Attack, Release, etc.).
User Interface: All that which appears within
the Display. The means with which the user
communicates with the musical instrument -
that is, the availability of information relating to
the status of the data - and in general with all
computers. The WK4 User Interface is a graphic
system of superimposable windows containing
parameters in graphical and text form.
User: Generally, this term indicates all that
can be programmed by the operator.
Velocity: MIDI message always coupled to the
activation of a note. Velocity controls the sound’s
intensity, proportionally to the velocity with which
the keys are struck. Velocity is also used to
control various parameters in Edit Sound.
Wet: commonly used expression related to a
sound processed by the DSPs.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•28 Appendix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the keyboard mode 4. 10
Index Changing the name of a Performance 4. 20
Changing the Split Point 4. 12
Changing the tempo of a Style 5. 19
Changing the track status 4. 9
A Changing track volumes 4. 13
Accompaniment tracks 5. 5 Channel A effects 9. 1
Additional functions (Edit Disk) 25. 12 Channel B effects 9. 1
All 6. 3 Check version 25. 11
All (Score Controls) 22. 21 Chord Language 21. 6
All Song (Jukebox) 7. 11 Chord recognition modes 5. 9
Apple Macintosh 8. 9 Chord to Arr.1 / Chord to Arr.2 15. 6
Arrange Memory 5. 8 Chords (Edit Score) 22. 24
Arrange Mode 5. 8, 5. 9, 5. 13 Chords (Score Controls) 22. 21
Arrange On/Off 5. 8 Chords on lyrics (Video controls) 22. 22
Arrangement patterns 12. 1 Chords track 22. 3
Assigning Sounds to the tracks 4. 7 Clear the keyboard transpose setting 1. 16
Atari ST 6. 26 Clock send 15. 4
Attack 19. 3 Close 18. 4
Audio Inputs 3. 9, 21. 6 Coarse 21. 3
Audio Out 19. 6 Coarse&Fine 21. 3
Audio Out (A/V interface) 21. 8 Common Channel 8. 3, 15. 6
Audio/Video card 3. 9 Common Channel/Arrangement 15. 6
Author 22. 2 Common/Arrangement 8. 4
Auto Chord Mode 5. 9 Compare 19. 8
Auto Preload 24. 1, 24. 3 Compatibility switch 15. 5
Autobacking 5. 13 Complex structure 3. 6
Complex structure (Edit pages) 13. 2
B Complex structure edit procedure 13. 4
Backup copies 6. 36, 25. 11 Computer 3. 8, 21. 4
Band-pass 19. 3 Computer port 8. 1, 8. 9
Band-pass filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3 Configuration 15. 2
BankSelect 8. 5, 15. 5 Connections 3. 7
Basic structure of a Style 12. 1 Contents A2.i
Bass Sustain 21. 4 Continuous control Pedals 3. 7, 17. 2
Bass to Lowest 5. 8 Continuous Pedal Functions 17. 5
Battery & Release 21. 9 Control Change 8. 1
Block 3. 23, 6. 2, 18. 4 Controlling a Song 8. 6
Block rename 25. 13 Controlling the Styles 8. 5
Block size 25. 13 Controls rec 11. 6
Bypassing the effects 9. 4 Copy 22. 6
Copy (Edit Disk) 25. 4
C Copy (Edit Style) 23. 6
Cancel files (Edit Disk) 25. 2 Copy a file (Edit Disk) 25. 4
Catch locator 22. 19 Copy All tracks (Edit Song) 22. 6
Catch locator (Edit Style) 23. 16 Copy Chords track (Edit Song) 22. 6
Catch Note 19. 7, 21. 3 Copy Lyrics track (Edit Song) 22. 6
CC#0 (ControlChange) 17. 3 Copy Master track (Edit Song) 22. 6
CC#32 (ControlChange) 17. 3 Copy mode 22. 7
Change disk name 25. 9 Copy mode (Edit Style) 23. 7
Change Velocity 22. 12 Copy Music track (Edit Song) 22. 6
Change Velocity (Edit Style) 23. 12 Copy Parameters (Edit Song) 22. 7
Changing Style without stopping the Copy Riff (Edit Style) 23. 6
accompaniment 5. 16 Copy Style (Edit Style) 23. 6

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Index A•29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Copy times 22. 7 Display lyrics on an external monitor 7. 14
Copy times (Edit Style) 23. 7 Display mode 21. 6
Copy to (Edit Perf Sound) 19. 4 Display the score 7. 12
Copy to Layer 19. 7 Drum mask 23. 18
Copy to octave 21. 3 Drumkit 3. 5, 19. 5
Copy Track (Edit Tracks/Split) 18. 7 Drumkit/Sound Patch parameters 19. 6
Copy Track (Edit Song) 22. 6 Drumkits (tables) A. 10
Copy Track (Edit Style) 23. 6 Duet 18. 4
Copy Variation (Edit Style) 23. 6 Dynamic Arrange 5. 13
Countdown 7. 9, 11. 6 Dynamic layer 19. 5
Create a new Style 12. 2 Dynamic switch 19. 7
Create a Preload list 24. 2
Create a Score part 7. 16 E
Create Track 18. 7 E-IDE interface (Hard disk) 6. 1
Creating a new Performance 4. 18 E1 Send (A/V interface) 21. 7
Crossfade effects 18. 3 E2 Send (A/V interface) 21. 7
Cutoff (A/V interface) 21. 8 Echo LCD 7. 15
Echo LCD (Video controls) 22. 21
D Edit Controllers/Pads 17. 1
Damper 3. 7 Edit Disk & Hard Disk 25. 1
Data Entry 3. 18 Edit Effects 14. 1
Data entry devices 3. 18 Edit environments 3. 6
Data saved to a Performance 4. 16 Edit General 21. 1
Date & Time 21. 5 Edit MIDI 15. 1
Decay 19. 3 Edit Mixer 16. 1
Delay 18. 6 Edit note 19. 6
Delay (delays) 14. 3 Edit overview 13. 1
Delay (reverbs) 14. 3 Edit pages 3. 14, 13. 3
Delay/Modulation 9. 1 Edit Perf Sound 19. 2
Delete (Jukebox) 7. 11 Edit Perf Sound parameters 19. 3
Delete (Microscope Edit Style) 23. 16 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 19. 1
Delete Master Track (Edit Song) 22. 19 Edit Score 7. 16, 22. 23
Delete measures (Edit Song) 22. 11 Edit Score, how to edit... 22. 23
Delete measures (Edit Style) 23. 11 Edit Score page 22. 26
Demo 1. 5 Edit Song 22. 1
Depth (Effects) 14. 3 Edit Sound Patch 19. 5
Destination 6. 3, 6. 21 Edit Style 23. 1
Detune 18. 2 Edit Style procedure 23. 1
Detune (Effects) 14. 4 Edit Tracks/Split 18. 1
Dial 3. 20 Edit/Numbers 3. 20
Dial (Tempo/Data) 5. 7 Eff 2 (Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation) 19. 6
Dialog windows 3. 17 Eff Group (A/V interface) 21. 7
Diffusion (Effects) 14. 3 Eff.1 (Reverb) 19. 6
Digital Signal Processor 9. 1 Eff.1 14. 1
Directory 6. 3 Eff.2 14. 1
Disk 6. 1 Effect 1 - Reverb table 14. 5
Disk commands 6. 3 Effect 2 - Modulation effects table 14. 6
Disk Drive Head Cleaning 6. 36 Effect 2 to Effect 1 14. 1
Disk formats 6. 1 Effect Type 9. 1
Disk handling information 6. 35 Effects 9. 1
Display 3. 10 Effects Bypass 1. 12, 9. 4
Display Contrast 1. 1 Effects Off 10. 8
Display controls 21. 6 Effects Programming 14. 3
Display Hold 4. 5, 10. 8 Effects tables A. 21

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•30 Index
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Effects type 14. 1 Fingered 2 5. 9, 5. 11
Ejecting a Floppy Disk 6. 35 Fixed 23. 12
Empty Track (Edit Style) 23. 2 Fixed Chord Mode 5. 9
End 7. 8, 11. 7 Fixed Velocity Mode (Edit Song) 22. 12
End line (Edit Score) 22. 27 Floppy disk 6. 21
End measure 7. 8 Floppy disk (Preload) 24. 3
Ending 5. 7 Floppy disks 6. 1
Enter 3. 22 Footswitch polarity 21. 2
Equalization 1. 15 Forced Stop 7. 8, 11. 4, 11. 7
Equalizer (Mixer) 16. 3 Format hard disk 25. 10
Erase 7. 9, 11. 7, 12. 5, 22. 3 Format MS-DOS/Atari disk 25. 9
Erase (Edit Disk) 25. 2 Format work disk 25. 9
Erase (Edit Style) 23. 3 Free 1 5. 9, 5. 12
Erase Master track (Edit Song) 22. 3 Free 2 5. 9, 5. 12
Erase Parameters (Edit Song) 22. 4 Free memory 12. 6
Erase Riff 12. 5 Free memory (Edit Disk) 25. 12
Erase Riff (Edit Style) 23. 3 Frequency Modulation 14. 3
Erase Song 7. 9, 11. 7 Front Panel 2. 3
Erase Style 23. 3, 23. 4 Full keyboard mode 4. 1
Erase Track 7. 9, 11. 7, 18. 8
Erase Track (Edit Song) 22. 3 G
Erase Track (Edit Style) 23. 3 General (Edit) 21. 1
Erase Track (Style) 12. 5 General «Disk» procedure 6. 5
Erase Variation 12. 5, 23. 4 General edit procedure (Edit Perf Sound) 19. 1
Erase Variation (Edit Style) 23. 3 General Equalization 3. 7
Error found 25. 11 General Load procedure 6. 8
Escape 3. 22 General MIDI 7. 1, 15. 5
Event List 22. 14, 22. 17, 23. 14 General reverb control 1. 15
Event type 23. 4 General Save procedure 6. 21
Exclude 19. 6 General settings (MIDI) 15. 3
Execute (Jukebox) 7. 11 General transposition 4. 15
Expand 19. 8 Get Score 7. 16
Exponential curves 18. 3 Get score... (Edit Score) 22. 26
Extension (Edit Score) 22. 27 Glossary A. 25
External 7. 7 GM compatible MIDI Files 7. 1
External (MIDI Clock) 15. 3 GMX format 6. 1, 7. 2
Go to loc... (Edit Style) 23. 16
F Go to loc... (Edit Score) 22. 26
Fade In/Out 5. 7 Group 6. 3
Falcon 6. 26 Group A & B 14. 1
Feedback (delays) 14. 3
Feedback (Distortion) 14. 3 H
Feel (Quantize) 11. 8 Handling Floppy Disks 6. 36
File Quantity 6. 3 Hard Disk 6. 1, 6. 21
File Selector 6. 3 Hard Disk (Preload) 24. 3
File Type 6. 4 Hard Disk check/recovery 25. 10
File Types 6. 2 Hard Disk Protection 25. 11
Files 6. 2 Hard Disk sleep time 25. 11
Fill 5. 7 Hardcopy (Pads) 17. 3
Filter (A/V interface) 21. 8 Harmony 18. 4
Filter (Edit Drumkit/SoundPatch) 19. 6 Harmony On/Off 5. 8
Filter Cutoff (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3 Harmony Type 5. 8, 18. 4
Finetune 21. 3 Harmony type structures 18. 5
Fingered 1 5. 9, 5. 11 Headphones 1. 13

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Index A•31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Help 10. 9 Load All 6. 19
Help language 21. 6 Load Group 6. 17
High Frequency (Equalizer) 16. 3 Load Operations 6. 8
High Frequency Decay 14. 3 Load Single Block 6. 9
High Gain (Effects) 14. 4 Load Single MIDI File 6. 12
High Gain (Equalizer) 16. 3 Load Single Performance 6. 15
High-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3 Load Single Setup 6. 10
How to Program Performances 4. 6 Load Single Song 6. 11
How to use HELP 10. 9 Load Single Sound 6. 13
How to use the manual i Load Single Style Performance 6. 15
Load Single Prog. (User) Style 6. 15
I Loading WX2/SX2 Songs and Styles 6. 20
IBM PC 8. 9 Local Off 8. 7, 8. 8, 15. 7
IDE interface (Hard disk) 6. 1 Locator 7. 8, 11. 7
Input VU 21. 7 Loop 7. 8, 11. 4, 11. 7
Ins type (Edit Song) 22. 19 Low Frequency (Equalizer) 16. 3
Ins type (Microscope Edit Style) 23. 16 Low Gain (Effects) 14. 4
Insert (Microscope Edit Style) 23. 16 Low Gain (Equalizer) 16. 3
Insert (Jukebox) 7. 11 Low Pass Filter (Effects) 14. 3
Insert Measure 22. 10, 23. 10 Low-pass Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3
Inserting a Disk into the disk drive 6. 35 Lower Memory 5. 8
Inserting chord symbols 22. 23 Lyric 1...Lyric 4 (Score Controls) 22. 21
Inserting lyrics (Edit Score) 22. 25 Lyrics (Edit Score) 22. 25, 22. 26
Inserting notes (Edit Score) 22. 23 Lyrics in large type 7. 13
Internal 7. 7 Lyrics Track 22. 3
Internal (MIDI Clock) 15. 3
Internal sound generator icon 15. 2 M
Intro 5. 7 Macintosh 3. 8, 21. 5
Introduction i Main Disk pages 6. 2
Mask 23. 17
J Mask Arranger tracks 23. 17
Jazz 18. 5 Master 8. 1
Jukebox 7. 5, 7. 9 Master Pitch 21. 2
Jukebox Soft buttons 7. 11 Master Track 22. 17
Master Transpose 4. 15
K Master Transpose enable/disable 18. 1
Key 22. 17 Measures 12. 5
Key Assign 17. 3 Medium Gain (Effects) 14. 4
Key Note 12. 3, 12. 5 Memorizing modifications to a Performance 13. 4
Key Pad 3. 20 Memory progress bar 11. 8
Key Range 18. 6 Metronome 7. 9, 11. 4, 12. 5
Key Start 5. 6 Metronome vol 7. 9
Key-play 3. 4 Mic/Line 3. 9
Keyboard Scale 21. 2 Mic/Line On/Off 21. 8
Keyboard Sensitivity 21. 2 Microscope 22. 14, 23. 14
Keyboard/Common Channel icon 15. 2 MID extension 6. 26
MIDI 3. 8, 8. 1
L MIDI Channels 8. 2, 15. 1
LFO Delay 19. 4 MIDI Clock 15. 3
LFO Depth 19. 4 MIDI Configuration 8. 3
LFO Rate 19. 4 MIDI connection rules 8. 1
Linear 7. 8, 11. 4, 11. 7 MIDI Controllers 8. 1
Linear curves 18. 3 MIDI events 7. 1
Listen to the Demo Songs 1. 5 MIDI filters 15. 3

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•32 Index
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MIDI Implementation Chart A. 23 Open 2 18. 4
MIDI IN 8. 1 Option 11. 6, 20. 1
MIDI IN fix velocity 15. 4 Oscillators and Layers (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 2
MIDI IN icon 15. 2 Output 3. 7
MIDI IN Transpose 15. 4 Overdub 11. 6
MIDI Lock 15. 1, 15. 7 Overdub Mode (User Styles) 12. 5
MIDI Merge 15. 4
MIDI Messages 8. 1 P
MIDI OUT 8. 1 Pads 1. 12, 17. 3
MIDI OUT icon 15. 2 Pages 3. 10
MIDI THRU 8. 1 Pan 19. 6
Mixer 16. 1 Pan (A/V interface) 21. 7
Mixer Lock 5. 8 Pan (Mixer) 16. 1
Mode 11. 6, 18. 3 Panic 10. 10
Mode for Pedalboard options 21. 4 Parametric boost Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3
Mode (User Styles) 12. 5 Parametric cut Filter (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3
Mode/Priority 18. 3 PC-IBM 3. 8
Models with Optional Hard Disk Installed v PC1 (Computer) 21. 5
Modulation 17. 1 PC2 (Computer) 21. 5
Move 22. 5, 23. 5, 25. 6 Ped 1 3. 7
MS-DOS 6. 26 Ped 2 3. 7
Multi mode 4. 1 Ped./Pad 17. 3
Multifunction 21. 4 Pedal polarity 3. 7
Multimedia 1. 6 Pedal Volume 11. 6
Music Track 22. 3 Pedalbass 21. 4
Musical motif 12. 1 Pedalboard 3. 9, 21. 4
Mute 3. 4 Pedalboard / Computer 21. 4
Pedalchord 21. 4
N Pedals 3. 7
Name 22. 2 Pedals assignment 17. 2
Navigate 3. 18 Pedals programming 17. 2
Navigating 3. 18 Pedals/Pads Lock 17. 3
Navigation (Edit section) 13. 1 Performance Groups 3. 3
New Floppy Disk (Edit Disk) 25. 12 Performance tables A. 21
Next event (Edit Score) 22. 24, 22. 26 Performances 3. 3, 4. 4
Non-volatile RAM 3. 23 Peterson 18. 5
Normal 23. 12 Phones 3. 9
Normal Velocity Mode (Edit Song) 22. 12 PitchBend 17. 1
Note Off (MIDI) 8. 1 Play 7. 5
Note Off Quantize (Edit Song) 22. 8 Play (Preload) 24. 4
Note Off Quantize (Edit Style) 23. 8 Play mode 7. 8
Note On (MIDI) 8. 1 Play modes 3. 1
Note On Quantize (Edit Song) 22. 8 Play Songs using Jukebox 7. 10
Note On Quantize (Edit Style) 23. 8 Play the Programmable Pads 1. 12
Numeration (MIDI) 8. 3 Play view parameters 7. 7
Play view Soft buttons 7. 9
O Play/Rec mode 7. 8, 11. 7
Octave 1 18. 5 Play/Rec View pages 3. 12
Octave 2 18. 5 Playback all the songs or MIDI files on disk 24. 1
Octave Down 21. 3 Playback control buttons 7. 5
Octave Up 21. 3 Power supply 3. 7
One Finger 5. 9 Power up and get to know the basics 1. 1
One finger 5. 11 Precautions to observe when using WK4
Open 1 18. 4 disks with a computer 25. 15

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Index A•33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Preload 1. 18, 24. 1 Restoring the original default
Preload functions 24. 3 Style-Performances 5. 20
Preload list 24. 1 Restoring the original Performance settings 4. 22
Previous event (Edit Score) 22. 24, 22. 26 Restoring the Songs memory 7. 22, 11. 1
Priority 18. 3 Restoring the User Styles memory 12. 4
Program Change 8. 1, 8. 5 Reverb Time 14. 3
Programming Song-Performances 7. 3 Reverbs 9. 1
Programming Songs on an Riff 12. 1, 23. 3
external sequencer 8. 8 Rock 18. 5
Punch In/Out 11. 6, 12. 5 ROM-Sound 3. 5
ROM-Sound tables A. 2
Q Room Size (Reverb) 14. 3
Quantize 11. 8, 12. 3, 12. 6, 22. 8, 23. 8 Root (Edit Score) 22. 24, 22. 27
Quick Rec Recording 1. 20, 11. 1 Rotary (Reverb) 14. 3
QuickRec 7. 17
S
R Sample-RAM (Edit Disk) 25. 12
RAM -Sound 3. 5 Save All 6. 34
RAM reset vii Save Group 6. 32
RAM-Sound 3. 5 Save operations 6. 21
Random pan (Mixer) 16. 2 Save Single Block 6. 23
Random pitch 18. 2 Save Single MIDI file 6. 26
Rapid Song recording 7. 17 Save Single Performance 6. 30
Rear Panel 2. 9 Save Single Setup 6. 24
Rec riff 12. 5 Save Single Song 6. 25
Rec View 11. 6 Save Single Sound 6. 28
Rec View (User Styles) 12. 5 Save Single Style Performance 6. 30
Rec View pages 3. 13 Save Single User Style 6. 30
Recall Styles by selecting Programmable Save... (Edit General) 21. 3
Performances 10. 2 Saving changes to a different Performance 4. 18
Rechargeable battery vi Saving changes to the current Performance 4. 17
Recognized Control Change messages A. 24 Saving the Setup 3. 24
Record 3. 4 Saving the tempo to a Performance 5. 19
Record a Song 1. 20 Saving to the power-up Performance 4. 17
Record View page 11. 6 Scale Conversion 12. 3, 12. 6
Recording a Song 11. 1, 11. 5 Scale Conversion tables 12. 7
Release (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3 Score button 7. 11, 22. 20
Replace 11. 6, 12. 5 Score Controls 7. 13, 22. 21
Reset list 24. 3 Score split (Video controls) 22. 21
Reset list (Jukebox) 7. 11 Score Track 22. 20
Resetting at Power Up v Search next 25. 14
Resonance (A/V interface) 21. 8 Search Resource 25. 13
Resonance (Ed. Perf Sound) 19. 3 Select a Style with the Performances 5. 4
Restore 21. 9 Select all (Preload) 24. 4
Restore All 21. 10 Select all tracks 11. 6
Restore all tracks 19. 4 Select Programmable Performances
Restore Current edit (Drumkit/SoundPatch) 19. 8 via MIDI 10. 1
Restore Performance 21. 10 Select Riff (Microscope - Edit Style) 23. 14
Restore S.P. Performance Select Song-Performances 10. 7
(Drumkit/SoundPatch) 19. 8 Select Songs 10. 6
Restore Songs 11. 1 Select Songs via MIDI 10. 6
Restore Style-Performance 21. 10 Select Sounds 10. 3
Restore Styles 12. 4, 21. 10 Select Sounds via MIDI 10. 5
Restore Track 19. 4 Select Styles 10. 2

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•34 Index
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Select Styles via MIDI 10. 2 Source 6. 3
Selecting Performances 4. 4 Specifications ii
Selecting Performances during Style play 5. 14 Speed (rotary effects) 14. 3
Selecting single Sounds 4. 2 Standard MIDI file 7. 1
Selecting Song-Performances 7. 3 Start 7. 8, 11. 7
Selecting Songs 7. 4, 8. 6 Start and End locators 11. 4
Selecting Styles 5. 1 Start measure 7. 8
Selecting the Chord recognition modes 5. 11 Start parameters 22. 18
Selecting the effect types 9. 2 Start Tempo 7. 9
Selecting the Song-Performances 8. 6 Start/Stop 5. 6
Selecting the Styles 8. 5 Status of a track 3. 4
Selection 10. 1 Stereo panorama 16. 1
Selection windows 3. 16 Stop 7. 6
Semitone (Effects) 14. 4 Store 19. 8
Send Level 9. 5, 14. 2 Store Performance 4. 16
Seq-play 3. 4 Structure of the Edit environments 13. 1
Sequencer 7. 5 Style 12. 5
Set date 21. 5 Style controls 5. 6
Set time 21. 5 Style Groups 5. 1
Setup 3. 24, 21. 9 Style Lock 3. 2, 5. 4
Setup (Edit General) 21. 1 Style Name 23. 2
Show.. (Microscope Edit Style) 23. 14 Style tables A. 20
Simple structure 3. 6 Style-Performance 3. 3
Simple structure (Edit pages) 13. 1 Style/RealTime mode 3. 1
Simple structure edit procedure 13. 3 Switch action control pedals 3. 7
Single 6. 3 Switch action pedals 17. 2
Single Programmable Performances 6. 30 Switch Pedal Functions 17. 4
Single Touch Play 3. 2, 5. 4 Synchronizing MIDI clock 7. 7
Slave 8. 1
Smart 18. 4 T
SMF (Preload) 24. 4 Tap Tempo 5. 7
Solo button 4. 2 Tempo 5. 19, 7. 7, 11. 8, 12. 5
Song (Preload) 24. 3 Tempo Lock 5. 8
Song memory 7. 9 Time Signature 7. 9, 11. 7, 12. 5
Song mode 3. 2 Time Signature (User Styles) 12. 3
Song Name 22. 2 Title 22. 2
Song P. button 7. 3 To octave 21. 3
Song Playback 7. 5 Track Icons 3. 4
Song position pointer 7. 8 Track Scroll button 5. 5
Song Publisher 22. 2 Track status icons 7. 2
Song-Performances 3. 3, 7. 3 Track transposer 18. 1
Song Quick Rec method 11. 2 Trackball 17. 1
Songs & MIDI files 7. 1 Tracks 3. 4
Songs-Group 6. 17, 6. 32 Transpose 18. 1, 22. 13, 23. 13
Sound and Sound Patch 19. 1 Transpose (Edit Drumkit/SoundPatch) 19. 6
Sound Patch 19. 5 Transpose the instrument 1. 16
Sound Patch Options 19. 7 Transposing tracks 4. 14
Sound Search 25. 14 Tuning 19. 6
Sound View 11. 6 Tuning/Scale 21. 2
Sound View (User Styles) 12. 5
Sound View pages 3. 10 U
SoundPatch 3. 5 Undo 11. 5, 22. 2, 23. 2
Sounds 3. 5 Undo (Style) 12. 4
Sounds and tracks 4. 1 Up-dateable operating system v

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Index A•35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Upper&Lower mode 4. 1
User Configurations 3. 23
User programmable scales 21. 2
User Style Recording 12. 1, 12. 4
Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 4. 8
Utility 25. 8
V
Variation 23. 3
Variations 5. 7
Velocity 8. 1, 22. 12
Velocity (Edit Style) 23. 12
Velocity curve 18. 3
Velocity mode (Edit Song) 22. 12
Velocity mode (Edit Style) 23. 12
Velocity range 18. 4
Video 3. 9
Video controls (Score Controls) 22. 21
Video mode 7. 15
View mode (Score Controls) 22. 21
Volume (A/V interface) 21. 7
Volume (Mixer) 16. 1
W
Warnings 3. 17
What is a Riff? 12. 1
What is a Song? 7. 1
What is a Standard MIDI file? 7. 1
Windows 3. 10
WK4 used as a controlling device 8. 7
WK4-computer-expander connection 8. 9
Write Protect Tab 6. 35
Y
Y shift 7. 15
Y shift (Video controls) 22. 21

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

A•36 Index
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate this product.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stock Code 271054

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

PRINTED IN ITALY

Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy – Via delle Rose, 12
Tel. +39 541 959511 – fax +39 541 957404 – tlx 550555 GMUSIC I
Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine